Remote Automation Solutions Bristol TeleFlow Corrector 3530-50B Owner's Manual
Pubblicità
Pubblicità
Instruction Manual
CI-3530-50B
May, 2006
TeleFlow Corrector Model 3530-50B
TeleFlow
™
Corrector
www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!
Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.
These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol for further information.
EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING
The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons. It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, fail-safe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc. If additional in-formation is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol .
RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING
When returning any equipment to Bristol for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol and save Bristol harmless from any liability or damage which Bristol may incur or suffer due to such party's failure to so act.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April 16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).
The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE
This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read supplemental document S14006 at the back of this manual for proper care and handling of ESD-sensitive components.
Bristol Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Telephone (860) 945-2200
C.
D.
F.
A.
A.
B.
E.
B.
WARRANTY
Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.
Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety
(90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.
Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol, are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.
All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without
Bristol's consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.
THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES AS TO
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE), AND NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES,
OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN
IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND
THE DESCRIPTION OF THE FACE HEREOF.
No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.
REMEDIES
Buyer's sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if
Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol's Watertown office, unless Bristol's Water-town office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstalllation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person's transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.
Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation, from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its employees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.
How to return material for Repair or Exchange
Before a product can be returned to Bristol for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA (Return
Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Repair Dept. to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.
You can easily obtain a RA number by:
A. FAX
Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A Bristol Repair
Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
B. E-MAIL
Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Web site (www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]
. A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.
C. Mail
Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to
Bristol Inc.
Repair
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
D. Phone
Calling the Bristol Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A Bristol Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.
A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.
Bristol Inc. Repair Authorization Form
(off-line completion)
(Providing this information will permit Bristol Inc. to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)
Date___________________ RA #___________________SH_
Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.
•
Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy
•
Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form
•
Return to Customer
Line No.____________
Please be aware of the Non warranty standard charge:
•
There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable (
√
in “returned”
B,C, or D of part III below)
Part I Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns
Address No.
Bill to :
Purchase Order:
Phone:
(office use only) Address No.
Ship to:
Fax:
(office use only)
Contact Name: ____________________________________
E-Mail:
Model No./Part No. Description
Range/Calibration S/N
Reason for return : Failure Upgrade Verify Operation Other
1.
Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,
Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)
(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)
2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________
3. What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software &version?
Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available
A.
If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to Bristol’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
B.
If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:
C.
If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product: repaired returned replaced scrapped? returned replaced scrapped?
D.
If Bristol is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: returned replaced *see below?
* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: ______________________________ phone_____________________
If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone_____________________
Special Requests: ____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Ship prepaid to: Bristol Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-3875 Form GBU 13.01 Rev. B 04/11/06
Bristol
Training
GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL
INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM
• Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line
• Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.
• Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.
• Know your system.
As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Inc. offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at three locations: Houston, Orlando and our Watertown, CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol products and realize the full potential of your system.
For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at
(860) 945-2343. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-
6200.
A Few Words About Bristol Inc.
For over 100 years, Bristol has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey
SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.
On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Inc. instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.
Getting Additional Information
In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:
Help Files / Release Notes
Many Bristol Inc. software products incorporate help screens. In addition, the software typically includes a ‘read me’ release notes file detailing new features in the product, as well as other information which was available too late for inclusion in the manual.
Contacting Bristol Inc. Directly
Bristol Inc.'s world headquarters are located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,
Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.
Our main phone numbers are:
(860) 945-2200
(860) 945-2213 (FAX)
Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.
Telephone Support - Technical Questions
During regular business hours, Bristol Inc.'s Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.
For technical questions about TeleFlow products call (860) 945-8604.
For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2394 or (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-3865 or e-mail: [email protected]
For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, OpenBSI Utilities , UOI and all other software except for Control Wave and OpenEnterprise products, call (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.
You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]
The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/
For assistance in interfacing Bristol hardware to radios, contact Bristol’s Communication
Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-9464 .
You can e-mail the Communication Technology Group at: [email protected]
Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.
Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover of this manual) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative.
Please call the main Bristol Inc. number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.
Visit our Site on the World Wide Web
For general information about Bristol Inc. and its products, please visit our site on the
World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com
Training Courses
Bristol’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2343 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.
Contents
Page
1.1 GENERAL
1.2 PHYSICAL
1.2.1
1.2.2
Enclosure ......................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.3 Internal Mounting Brackets............................................................................................... 1-3
Display/Switch Panel Assembly ....................................................................................... 1-3 1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
Local Communications Port ............................................................................................. 1-3
Circuit Board.................................................................................................................... 1-4
Solar Panel Option ........................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.2.13
1.2.14
Field Wiring Options ......................................................................................................... 1-5
TeleCounter (Pulser) Assembly ....................................................................................... 1-5
Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) Option..................................................... 1-5
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board Option.................................................. 1-5
1.2.15 Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board Option .................................................. 1-6
1.3 FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.3.1
1.3.3.2
Flow Rate Calculations and Flow Time Accumulation ..................................................... 1-7
Volume Calculations ........................................................................................................ 1-7
1.3.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.4.1
1.3.4.2
1.3.4.3
1.3.4.4
Volume and Energy Integration........................................................................................ 1-7
Grid Pressure (Auxiliary Input) ......................................................................................... 1-7
Archives............................................................................................................................ 1-7
Daily Historical Data Log .................................................................................................. 1-8
Periodic Historical Data Log ............................................................................................. 1-8
Historical Trending Log .................................................................................................... 1-9
Alarm and Event Storage ................................................................................................. 1-9
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.6.1
1.3.7
1.3.7.1
Communications............................................................................................................... 1-9
BSAP Message Support ................................................................................................ 1-10
Flow Rate Control -DDC (jog control) Using PID ........................................................... 1-10
1.3.7.2
1.3.7.3
Pulse Output for External Totalizer or Sampler.............................................................. 1-11
Nominations ................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.3.8
1.4 ENVIRONMENT............................................................................................................. 1-12
Section 1A APPLICATION SOFTWARE
1A.1
1A.2
1A.3
1A.4
1A.5
1A.5.1
1A.5.2
1A.5.3
CATEGORIES OF APPLICATION SOFTWARE ...........................................................1A-1
ACCOL TOOLS SOFTWARE ........................................................................................1A-2
OPEN BSI UTILITIES SOFTWARE ...............................................................................1A-4
Stand-Alone Unit ............................................................................................................1A-6 local Area Network (LAN)...............................................................................................1A-7
Wide Area Network (WAN) ............................................................................................1A-9
3530-50B Contents / 0-1
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
Contents
Page
INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS ...................................................................... 2-1
MOUNTING THE TeleFlow™ Corrector .......................................................................... 2-1
2.2.2 Configuring The TeleCounter Assembly .......................................................................... 2-3
Rotation Of The TeleCounter Magnet Wheel and Odometer ........................................... 2-3
2.3 INSTRUMENT
Opening The Instrument Front Cover............................................................................... 2-5
JP3 Battery Backup Enable ............................................................................................. 2-6
2.4 STATIC PRESSURE CONNECTION .............................................................................. 2-7
2.5 WIRING
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
Signal Shielding and Grounding....................................................................................... 2-9
WIRING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS.............................................................................. 2-12 2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.5.1
2.6.5.2
2.6.5.3
2.7
Auxiliary Analog Input..................................................................................................... 2-15
RS-232 Network and Local Communications Ports ....................................................... 2-15
Local Port ....................................................................................................................... 2-15
Network Port................................................................................................................... 2-16
Modem On Network Port................................................................................................ 2-17
MOUNTING THE OPTIONAL SOLAR PANEL .............................................................. 2-19
Swivel (Directional Facing)............................................................................................. 2-19 2.7.1
2.7.2
2.8
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
TeleFlow ™ Corrector CONFIGURATION ..................................................................... 2-21
INSTALLING A TeleFlow IN A HAZARDOUS AREA..................................................... 2-21
Installing a Nonincendive TeleFlow................................................................................ 2-21
Installing an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow ......................................................................... 2-22
3.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
ACCESSING PARTS FOR TESTING OR REPLACEMENT ........................................... 3-1
COMPONENT REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ..................................... 3-2
Intrinsically Safe Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure............................................ 3-2
Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure (with Modem Option) .................................... 3-4
Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure (with Radio Option) ....................................... 3-8
CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement
3.3.5
3.3.6
CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement
Removal/Replacement of the On Board Fuse F1 .......................................................... 3-13
0-2 / Contents 3530-50B
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
3.3.11
3.3.12
3.3.13
Contents
Page
Section 3 - SERVICE (Continued)
Removal/Replacement of the On Board Battery ............................................................ 3-13
Removal/Replacement of the Display/Switch Panel Assembly...................................... 3-14
Removal/Replacement of the TeleCounter Assembly ................................................... 3-15
Removal/Replacement of the Modem or Radio Options ................................................ 3-17
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion TIB Option ..................................................... 3-17
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-232 Intf. Bd. Option................................. 3-17
Removal/Replacement of the Exp. RS-485 and/or AO Bd.Option ................................. 3-18
3.4 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.4.1
3.4.2
Battery & Fuse F1 Checks ............................................................................................. 3-18
3.4.3
3.4.4
LCD Display Checks ...................................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.5
3.4.6
TMS Menu System......................................................................................................... 3-20
Field Wiring/Signal Checks ............................................................................................ 3-20
4.1 MODEL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT ................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL
4.4 CPU, MEMORY & PROGRAM INTERFACE ................................................................... 4-3
4.5 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................................ 4-3
4.6 DISCRETE
4.7 DISCRETE
4.8 INPUT.................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.9 ANALOG
4.10
4.11 POWER............................................................................................................................ 4-5
4.12
4.13
Supplements
3530-50B Contents / 0-3
Contents
Page
REFERENCED or ASSOCIATED BRISTOL DOCUMENTS
Bristol 9600 bps-PSTN Modem Instruction Manual..................................................................... CI-9600
Bristol 9600 bps-PSTN Modem P/N 400000-01-6 Instruction Manual .................................... CI-9600TF
Isolated RS-485 Interface Board ...................................................................................... PIP-ISORS485
TeleCorrector Standard ACCOL Load ............................................................................................D4089
TechView User’s Guide ..................................................................................................................D5131
REFERENCED OEM MANUALS
MDS 4710A – Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide –
MDS Doc. 05-3305A01, Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 4710A
MDS 4710B – Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,
Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 4710B
MDS 9810 – Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 9810/24810 900 MHz/2.4GHz Spread Spectrum Transceivers Installation and Operation Guide –
MDS Doc. 05-3301A01, Rev. B, April 2000 (PDF = 3301B-x810.pdf) for model MDS 9810
MDS 9710A Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver – MDS Doc. 05-3305A01,
Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (Installation & Operation) (PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf) for model MDS 9710A
MDS 9710B Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,
Sept. 2000 (PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf) for model MDS 9710B
FreeWave Radio Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver Model FGRM-501X005
Contact the FreeWave Tech Support group @ 303-444-3862 or at www.freewave.com to request the latest copy of the user manual.
0-4 / Contents 3530-50B
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TeleFlow J Corrector measures static pressure and temperature for a single run and computes corrected volume (i.e., volume or base conditions), uncorrected volume and energy rates and totals. Designed to operate in an unprotected outdoor environment, the TeleFlow J Corrector provides the following key features:
$ Low cost
$ Compensated, very accurate pressure readings
$ Very low power consumption
$ Selectable supercompressibilty calculation of AGA8 (gross or detail) or NX-19
$ Selectable AGA5 or calculated volumetric heating value
$ Two independent serial ports
$ Two line alphanumeric display
$ Two discrete outputs with control capability & One discrete input
$ RTD input (selectable temperature, pressure and volume units)
$ Auxiliary analog input for pressure monitoring
$ Automatic dial-out on alarm occurance (selectable)
$ Designed for Class I, Division 2 Groups C & D Haz. Loc. usage (See Appendix A)
$ Designed for Class I, Division 1 Groups C & D Haz. Loc. usage (See Appendix B)
1.2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION
TeleFlow J Correctors are comprised of the following major components:
$ Enclosure
$ Pressure Transducer (Wet End)
$ Internal mounting brackets
$ Display/Switch Panel Assembly
$ Serial (Local) communications port
$ Battery option
$ Circuit (CPU) Board
$ Communications options
$ Field wiring options
$ TeleCounter (Pulser) Assembly
Additionally, TeleFlow J Correctors have been designed to support the following options:
$ RTD probe option
$ Solar panel option
$ Expansion Transmitter Interface Board option
$ Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board option
$ Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board option
1.2.1 Enclosure
The enclosure is custom molded in Lexan 503 plastic. Its external dimensions (excluding the
TeleCounter Assembly and the Pressure Transducer) are 10.14" high by 10.375" wide by 7.4175" deep. The pressure transducer adds 2.25" to the depth and the TeleCounter Assembly adds 4.36" to the height. The enclosure consists of two pieces, the body and the Instrument Front Cover.
TeleFlow™ Corrector Introduction / 1-1
A continuous gasket seals the unit when the Instrument Front Cover is closed. A hinge on the right side (facing the front of the unit) is formed by molded channels on the Instrument Front
Cover and body which capture a stainless steel pin. When closed, the Instrument Front Cover is secured by three captive quarter turn fasteners along the left side. A hole is also provided on the left side to allow the use of a padlock to secure the Instrument Front Cover.
1.2.2 Pressure Transducer
The pressure transducer, or wet end, is provided for the measurement of static pressure. This device is located at the rear of the TeleFlow Corrector. The neck of the transducer is situated inside the enclosure while its body extends out the rear of the unit. A metal diaphragm in the body of the transducer is exposed to the gas. A solid-state strain gage in the neck of the transducer measures the distortion of the diaphragm and produces an electrical signal which the CPU board processes as the measured static pressure. The wet end connects to the gas line via tubing.
Figure 1-1 - TeleFlow J Corrector
The transducer cable plugs directly into the TeleFlow Corrector circuit board.
1-2 / Introduction TeleFlow™ Corrector
1.2.3 Internal Mounting Brackets
Aluminum brackets attach to the interior of the enclosure body to support the circuit board, battery, and communications options. Another bracket attaches to the inside of the Instrument
Front Cover to support the LCD Display and the Switch Panel.
An aluminum plate mounts on top of the circuit board. The plate provides physical and electrical protection for the circuit board as well as printed labels with terminal identification.
1.2.4 Display/Switch Panel Assembly
The Display/Switch Panel Assembly mounts to the inside of the Instrument Front Cover where it is visible through a window. This Assembly consists of the LCD Display Subassembly and the
Membrane Switch Assembly. A Gasket provides a seal between the LCD Display Subassembly and the Instrument Front Cover. Both the LCD Display Subassembly and the Membrane Switch
Panel connect to the CPU Board through dedicated ribbon cables. The Membrane Switch is used to activate the 2 X 16 Character LCD Display.
1.2.5 RTD Probe
An RTD temperature probe mounts directly to the gas pipeline using a thermowell, external to the TeleFlow Corrector enclosure. RTD wires are protected by a metal sheath which is connected to a liquid tight conduit fitting on the bottom of the enclosure. The RTD wires connect to the field wiring terminals on the CPU Board.
1.2.6 Local Communications Port
A circular plastic connector on the bottom of the enclosure body provides connection for a local communications device, typically an IBM compatible PC (personal computer). A custom cable connects the PC serial port to the TeleFlow Corrector. Internally, the circular connector is wired to field wiring terminals on the main circuit board.
1.2.7 Battery Options
Either disposable or rechargeable batteries can be mounted inside the TeleFlow enclosure. The battery (or batteries) mount to the left of the CPU board and are secured by one or two aluminum brackets (depending on the configuration). The following power systems are offered
(also see Section 1.2.9):
$ Single 6V Lead-acid Battery
(with 1W, 6V Solar Power System)
$ Single 6V Lead-acid Battery
(with 5W, 6V Solar Power System)
$ 12V Lead-acid Battery
(with 5W, 12V Solar Power System)
$ 12V Alkaline Battery System
(Non-Rechargeable)
$ Single 6V Lithium Pack
$ Dual 6V Lithium Pack
$ Intrinsically Safe 6V Lead-acid Battery
(with 1W, 6V Solar Power System)
$ Intrinsically Safe 6V Lead-acid Battery
(with 5W, 6V Solar Power System)
$ 12V Lead-acid Battery
(with 5W, 12V SP System & with Radio)
$ 12V Alkaline Battery System
(Rechargeable)
$ Intrinsically Safe Single 6V Lithium Pack
Note: Intrinsically Safe Battery Systems are Only Available From BBI - see Appendix B.
Each battery option connects to a PWR input (refer to Figure 1-2) using a pair of wires. The dual configurations connect to both the PWR 1 and PWR 2 inputs.
TeleFlow™ Corrector Introduction / 1-3
1.2.8 Circuit Board
The TeleFlow Corrector circuit board (CPU Board) mounts on the right side of the enclosure, attached to standoffs on the mounting bracket by three screws and two posts. The board is approximately 7.3" tall, 4.8" wide, and 0.7" deep. Both surface mount and through-hole com-ponents are located on the component side of the board, and small surface mount components are located on the solder side.
Figure 1-2 - TeleFlow J Corrector CPU Board
Pluggable screw terminal connectors line the front edge of the board, along with two LED indicators and a potentiometer for display contrast adjustment. Connectors and configuration positions are located on the top of the board as shown in Figure 1-2.
1-4 / Introduction TeleFlow™ Corrector
1.2.9 Solar Panel Option
A solar panel is used with the rechargeable battery option. Three solar panels are available; i.e., a 1 Watt (1W) and two 5 Watt (5W) versions. The 5W panel is available in 6V or 12V configurations while the 1W panel provides 6 volts. The 1 Watt solar panel mounts on a bracket which offers adjustable swivel and tilt angles, while the 5 Watt version's bracket mounts to a 2" pipe at a fixed 50 E ±2 E . The 5 Watt panel can be swiveled but its tilt angle is fixed at 55 E . The
1Watt panel can be attached to the TeleFlow Corrector enclosure or mounted remotely to a 2" pipe. The wires enter the TeleFlow Corrector through a liquid tight conduit fitting on the bottom of the enclosure. Internally the solar panel wires connect to a rechargeable battery.
1.2.10 Communications Option
A 9600 bps modem or radio (with integral modem) can be mounted inside the TeleFlow Corrector enclosure. The modem or radio typically connect to the auxiliary power output and network serial port field wiring terminals on the main circuit board.
1.2.11 Field Wiring Options
Connection to external devices is done through field wiring terminals on the CPU board.
$ RTD wiring
$ Digital inputs
$ Digital outputs
$ Pulse input
$ Analog input
$ External communications
1.2.12 TeleCounter (Pulser) Assembly
The TeleCounter Assembly (Pulser) is situated below the Corrector enclosure and is mounted to the bottom of the corrector with a gasket water tight seal. The Pulser is secured to the Corrector enclosure with four screws. The Pulser can be opened in the field to set its gears for proper rotation, i.e., so that the counter is increasing. The 8 digit odometer provides a count of
0000000.0 to 9999999.9 revolutions. The magnet wheel and the odometer's tenths wheel will increment 10 digits each time the turbine meter completes one revolution.
1.2.13 Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) Option
Expansion Transmitter Interface Boards (ETIBs) allow up to two (2) Bristol Babcock, Series
3508C Transmitters to communicate with an ACCOL loaded host TeleFlow or TeleFlow Plus
Electronic Gas Measurement Computer (EGMC) (3530-10B/20B), or a TeleRTU, TeleRTU Plus or TeleRTU Module (3530-15B/25B/35B). The EGMC/RTU polls and stores data from each transmitter and communicates with the network.
The ETIB Board is interfaced to a TeleFlow/TeleRTU CPU Board via the CPU Board’s Expansion
Connector. Power from and communication with the host CPU Board is supplied through the
Expansion Connector. ETIB Boards contain one jumper (JP1) for configuration purposes.
1.2.14 Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board Option
The Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board (EXPCOM232) provides a single RS-232 asynchronous serial communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s "local" and "network" RS-232 ports, any model 3530-
XXX unit equipped with an EXPCOM232 Board can establish RS-232 communications with an external device. An EXPCOM232 Board plugs into the Expansion Connector of the TeleFlow or
TeleRTU CPU Board and is stood-off by three 15/32" long hex standoffs and is secured via three
TeleFlow™ Corrector Introduction / 1-5
screws. The CPU Board Expansion Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the EXPCOM232 Board.
Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXPCOM232 Board. TXD, RXD,
RTS, CTS, DTR, CD and GND (RS-232) signals are available at TB1 of the EXPCOM232 Board.
CD (Carraier Detect) (supplied by a DCE attempting to communicate with a model 3530-XXX), will awaken the 3530-XXX CPU Board. If no activity is required, the EXPCOM232 Board’s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-232 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX.
1.2.15 Expansion RS-484 and/or Analog Output Board Option
The Expansion RS-485 Comm. Port with Analog Output Board (EXP485/AO) provides a single RS-485 communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident
(host) CPU’s "local" and "network" RS-232 ports, any model 3530-XXX unit equipped with a fully populated EXP485/AO Board can establish RS-485 asynchronous communications with other 3530-
XXX devices and/or can interface to an Analog Output circuit. The EXP485/AO Board plugs into the
Expansion Connector of the TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board, is stood-off by three 15/32" long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws. The CPU Board Expansion Connector supplies power and
3530-XXX communication to the EXP485/AO Board.
Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXP485/AO Board. Interface signals are available at TB1 of the EXP485/AO. The SLEEP+ & SLEEP- signals (supplied by the Master
35300-XXX) will awaken the remote 3530-XXX CPU Boards. If no activity is required, the EXP485/AO
Board‘s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-485 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX..
1.3 FUNCTIONS
The primary function of the TeleFlow Corrector is to perform gas volume correction to base conditions in accordance with API (American Petroleum Institute) and AGA (American Gas Association) standards, e.g., AGA-7. The following items implement and supplement the primary function:
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Data acquisition
Signal processing
Flow calculations
Data archives
Audit trail archives
Local display
Communications
Control outputs
Status inputs
Self test and diagnostics
1.3.1 Data Acquisition
The process inputs used are static pressure and temperature. Static pressure is measured by the transducer, and temperature is measured by the RTD probe. Additional signals are monitored for self-test and to compensate for the effects of temperature and individual differences between sensors and circuit board components from unit to unit.
Regardless of the operating mode or the calculation interval, the TeleFlow Corrector acquires samples as follows:
1-6 / Introduction TeleFlow™ Corrector
a.
b.
c.
Static pressure two times per second at ~1/2 second intervals
RTD temperature once per second
All self-test and compensation values at intervals of 3 seconds or less
1.3.2 Signal Processing
Each second, the process variable values (static pressure, and RTD temperature) acquired during that second are processed. The values are filtered and then compensated using characterization data stored in the EEPROM and integral factory-determined compensation input values. The results of the filtering and compensation are used to produce floating point values.
One floating point value for each process variable is stored every second.
1.3.3 Flow Calculations
A complete flow calculation is performed periodically using the stored floating point values. The selectable calculation interval is 1, 2, 5, 15, or 60 seconds. Maximum power conservation is achieved by using the longest calculation interval. Each calculation includes instantaneous rate, compressibility, and updates of all volumes, totals, and archive averages.
1.3.3.1 Flow Rate Calculations and Flow Time Accumulation
Instantaneous flow rate is calculated using a "sliding window" algorithm to provide the best combination of responsiveness to change in rate and smooth indication at low pulse frequencies. The user defines the "zero flow limit" period in seconds, up to a limit of 9999.99 seconds.
Intervals of up to 10,000 seconds between pulses are indicated as nonzero frequencies. When pulses are received at intervals longer than the zero flow limit (default is 15 seconds), the flow rate estimate is set to zero; however, for volume these pulses are still accumulated. The flow time recorded is the time for which the instantaneous flow rate is non-zero.
1.3.3.2 Volume Calculations
Average values for static pressure and temperature for a calculation cycle are used as inputs to the AGA7 and AGA8 calculations to compute an incremental corrected volume. Compressibility is calculated according to AGA Report No. 8, 1992 (with 1993 errata). Both the DETAIL method and the GROSS method of characterization described in AGA 8 are selectable. NX-19 is also selectable.
Energy Calculation
Either a fixed volumetric heating value or calculated (AGA Report No. 5) value is selectable.
Volume and Energy Integration
Volume and energy are each integrated and accumulated at the end of every calculation cycle.
The incremental volume for a cycle is the volume resulting from applying the correction factor to the input pulses observed for that cycle. Energy is the volume at base conditions multiplied by the volumetric heating value.
1.3.3.3 Grid Pressure (Auxiliary Input)
An auxiliary analog input can be used to measure another pressure (requires an external pressure transmitter).
1.3.4 Archives
Two distinct types of archive data are stored. The first type is Audit Trail data, which is a recording of the various events and alarms that have an impact on the calculated and reported
TeleFlow™ Corrector Introduction / 1-7
rates and volumes. The second type is historical data, which includes records of rates and volumes and other signals over time. When an archive log becomes full, new entries replace the oldest entries in the log.
Where feasible, both forms of archive data conform to the requirements of the API Chapter 21
(the Committee on Gas Measurement's EFM document). Specifically, the averages of the process variables stored in the data archive are for flowing periods, appropriate to their usage in the equations, and any parameter changed by an operator either remotely or locally causes an entry in the audit log.
The TeleFlow Corrector supports the "breaking" of a log period when an operator entered parameter is changed. When this occurs, the log period in process is closed out, a log is made, and a new log is begun. This feature is disabled by default and may be enabled by the operator.
Note: to prevent several very short logs from being created due to a series of successive configuration changes, the TeleFlow will not create a log which contains less than 60 seconds
(flowing or otherwise) of data. Therefore if a user enters 15 configuration changes over a 2 minute period, the log will only be broken twice.
1.3.4.1 Daily Historical Data Log
The daily data log holds one record for every contract day. The contract hour may be changed by the user. The daily log holds 72 entries; this ensures that the previous calendar month of daily data is always resident in TeleFlow memory.
The user can define which items are stored in the daily data log. All signals in the Master Signal
Directory are available for logging. When the data log definition is changed, all previously stored archive data is erased. The items stored by default are:
$ Corrected Flow Accumulation
$ Uncorrected Flow Accumulation
$ Energy Accumulation
$ Flowing Time
$ Average FPV
$ Average Pressure
$ Average Temperature
$ Highest Pressure
$ Lowest Pressure
$ Highest Flow Rate
$ Lowest Flow Rate
Each log entry also contains the date and time, and a record ID tag number.
1.3.4.2 Periodic Historical Data Log
The periodic data log holds one record for every log interval. The log interval may be 15 minutes or 1 hour. The default interval is 1 hour. Changing this interval does not affect data already stored. The items stored by default are:
$
$
$
$
$
Corrected Flow Accumulation
Uncorrected Flow Accumulation
Energy Accumulation
Flowing Time
Average FPV
$ Average Pressure
$ Average Temperature
$ Highest Pressure
$ Lowest Pressure
$ Highest Flow Rate
$ Lowest Flow Rate
Each log entry also contains the date and time, and a record ID tag number.
1-8 / Introduction TeleFlow™ Corrector
The periodic log holds as many entries as available memory permits up to a maximum log size of 61000 bytes. The size of a single record is 8 bytes + (4 * number of floating point values). In the default configuration, the TeleFlow stores 72 days of hourly logs. When the periodic log is full, new entries replace the oldest entries in the log.
1.3.4.3 Historical Trending Log
An eight (8) day trend log is kept in addition to the periodic and daily historical archives. This log contains snapshots (instantaneous values) of certain data at 15 minute intervals for the most recent 8 days. This interval approximates the data points on a standard 8 day paper chart. This log is intended to be collected and plotted with a laptop PC..
The contents of the Historic Trending Log may be changed by the user. The default contents of the Historic Trending Log are:
$
$
Static Pressure
Temperature
Each log entry also contains the date and time, and a record ID tag.
1.3.4.4 Alarm and Event Storage
Audit Trail Buffers capable of storing the most recent 200 Alarms and the most recent 200
Events is provided. Internally, these buffers are maintained separately to prevent recurring alarms from overwriting configuration audit data. Externally, they are reported to the user as a single entity. Both operate in a circular fashion with new entries overwriting the oldest entry when the buffer is full.
The following circumstances cause an entry to be made in the Audit Trail Buffer:
$
$
$
$
$
$
Any operator change to a TeleFlow Corrector configuration variable
Any change in the state of a TeleFlow Corrector alarm signal
Any change in the Control Inhibit status of a TeleFlow Corrector signal
A system restart
Setting the TeleFow Corrector Time and/or Date
Certain other system events
1.3.5 LCD Display
Typically, the display stays off after the unit is configured and placed in service. The operator may activate the display at any time by pressing the front panel button. When activated, the display scrolls through a list of current values. The list defaults to an appropriate set of values.
When the button is pressed, the TeleFlow Corrector wakes up from sleep mode and enters calculation mode. While cycling through the display list, the calculation interval switches to 1 second. After cycling through the list twice, the calculation interval is restored to the programmed interval and the unit returns to normal operation.
1.3.6 Communications
The TeleFlow J Corrector provides two serial ports for serial communications, designated the network port (9600 bps - Default) and the local port (19200 bps - default). Both ports operate independently at rates up to 19.2 Kbps. Communications with the TeleFlow J has no effect on calculation times. The network port is a standard BSAP slave port with alarm support intended for remote communication via a BSAP network. The network port also supports EBSAP addressing conventions. The local port is a BSAP pseudo-slave port for direct connect communication with various BBI programs running on a laptop PC. Since the local port is used for direct-
TeleFlow™ Corrector Introduction / 1-9
connect communication, the TeleFlow Corrector will answer messages addressed to any local address (1 to 127) on this port..
The TeleFlow J Corrector is a terminal slave node in the BSAP network. As such it is not capable of initiating a BSAP message intended for another node. The TeleFlow J Corrector is always an immediate response node.
1.3.6.1 BSAP Message Support
The TeleFlow J supports a subset of BSAP messages. Specifically, the following messages are supported:
Poll message
TS/NRT message
Alarm Acknowledge
Alarm Initialization
Peer to Peer
Normal response to poll messages including alarm reporting in short, long, and extended format. If a poll is received on the network port, and the TeleFlow has no NRT, it will respond with a request for a Node Routing Table.
Normal handling.
Normal handling.
Normal handling.
Supports send and poll mode.
Transmitter Calibration All messages directed to message exchange 50H are handled exactly as if the TeleFlow were a 3508. The baud rate and local
RDB functions address supported depend on the communication mode.
All messagesSupports read signal by name and address, read
RDB Extensions
Special RDB functions packed logical, read by list, read selected signal data (name match only), write by name and address, and write by list.
All messagesSupports Audit Trail functions, security code functions, EBSAP Group functions, and Archive data functions.
All subfunctions of these are supported.
Supports date and time requests, local BSAP address requests, and the system reset request.
1.3.7 Discrete I/O
Two discrete inputs (one used with the TeleCounter) and two discrete outputs are provided. The input can be configured to cause alarm log entries. The outputs provide limited control capabilities. The user has the choice of volume based pulse output or flow control. If the user inadvertently enables both control algorithms, the TeleFlow Corrector internally disables flow control and does only the volume pulse output.
1.3.7.1 Flow Rate Control - DDC (jog control) using PID
When the user configures the TeleFlow Corrector to perform flow rate control, the two digital output signals are wired to the Open and Close inputs of a controller (such as a control valve).
The TeleFlow Corrector uses a PID algorithm to cause the measured rate of flow to match a user entered setpoint. When the flow rate is below the setpoint, the Open contact is pulsed. When the flow rate is above the setpoint, the Close contact is pulsed. The PID equation calculates the duration of the Open or Close pulse. The minimum pulse duration is 0.1 seconds. The user changeable parameters are:
$
$
$
$
$
$
Flow Setpoint in MSCFH
Deadband in % of setpoint
Proportional Gain
Integral in repeats/minute
Derivative Time in seconds
Valve Travel Time (full close to full open)
1-10 / Introduction TeleFlow™ Corrector
The flow control algorithm runs once each calculation cycle. When the flow rate is not within the deadband, the TeleFlow J Corrector automatically switches to a 1 second calculation in-terval.
After the setpoint is reached, it reverts to the programmed calculation interval. This feature allows the unit to be configured for optimum power conservation without sacrificing flow control performance.
The TeleFlow J implements a process limit sensing algorithm; the object of which is to sense when the process has quit responding to control outputs. When this situation is detected, PID control is suspended to avoid damaging field equipment. One of the following two conditions must be met in order for the TeleFlow J to determine that the process is responding:
1.
2.
The flow rate must be changing by at least 0.5% of the user entered maximum flow rate each second.
The magnitude of the error must be reduced by 10% each second.
If neither of these conditions is met, the TeleFlow Corrector concludes that the process is no longer responding, and will only send a cumulative total of eight (8) seconds of pulses to the control valve before suspending control. In order for control to begin again, the flow rate must cross to the other side of the setpoint (a sign change in the error), or the PID control may be disabled and re-enabled.
This process limiting feature, which is enabled by default, may be disabled by the user. If the user disables this feature, the TeleFlow J Corrector will continue pulsing the control element indefinitely even if the setpoint can't be reached.
1.3.7.2 Pulse Output for External Totalizer or Sampler
Both corrected and uncorrected volumes can generate sampler outputs (uncorrected on DO2, corrected on DO1). The operator configures a control volume and a pulse duration. After each calculation cycle, an internal volume accumulator is compared to the control volume. If the accumulator exceeds the control volume then a pulse is output and the accumulator is reduced by the volume represented by the pulse. The pulse output may be used to drive an external totalizer, odorizer, gas sampler, or similar device.
1.3.7.3 Nominations
The nomination function allows a user to establish a time period over which an accumulation count of volume or energy that is delivered during the period is monitored and compared to a configured 'nomination' value. When the nomination value is reached, the system will perform an action (such as opening or closing a valve). prior to nomination being reached, the volume/energy will be compared to a configured alarm level and an alarm will be generated when the volume/energy reaches or exceeds the defined (specified) level.
1.3.8 Self Test
A series of diagnostics is run periodically to verify the operational status of various system components. The tests include EPROM checksum, transducer parameters, main and backup battery voltages, software sanity checks, and other indications of system health. An appropriate alarm is generated if any test fails.
TeleFlow™ Corrector Introduction / 1-11
1.4 ENVIRONMENT
The TeleFlow J has been designed to operate in an unprotected outdoor environment.
TOPIC
Operating Temperature Range
Operating Humidity Range
Transient Susceptibility
Vibration Effect
ESD Susceptibility
EMI Susceptibility
EMI Radiation
Hazardous Locations
Intrinsically Safe Design
SPECIFICATION
-40 E to +60 E C (-40 E to +140 E F)
0 E to 40 E C (+32 E to 104 E F) (with alkaline battery)
15% to 90% RH Noncondensing
Field connected circuits meet the requirements of
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
Less than ±0.1% FS for (15 to 150)Hz at 1g and 150-2000Hz at .5g on any axis per SAMA PMC.31.1.
Field connected circuits meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV (No Damage).
Meets IEC 801-3 level 3 (10V/M) from 500KHz to 500 MHz.
Effect on pressure and temperature reading is less than
±0.25% FS. Computational, archival, communications, and control functions are not impaired.
Meets FCC Rules Part J, Subpart 15, Class A for radiated emissions.
Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D hazardous locations (in certain configurations - see Section
5.1 for model numbers)(see Appendix A).
Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups C
& D hazardous locations (in certain con-figuration - see
Section 5.1 for model numbers)(see Appendix B).
Table 1-1 - Environmental Specifications
1-12 / Introduction TeleFlow™ Corrector
Section 1A
APPLICATION SOFTWARE
3530-15B
3530-20B
3530-20B
3530-20B
3530-25B
3530-25B
3530-35B
3530-35B
3530-45B
3530-45B
3530-50B
3530-50B
3530-50B
3530-55B
3530-55B
1A.1 CATEGORIES OF APPLICATION SOFTWARE
All TeleFlow GFC (Gas Flow Computer), TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder units have the option of running a user generated ACCOL load. In addition, Fixed ‘ C ’ application loads are available for the TeleFlow GFC and the TeleFlow Corrector, a standard
BBI ACCOL load (or a variation) is available for the TeleFlow GFC, the TeleCorrector and
TeleRecorders. Additionally, ACCOL based TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder users have the option of using UOI or TMS to view menus, and UOI configuration tools to modify menus. Units that have a Low Power I/O Expansion Board installed have the option of utilizing the 2-Run ACCOL load.
With respect to the program load, TeleRTU units that don’t contain a Low Power I/O
Expansion Board (3530-15B/25B/35B) do not have a standard BBI ACCOL load installed; the user must create and download their own ACCOL load.
Table 1A-1 provides a list of the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and
TeleRecorder program loads.
Table 1A-1
TeleFlow (3530-10B/20B), TeleFlow Corrector (3530-50B),
TeleRTU (3530-15B/25B/35B) & TeleRecorder (3530-45B/55B) Program Loads
Model #
3530-10B
3530-10B
3530-10B
Program Load
Fixed ‘ C ’ Program
Standard BBI ACCOL Load
User-created ACCOL load
User-created ACCOL load
Fixed ‘ C ’ Program
User-created ACCOL load
Standard BBI ACCOL Load or 2-Run ACCOL Load
User-created ACCOL load
Standard BBI ACCOL Load or 2-Run ACCOL Load
User-created ACCOL load
Standard BBI ACCOL Load or 2-Run ACCOL Load
TeleRecorder ACCOL load
User-created ACCOL load
Fixed ‘ C ’ Program
TeleCorrector ACCOL load
User-created ACCOL load
TeleRecorder ACCOL load
User-created ACCOL load
Operator Interface/Configuration
TeleFlow Menu System (TMS)
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
- ACCOL Workbench is used to create the load.
- Open BSI Utilities is used to download and communicate.
- User created/modified menus via UOI.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TeleFlow Menu System (TMS)
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TeleFlow Menu System (TMS)
TMS or UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
UOI Menu System Interface.
See 3530-10B with user-created ACCOL load.
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-1
There are basically three categories of application software used with the TeleFlow GFC,
TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder series:
1) ACCOL Tools and related software which are used to program your TeleFlow GFC,
TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU (Remote Terminal Unit) or TeleRecorder for its intended application (pump control, pipeline monitoring, etc.). In general, the System Engineer or ACCOL programmer uses this type of software.
2) Supervisory Software which is used to allow operator interaction with the controller via graphical displays, trending, and printed reports. In general, this type of software is used by the Process Operator, or Technician.
3) Open BSI Utilities Software which facilitates communication between the TeleFlow
GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and/or TeleRecorder and certain types of Supervisory software. In general, the System Engineer configures this software.
Each of these application software categories will be discussed briefly in this section. Additional information on these subjects is found in documents referenced within the text.
1A.2 ACCOL TOOLS SOFTWARE
ACCOL stands for A dvanced C ommunications and C ontrolO riented L anguage, and is
Bristol Babcock's proprietary language for programming Network 3000-series controllers, such as the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, the TeleRTU and the TeleRecorder. The
ACCOL compilers and related software are collectively referred to as the ACCOL Tools.
Each of these tools will be discussed later in this section.
The ACCOL language includes a large set of pre-programmed software modules and control statements which can perform various mathematical, logical, process control, or communication functions.
For example, the PID3TERM module allows proportional, integral, and derivative control over a process input value; the AGA3ITER module computes natural gas volume flow rates, and the DIFFERENTIATOR module calculates the rate of change of an input. There are over 100 different modules and control statements to choose from. For more detailed information on particular modules or statements, see the ACCOL II Reference Manual
(document # D4044).
These modules and control statements are organized by the ACCOL programmer into individual tasks . Each task is specified to execute at a specific rate, and with a specific priority, relative to other tasks. One or more tasks are then combined by the ACCOL programmer into an ACCOL program. This program must be tailored for the particular use of this controller, for example, measuring and controlling natural gas flows, monitoring pressure of a pump, etc.
Depending upon which ACCOL Tools you are using, your ACCOL program is initially created either as ASCII text in an ACCOL source file (.ACC file) or as binary data in an
ACCOL object file (.ACO file). Facilities exist for quickly translating between these two formats.
1A2 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX
When editing of the ACCOL program has been completed, it must be compiled and linked to generate an ACCOL load file . The ACCOL load file contains the original programming instructions in a machine-readable format that can be executed by the TeleFlow GFC,
TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder. In order to get the load file into the controller, the file is downloaded into the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or
TeleRecorder, which then executes the programming instructions in the load file.
The Windows Ô -based ACCOL Workbench software allows you to create, modify, compile, link, and document an ACCOL source file, all using a single integrated tool. Workbench allows direct editing of an ACCOL source file, without the need for a separate ASCII text editor, and allows the user to call up a pre-defined template of any ACCOL module or statement. The user can then edit the template to conform to the requirements of the intended application. See the ACCOL Workbench User Manual (document # D4051) for more information.
(NOTE: All workbench on-line communication and downloading is facilitated via Open
BSI Utilities software, discussed later in this chapter).
Figure 1A-1 - Files Created by Windows-based ACCOL Workbench
1A.3 SUPERVISORY SOFTWARE
Supervisory software allows operator interaction with the Bristol Babcock controllers via graphical displays, trends, and reports of historical data. Generally, the supervisory
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-3
software requires a customized communication driver in order to communicate with the
Bristol devices. In some cases this is provided via Open BSI Utilities.
Among the types of supervisory software currently supported are:
1) OpenEnterprise software is Bristol Babcock's own supervisory system. OpenEnterprise utilizes a Windows Ô NT server and one or more PC client workstations. Communication with the controller network is supported via Open BSI. OpenEnterprise provides large real time and historical data bases, which may be displayed, logged, or exported.
2) UOI or TMS are DOS-based programs, which allow an operator to view text-based menus. Operators can view process data, modify TeleFlow parameters, and collect log information, see the UOI Configuration Manual (document # D5074) and the UOI
Operators Manual (document # D5075). For information on using TMS and TeleFlow menus, see Appendix F of documents CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-20B, or CI-3530-50B.
3) Iconics Inc. Genesis software is a popular PC-based supervisory package that is suitable for systems with smaller numbers of ACCOL signals. Genesis, and the Bristol driver may be purchased from Bristol Babcock (see "Local Area Network" on page 7).
4) Intellution ® FIX ® software is a powerful PC-based graphical user interface package, suitable for high-end systems. Open BSI Utilities software is required for communications.
1A.4 OPEN BSI UTILITIES SOFTWARE
The Open Bristol System Interface (Open BSI) is a layer of communications software which provides access to a network of Bristol Babcock remote process controllers. Above this communications layer are a group of applications (programs) which are collectively known as the Open BSI Utilities . These utilities interact with the communications layer to:
$ Download ACCOL load files to 33xx controllers and/or TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow
Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder units in the network
$ Collect and display data from the 3xxx controllers and/or TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow
Corrector, TeleRTU and TeleRecorder units
$ Monitor and control Open BSI communications
Third-party supervisory software, such as Intellution ® FIX ® , can also use Open BSI communications, and data files generated by Open BSI utilities, to access the Bristol network in order to display and report information from field instrumentation about a running process. An operator then uses this information to monitor and/or interact with the process.
The standard set of Open BSI utilities is accessed from within a Windows program group on the PC; the major utilities are described, briefly, below. Full details on each utility are included in the Open BSI Utilities Manual (D5081).
1A4 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX
Figure 1A-2 - Open BSI Interface Diagram
NetView allows the user to define communication network characteristics, define details about individual Controllers, Correctors, RTUs and Recorders, and to change these characteristics on-line. It also allows monitoring of communication statistics from the workstation end of the communication line.
Downloader transfers a linked ACCOL load file (*.ACL) to a remote 3xxx unit.
DataView collects and displays several types of process data from a 3xxx-series controller, including signal values, data array values, signal lists, archive data, and audit trail information. In addition, it allows the user to search for signals based on various criteria.
Remote Communication Statistics Tool allows additional monitoring of Open BSI communication information. Details on buffers, communication ports, and custom protocols are accessible via this tool. Some of the information collected via this tool is primarily of interest to Bristol Babcock support personnel.
SigWrite reads ASCII files containing ACCOL signal values, and writes those values to corresponding signals or signal lists in a 3xxx controller. SigWrite scans for such files at a user-definable interval.
In addition to the standard set of Open BSI Utilities, just described, there are other utilities, available from Bristol Babcock as add-ons to the standard utilities, which provide
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-5
capabilities for scheduled data collection, and file export. These utilities include the Open
BSI Scheduler, the Open BSI DDE Server, and the Open BSI Data Collector. See the Open
BSI Scheduler Manual (document # D5082) and the Open BSI Collection & Export Utilities
Manual (document # D5083) for details.
For more information on these packages, consult the manuals accompanying them, or contact Bristol Babcock's application support group for assistance.
1A.5 SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder can operate as an independent, stand-alone unit, or as a node in a local or wide area network. These applications are described in sections 1A.5.1 through 1A.5.3.
Note: The TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder cannot serve as a serial Communications Front End (CFE) or Data Concentrator (DC).
1A.5.1 Stand-Alone Unit
Figure 1A-3 shows a TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder used as a stand-alone unit in a non-network application. This arrangement is ideal for small local systems requiring a limited number of monitoring and control points. The PC for this application runs Bristol Babcock's ACCOL Workbench Software and Open BSI Utilities.
Data stored in the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder can be observed or edited via the PC.
Once on line, the TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or TeleRecorder executes the
ACCOL load and performs its configured tasks. Although the PC is attached to the Model
3530-XXX in Figure 1A-3, it can be disconnected and removed once the 3530-XX-X unit has been loaded and made operational.
Figure 1A-3 - Basic Stand-Alone Application
1A6 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX
1A.5.2 Local Area Network (LAN)
LANs typically support the communications requirements of computers and equipment in one or more buildings at a site or plant complex. A local area network requires a PC with extended graphics capability. This PC will typically run a supervisory software package to display process parameters, real time or historical process data, and graphic displays, etc.
An example of a local area network is shown in Figure 1A-4. This network can communicate directly through RS-485 cable connections for short distances (1000 feet max. from master to most distant slave) or over longer distances when interconnected on RS-232 ports. For much greater distances (miles) network communications require the use of phone line modems, fiber modems or broadband/carrier band modems (on coaxial cable).
Figure 1A-4 shows a network that contains a PC as the network master and a DPC 3330 at the first level of the network hierarchy. The data concentrator, which functions as a communications traffic director, communicates upward with the PC through a slave (S) port and downward with the second level through a master (M) port. This pattern repeats through each descending level. The second level contains two controllers; one communicates with three other controllers at the third level, while the other communicates with two at the third level. Each master (configured) port has the capability of supporting up to 127 slaves.
The network communication port of each TeleFlow GFC, TeleFlow Corrector, TeleRTU or
TeleRecorder requires either TMS or ACCOL configuration to change the 9600 bps default rate. The network port operates at rates up to 19.2 Kbps. Additionally, in a BSAP network, the network communication port must be defined in the ACCOL load using Workbench
Software. The network port is a standard BSAP slave port with alarm support intended for remote communication via a BSAP network.
All TeleFlow GFCs, TeleFlow Correctors, TeleRTUs and TeleRecorders act as terminal slave nodes in the BSAP network. As such, they are not capable of initiating a BSAP message intended for another node. These units are always immediate response nodes.
The PC, which runs the supervisory software, oversees the activities of the local area network. It displays process parameters, real-time data, and historical process information in both tabular and graphic formats. Journaling and system configuration utilities can also be employed as required.
The Bristol Babcock NETWORK 3000 system supports a maximum of six levels starting with the master device at level 1. Slave nodes at each descending level communicate upward through its preceding master node. Each master node stores data from its slaves until polled.
A local area network can also include printers and/or display terminals. Figure 1A-4 shows a printer connected directly to a PC port; however, a controller port could have been configured as a logger and used in the same manner.
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-7
1A8 / Application Software
Figure 1A-4 - Local Area Network
TeleFlow 3530-XXX
1A.5.3 Wide Area Network (WAN)
WANs typically support the communications requirements of computers and equipment at numerous geographical locations and may encompass many local and remote sites. A
Network 3000 system can also be constructed as a wide area network encompassing many local area networks. This application places a dedicated “Area Operator” computer at the top of the hierarchy as shown in Figure 1A-5. The central system includes the interface, monitoring and data recording equipment necessary to operate all the subservient networks. The central system employs Open BSI software to provide the on-line network interface.
Figure 1A-5 - An Example of a Wide Area Network
The Area Operator computer running Open BSI software provides the operator with realtime communications with remotes. Depending on the associated Man Machine Interface
(MMI) software package (such as OpenEnterprise, Genesis, Winterm, moXi, FIX, etc.), various features such as real-time management, historical data, alarm logging, event journaling, color graphics, CRT trending, report logging, process modeling, supervisory control, and high-level language support may be employed. The Area Operator PC of Figure
1A-5 communicates with the local area networks and discrete remote BBI RTUs, Flow
Computers and a Smart Transmitter through a DPC 3330. Depending on the configuration
TeleFlow 3530-XXX Application Software / 1A-9
of the DPC 3330, four or more asynchronous channels for use with phone line or modem applications, as well as a single, redundant channel for data highway applications may be utilized.
1A10 / Application Software TeleFlow 3530-XXX
Section 2
Installation
2.1 INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS
TeleFlow
-
Correctors are furnished in a housing designed to meet the NEMA Type 3 specifications and to operate in a Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D environment with a nonincendive rating (see Appendix A) or a Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D intrinsically safe environment (see Appendix B).
2.2 MOUNTING THE TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Figure 2-1 - TeleFlow Corrector Mounted to Turbine Meter
TeleFlow Corrector Installation / 2-1
Figure 2-2 - TeleFlow Corrector/Meter Interface Mounting Hole Pattern
(Dimensions are in Inches)
2.2.1 Mounting Considerations
Check all clearances when choosing an installation site. Make sure that the Corrector’s Instrument Front Cover (hinged on right side) can be opened for wiring and service. Make certain that the LCD display and sensor switch is visible and accessible to the on-site operator.
There should also be clearance for the optional Solar Panel (if required). The basic unit measures 10.375" in height by 10.14" in width by 7.4375" in depth. The pressure transducer adds 2.25" to the depth of the unit and the TeleCounter Assembly adds 4.36" to the height of the unit.
The TeleFlow Corrector is to be positioned vertically with the counter at its base and may be mounted as follows:
Directly to a site installed turbine meter (via four nuts at the base of the BBI Counter)
(see Figures 2-1 & 2-2). A gasket is required between the base of the TeleCounter Assembly and the top of the turbine meter. When mating the TeleFlow Corrector to the turbine meter, it is essential that the input shaft of the TeleCounter and the opening on the output shaft of the turbine meter mate properly. Be careful to not damage the mating surfaces. Once the surfaces are aligned, the mounting washers and nuts may be installed and secured.
Be aware that the Meter Interface (TeleCounter Base Plate) has an eight-bolt mounting pattern. The bolt patterns allow the TeleFlow Corrector to be mounted in two positions that are 180 E apart. The Meter Interface hole locations illustrated in Figure 2-2 accommodate the flow meters listed in Table 2-1.
2-2 / Installation TeleFlow Corrector
Manufacturer
American Meter, Roots &
Romet *
Mounting Position
Forward Mount **
Hole Pattern
A
Rockwell
Rockwell
Forward Mount **
Reverse Mount **
B
C
* For reverse mounting, remove the Base Plate screws (See
Figure 2-2 Hole locations ’D’) and rotate the Base Plate 180
E
.
** The Base Plate can be rotated in 90
E
increments.
Table 2-1 - Flow Meter Mounting Position
The following additional considerations are to be observed when planning an installation:
The use of an optional solar panel imposes the following additional mounting considerations:
The TeleFlow Corrector (with rear mounted 1 watt solar panel) can be mounted to a weight supporting turbine meter if vibration limits aren’t to be exceeded (see Vibration
Limits). If these limits are exceeded, this solar panel must be mounted to a 2" pipe.
5 watt solar panels are provided with a 2" Pipe Mounting Bracket.
Temperature Limits
The TeleFlow Corrector is designed to operate over a -40 to 140 o F (-40 to +60 o C) temperature range. Operation beyond this temperature range could cause output errors and erratic performance. Prolonged operation under extreme conditions could also result in failure of the unit.
Vibration Limits
Check the mounting pipe for mechanical vibration. Make sure that the TeleFlow Corrector is not exposed to a level of vibration that exceeds those given in the specifications. The TeleFlow
Corrector limits are 1g for 15-150 Hz & .5g for 150-2000 Hz.
2.2.2 Configuring the TeleCounter Assembly
Rotation Of The TeleCounter Magnet Wheel and Odometer
The TeleCounter can be configured to accept a clockwise or counterclockwise turbine meter shaft rotation. Two sets of gears in the TeleCounter Assembly accommodate configuration of the TeleFlow Corrector. These gears are factory set (per order) but may be field configured as required. The following steps are required to reconfigure the TeleCounter gears:
1. Remove the seven (7) screws which secure the Face Plate to the front of the TeleCounter
Assembly.
TeleFlow Corrector Installation / 2-3
Figure 2-3 - TeleCounter Assembly (1 to 1 Gear Ratio) Rotation Adjustment Diagram
2. Using a .035" Hex wrench loosen the set screw associated with drive gear "A" (CCW) or
’B’ (CW) and slide this gear to its resting position. Tighten the drive gear’s set screw (see
Figures 2-3 & 2-4).
3. Loosen the .035" Hex set screw which secures the other drive gear "A’ or ’B’ and slide this gear until it engages the main drive gear. Tighten the drive gear’s set screw. Check for binding by rotating the Input Wriggler.
4. Replace the Face Plate securing it with the 7 screws removed in step 1.
2-4 / Installation TeleFlow Corrector
Figure 2-4 - TeleCounter Assembly (2 to 1 Gear Ratio) Rotation Adjustment Diagram
2.3 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION
Opening The Instrument Front Cover
The Instrument Front Cover must be opened to access the electrical wiring terminals on the
CPU Board. The Instrument Front Cover is hinged on the right side and secured on the left side by three quarter turn fasteners. Additionally, aligned holes in the Instrument Front Cover and body have been provided to accommodate a padlock or other securing device.
TeleFlow Corrector Installation / 2-5
CPU Board Configuration
The CPU Board contains three (3) sets of Configuration Jumpers which provide configuration selection as follows:
Figure 2-5 - TeleFlow Corrector CPU Board
JP3 Battery Backup Enable
When JP3 is open, the battery is disabled. When JP3 is installed, the battery maintains the contents of the RAM and the Real Time Clock while power is less than 3.6 VDC. When main power is connected and is greater than 3.6VDC, no current will be drawn from the backup battery regardless of the state of JP3.
2-6 / Installation TeleFlow Corrector
JP4 Security (Manufacturing Tests Only)
Jumper JP4 is used to prevent the occurrence of ACCOL downloads or Firmware FLASH loads.
JP5 Manual Reset
For normal operation, JP5 is left open. When the Shunt Jumper associated with JP5 is installed, the TeleFlow J Corrector is held in a reset condition, with all processing halted.
When JP5 is removed, normal operation will resume.
Corrector Menu System
Operation and configuration of the Corrector Menu System is covered in Appendix F.
2.4 STATIC PRESSURE CONNECTION
(see Figures 2-1 and 2-5)
An integral pressure transducer is used for measurement of static (SP) pressure. The 1/2 in. -
14 Male NPT pressure connection is located in the rear of the unit and faces outward. Make sure that the maximum pressure applied to this port does not exceed the upper range limit of the pressure transducer. Install a shutoff valve and a bleed valve in the pressure line to perform equipment maintenance and shutdown procedures.
Warning
When installing pressure piping to the 1/2" NPT male pipe thread, or on the joints beyond, it is necessary to hold the pressure transducer at the 1-1/4" Hex.
Flange, to prevent turning the assembly and damaging the internal wiring.
2. 5 WIRING NOTES
The field wiring terminals on the TeleFlow J Corrector CPU Board are accessed by opening the Instrument Front Cover. The CPU Board is mounted vertically on the right side of the
TeleFlow J Corrector such that the wiring connectors on the board's card edge are facing the front of the unit. A metal shield provides the terminal designations. Note: Exercise care when installing a conduit fitting or field wiring to prevent damaging the CPU Board and/or other system components.
2.5.1 Wire Routing
Wiring will enter the TeleFlow J Corrector through holes in the bottom of the case. Up to seven holes may be provided in the bottom of the case (in addition to the center hole which accommodates the TeleCounter Assembly). The purpose of each of these holes (see Figure
2-6) is provided as follows:
TeleFlow J Corrector Installation / 2-7
Figure 2-6 - TeleFlow Corrector Bottom Wiring Holes
(viewed with top cut away)
$ (1) Bottom Rear/Left (Facing the front of the unit)
A 1/2" hole (conduit opening) is provided to accommodate the power input wires from the optional Solar Panel. When the optional Solar Panel is present, a liquid tight fitting will be installed; when the Solar Panel is not installed, this hole is plugged.
2-8 / Installation TeleFlow J Corrector
$ (2) Bottom Rear/Center (Facing the front of the unit)
A .406" hole accommodates the Battery Ventilation Assembly.
$ (3) Bottom Rear/Right (Facing the front of the unit)
A 3/4" hole is provided for all DI/O, the Auxiliary Analog Input and Pulse Input Wiring (2 DIs,
2 DOs, 1 Pulse Input & Auxiliary Analog Input = a total of 13 wires). This hole accommodates a 3/4" Liquid Tight Nonmetallic Conduit Fitting and is plugged when the unit is factory shipped.
$ (4) Bottom Right/Center (Facing the front of the unit)
A .5" hole is provided for mounting the factory wired and sealed RTD Cable Assembly.
$ (5) Bottom Right/Front (Facing the front of the unit)
A .437" hole accommodates the mounting of the optional Polyphaser.
$ (6) Bottom Left/Front (Facing the front of the unit)
A .203" hole (if present) accommodates the mounting of the optional Polyphaser.
$ (7) Bottom Left (Facing the front of the unit) (For Radio Option)
A .580" hole accommodates the antenna cable (without Polyphaser) or a .625" hole is provided for the Polyphaser (with .203" Mounting Bracket hole).
2.5.2 Terminal Connections
This device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and securing the screw. The wire should be inserted fully to prevent short circuits.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the CPU Board and harness.
2.5.3 Signal Shielding and Grounding
TeleFlow Correctors are provided with a Ground Lug that is situated on the bottom of the enclosure. Only units equipped with a modem MUST have the Ground Lug connected to a known good earth ground using wire no larger than #4 AWG in size. A Cabinet Ground Cable situated inside the enclosure provides the interconnection between the modem’s protective surge circuitry and the unit’s Ground Lug. The use of twisted-pair, shielded and insulated cable for I/O signal wiring will minimize signal errors caused by electromagnetic interference
(EMI), radio frequency interference (RFI) and transients (see Supplement S1400A).
TeleFlow™ Corrector Installation / 2-9
2.5.4 Power Connections
The unit is provided with four power connections, i.e., J10 (Solar), J8 (Primary), J7
(Secondary) & J6 (Auxiliary Power). Connectors are removable from the CPU Board's card edge to accommodate wiring when the unit is installed. Connectors J6, J7, J8 & J10 function as follows:
$ J10 Solar Panel Power Plug
Solar panel power utilizes a 2 connector right angle plug which can be unplugged from the top of the PCB. This connector accommodates the input from the Solar Panel as follows:
J10 Pin
#
1
2
J10 Pin
Name
SPWR
GND
Connection
Pos. (+)
Neg. (-)
Table 2-4 - CPU Board Solar Panel Power Plug J10
$ J8 Primary Power Plug
Primary power utilizes a 2 connector right angle plug which can be unplugged from the card edge (below J10). This connector accommodates the input from the battery as follows:
J8 Pin
#
1
2
J8 Pin
Name
PWR1
GND
Connection to
Battery
Battery (+)
Battery (-)
Table 2-5 - CPU Board Primary Power Plug J8
$ J7 Secondary Power Plug
Secondary power utilizes a 2 connector right angle plug which can be unplugged from the card edge (below J8). This connector is used to install a temporary battery while the original battery is being replaced.
J7 Pin
#
1
2
J7 Pin
Name
PWR2
GND
Connection to
Temp. Battery
Battery (+)
Battery (-)
Table 2-6 - CPU Board Secondary Power Plug J7
2-10 / Installation TeleFlow™ Corrector
$ J6 Auxiliary Power Output Connector
The auxiliary power output connector can be used to supply power to a communications device such as a Radio or Modem Option. Compression-type terminals (at the PCB's edge) accommodate the wires. This connector acts as an output supply which originates at the
Primary Power Source. This output is not fused, so a fuse should be installed elsewhere in the circuitry. This fuse should not exceed a 2 Amp rating. Connection to a load is accom-modated as follows:
J6 Pin
#
1
2
J6 Pin
Name
Connection to
Load Device
AUX PWR +5 to +16 (VDC)
GND Ground/Return
Table 2-7 - CPU Board Auxiliary Power Output Connector
Modems are powered by the Auxiliary Power Output(Connector J6). Units shipped from the factory, with a modem installed, have Auxiliary Power Output set ON in the standard load shipped with the product. If you want the modem powered continuously, and
$ you have since re-downloaded your standard load, -or-
$ you are running an ACCOL load other than the standard load shipped from the factory,
-or-
C you are installing a modem for a unit which originally shipped without a modem, then you MUST set the Auxiliary Power Output to ON. This can be accomplished, for standard loads, using the TeleFlow Menu System (TMS), by setting the Auxiliary Power Output Default to ON via the Radio Communications Setup Menu (See Section F.8.5). If you are NOT using one of the standard loads, you must use the SYS_3530 Module in your ACCOL Load to set the
Auxiliary Power Default ON/OFF signal to ON. (This signal is Entry 1 in Parameter List 4 of the
SYS_3530 Module, see ‘SYS_3530’ section in the ACCOL II Reference Manual , document#
D4044).Section F.8.5).
2.5.5 RTD Wiring
This RTD input accommodates a 100-ohm platinum bulb using the DIN 43760 curve. The
TeleFlow J accommodates the common three-wire configuration. In this configuration, the
Return lead connects to RTD- and the two junction return leads connect to RTD+ and RTD
EXC. A Three-wire RTD is factory wired to J14 Pins 3, 4 & 5 as follows:
J14 Pin
3
4
5
Signal Function
RTD-
RTD+
Return
Sense
RTD EXC Excitation
Table 2-8 - RTD Connections to CPU Board
TeleFlow™ Corrector Installation / 2-11
Figure 2-7 - 3-Wire RTD Temperature Input Connections to CPU Board
Never ground the RTD Cable Shield at both ends or allow it to come in contact with metal conduit as multiple ground paths could result and cause RTD input errors.
To install the RTD Probe, screw the Fitting Body into the thermowell with a 7/8" open-end wrench. While applying pressure against the Sheath to force the Tip of the RTD Probe into the bottom of the the thermowell (so that the Probe Tip is in contact with the thermowell), tighten the Nut (9/16" open-end wrench) against the 7/8" Fitting Body (see Figure 2-8).
Figure 2-8 - RTD Probe Installation/Removal Diagram
2.6 WIRING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS
In addition to the RTD and Pressure Transducer connections, the TeleFlow Corrector provides I/O termination for two (2) Discrete Inputs (DI0 used in conjunction with the
TeleCounter), two (2) Discrete Outputs, an Auxiliary Analog Input and a 0-16V Pulse Input
(also used in conjunction with the TeleCounter). The connections for each type are described as follows:
2.6.1 Discrete Inputs
Two independent discrete input channels are available; however, Discrete Input 0 (DI0) is used in conjunction with the TeleCounter Assembly. These inputs accept inputs from transistor, mechanical relays, TTL, CMOS and other devices which provide from 0 to 16 VDC.
These inputs are not isolated; therefore, must be referenced to the TeleFlow J Ground.
2-12 / Installation TeleFlow™ Corrector
Figure 2-9 - Discrete Input Wired to TeleFlow J CPU Board
J5 Pin
1
Signal
DIN0
Function
Discrete Input 0
(see Note below)
J5 Pin
4
Signal
DIN1
Function
Discrete Input 1
2 GND Ground 5 GND Ground
Note DIN0 is used in conjunction with the TeleCounter (see Section 2.6.3)
Table 2-9 - Discrete Input Connections to CPU Board
2.6.2 Discrete Outputs
Two independent firmware controlled open drain DOs (protected by 16V Transorbs) are provided for control or signaling functions. DOs are wired to the source terminal of an N Channel MOSFET capable of switching up to 16 volts at up to 100mA. When closed, the FET shorts the output to ground with resistance of .5 ohms or less. Because these outputs are not isolated, caution must be exercised to ensure that the load current does not ill affect operation.
Figure 2-10 - Discrete Output Wired to TeleFlow J CPU Board
TeleFlow™ Corrector Installation / 2-13
J5 Pin Signal
2
3
GND
Function
Ground
DOUT 0 Discrete Output 0
J5 Pin Signal
5
6
GND
Function
Ground
DOUT1 Discrete Output 1
Table 2-10 - Discrete Output Connections to CPU Board
2.6.3 TeleCounter Input
The TeleCounter is wired as illustrated in Figure 2-11. The TeleCounter Assembly supplies a pulse input to the CPU board's Pulse Input Circuit (which can accept pulse inputs from TTL or CMOS outputs, transistors, mechanical relays or other signaling devices). The maximum pulse frequency input is 5KHz with low impedance sources and 200Hz with high impedance sources such as Open Collector Drive. The TeleCounter Assembly also supplies a Discrete
Input to the CPU Board's DI0 input (see section 2.6.1).
Figure 2-11 - TeleCounter Ass'y. (DI & Pulse Input) Wired to TeleFlow Corrector
J#-Pin# Signal
J5-1
J14-2
J14-6
J14-7
J14-8
DIN 0
PULSE
GND
EXC
AI
Function
Discrete Input 0
Pulse Input
Ground
BAT IN
Analog Input
Table 2-11 - Pulse Input Connections to CPU Board
2-14 / Installation TeleFlow™ Corrector
2.6.4 Auxiliary Analog Input
The 0 to 16 V Auxiliary Analog Input can be supplied source power from the TeleFlow via J14
Pin 7 (Excitation) through a 100 ohm resistor. The Input J14 pin 8 presents a 150K ohm load to ground. The source must have a low enough impedance to make the load insignificant, or the load current must be taken into account when interpreting measurements. The resolution of the analog input can be no lower than .5mV.
J14 Pin
6
7
Signal
GND
EXC
Function
Ground
Excitation
J14 Pin
8
-
Signal
AI
-
Function
Analog Input
-
Table 2-12 - Auxiliary Analog Input Connections to J14
Figure 2-12 - Auxiliary Analog Input Wired to TeleFlow CPU Board
2.6.5 RS-232 Network and Local Communications Ports
There are both a network (or remote) port and a customer port. Both ports provide for serial asynchronous communications compatible with RS-232 levels. These ports operate independently at baud rates up to 19.2Kbps.
2.6.5.1 Local Port
Wire Color
Black
White
Red
Green
Brown
VII Plug Pin #
6
2
7
1*
4*
D- Conn. Pin #
5
2
3
N/A
N/A
Signal Name
GND
LRXD
LTXD
N/A
N/A
TeleFlow™ Corrector
Table 2-13 - Local Port/Pc Interconnect Cable Wiring
Installation / 2-15
* T he green and brown wires are shorted together in the VII Plug/D Conn. Wiring Harness and do not connect to the D-Type Connector. Pins 7 & 8 of the D-Type Connector are shorted together.
Figure 2-13 - PC Connected to TeleFlow J Local Port
2.6.5.2 Network Port
The network port functions as a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) device. The network port employs the standard RS-232 Interface Signals for data transfer and handshaking. Whenever the Carrier Detect Signal (RDCD) is active (RS-232 Mark or High Level), the TeleFlow J exits sleep mode and stays in communication mode as long as the signal is active. The standard RS-
232 signals are provided on the Network Port as follows:
J13 Pin Name
1
2
GND
RDCD
3
4
5
6
7
RDTR
RCTS
RRTS
RRXD
RTXD
Function
Ground
Data Carrier Detect Input
Data Term. Ready Output
Clear To Send Input
Request To Send output
Receive Data Input
Transmit Data Output
Table 2-14 - Network Port Connections to J13
2-16 / Installation TeleFlow™ Corrector
2.6.5.3 Modem On Network Port (see CI-9600 or CI-9600TF Instruction Manual)
Figure 2-14A - Original 9600 BPS - PSTN Modem (see Manual CI-9600)
TeleFlow
Conn. & Sig. Name
J5-17 (RTXD)
J13-7 (RTXD)
J5-16 (RRXD)
J13-6 (RRXD)
J5-13 (RDTR)
J13-3 (RDTR)
J5-15 (RRTS)
J13-5 (RRTS)
J5-14 (RCTS)
J13-4 (RCTS)
J5-12 (RDCD)
J13-2 (RDCD)
J5-11 (GND)
J13-1 (GND)
J6-1 (Aux Pwr)
J6-2 (GND)
Signal
Direction
To Modem
From Modem
To Modem
To Modem
From Modem
From Modem
---
To Modem
---
Modem
Conn. & Sig. Name
J5-3 (TXD)
J5-2 (RXD)
J5-4 (DTR)
J5-7 (RTS)
J5-8 (CTS)
J5-1 (CD)
J5-5 (GND)
TB4-2 (EXTVDC)
TB4-1 (GND)
Port
Usage
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
Ground
Power
Pwr Gnd
TB1-1 (T/R) Phone Line
TB1-2 (T/R) Phone Line
Note: CPU Bd. Connector J5 is associated with CPU P/N 392561XXX (older CPU).
CPU Bd. Connector J13 is associated with CPU P/N 392926XXX (current CPU)
Table 2-15 - Original 9600 BPS Modem Wiring Listing
TeleFlow™ Corrector Installation / 2-17
Figure 2-14B - Current 9600 BPS - PSTN Modem (see Manual CI-9600TF)
TeleFlow
Conn. & Sig. Name
J5-17 (RTXD)
J13-7 (RTXD)
J5-16 (RRXD)
J13-6 (RRXD)
J5-13 (RDTR)
J13-3 (RDTR)
J5-15 (RRTS)
J13-5 (RRTS)
J5-14 (RCTS)
J13-4 (RCTS)
J5-12 (RDCD)
J13-2 (RDCD)
J5-11 (GND)
J13-1 (GND)
J6-1 (AUX PWR)
Signal
Direction
To Modem
From Modem
To Modem
To Modem
---
From Modem
---
Modem
Conn. & Sig. Name
J2-3 (TXD)
J2-2 (RXD)
J2-4 (DTR)
J2-7 (RTS)
---
J2-1 (CD)
J2-5 (GND)
Port
Usage
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
Ground
To Modem TB4-1 (EXTVDC) Power
J6-2 (GND) --TB4-2 (GND) Pwr Gnd
Note: CPU Bd. Connector J5 is associated with CPU P/N 392561XXX (older CPU).
CPU Bd. Connector J13 is associated with CPU P/N 392926XXX (current CPU)
Table 2-16 - Current 9600 BPS Modem Wiring Listing
2-18 / Installation TeleFlow™ Corrector
2.7.2 Tilt Angle
Table 2-16 shows the angle (from horizontal) at which the solar panel should be installed in order to maximize annual energy output. At most latitudes, performance can be improved by less of an angle during the summer and more of an angle during the winter.
Figure 2-16 - Solar Panel & Mounting Hardware - 2" Pipe Mount
Figure 2-17 - 5W Solar Panel & Mounting Hardware - 2" Pipe Mount
TeleFlow™ Corrector Installation / 2-19
LATITUDE
0-4
E
5-20
E
21-45 E
45-65 E
66-75 E
INSTALLATION ANGLE
10
E
from Horizontal
Add 5
E
to the Local Latitude
Add 10 E to the Local Latitude
Add 15 E to the Local Latitude
80 E from Horizontal
Table 2-16 - Solar Panel Tilt Angle
2.8 TeleFlow
-
Corrector CONFIGURATION
TeleFlow Correctors are shipped with certain defaults. Most likely these defaults don’t match your meter run. Use the TeleFlow
-
Menu System (TMS) to configure your system (see
Appendix F and Appendix C).
2.9 INSTALLING A TeleFlow
-
IN A HAZARDOUS AREA
2.9.1 Installing a Nonincendive TeleFlow
Refer to Appendix A - Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Location, when installing a TeleFlow Model 3530-50B in a Class I, Division 2 hazardous location. Refer to the
BBI TeleFlow 3530-50B Model Specification to determine which optional power systems (solar panels and battery packs) are approved for use in a nonincendive TeleFlow.
Figure 2-18 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow with Modem and External Power Supply
2-20 / Installation TeleFlow™ Corrector
2.9.2 Installing an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow
Refer to Appendix B - Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Location, when installing a TeleFlow Model 3530-50B in a Class I, Division 1 hazardous location. Refer to the
TeleFlow 3530-50B BBI Model Specification to determine which optional power systems (solar panels and battery packs) are approved for use in an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow.
When an externally powered TeleFlow is used in a class I, Division 1 location, it must be used in conjunction with a BBI Istran Communication Interface and installed per instruction manual CI-3530-IStran (see Figures 2-18 & 2-19).
Figure 2-19 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow with Radio and External Power Supply
TeleFlow™ Corrector Installation / 2-21
BLANK PAGE
Section 3
Service
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides Removal/Replacement Procedures, and Troubleshooting/Fault Isolation information for the TeleFlow J Corrector model 3530-50B.
Calibration utilizes a PC running the TMS program (see Appendix F - Section F.8.4). External test equipment such as a digital multimeter and oscilloscope will also be required to aid in isolating and troubleshooting certain problems.
Figure 3-1 - Local Port Communications Setup
3.2 ACCESSING PARTS FOR TESTING OR REPLACEMENT
In order to test or replace any major system component, it will be necessary to open the Instrument Front Cover. These operations should only be performed by technically-qualified persons having advanced mechanical and electronic skills, and possessing the proper service equipment. Any damage to the TeleFlow J Corrector resulting from improper handling or incorrect service procedures will not be covered under the product warranty agreement. If these procedures cannot be performed properly, the unit should be returned to Bristol Babcock for factory evaluation and repairs.
TeleFlow J Corrector Service / 3-1
Warning
Opening the door of a powered TeleFlow Corrector that is operating in a hazardous area exposes the electrical circuitry to the atmosphere and could result in accidental fire or explosion (see Appendix A).
Caution
PC board components can be damaged by electrostatic discharges (ESD) during disassembly, reassembly, and test procedures. Use grounded wrist straps and surface pads when working near or handling the Main Circuit Board. See attached instruction supplement S14006 for proper grounding and handling techniques.
3.3 COMPONENT REMOVAL & REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
The following major items are covered in this section:
$ Battery, CPU Board, On Board Fuse, On Board Battery, LCD Display/Switch Panel
Assembly & TeleCounter Assembly
The following items are covered in appendices:
$ Optional Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (see PIP-EXPTIBTF)
$ Optional Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board (see PIP-EXP232TF)
$ Optional Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board (see PIP-EXP485/AO)
Note:
Should it become necessary to replace either the Pressure Transducer or the CPU Board, the entire TeleFlow J Corrector Assembly must be returned to Bristol Babcock for repair. These are matched parts which must be compensated together at the factory.
3.3.1 Intrinsically Safe Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure
(see Figures 3-2 & 3-3)
1. Push the Activate Display Button on the TeleFlow's Instrument Front Cover.
2. Remove the three (3) screws (and the lock if present) which secure the Instrument's Front
Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
3. Remove the Battery Plug from Connector J8 or J7 near the top of the Main Circuit Board.
Note: In the event the TeleFlow requires continuous operation, a small auxiliary 9V battery can be plugged into the Secondary Connector (J7).
4. In the case of the 6V Lead Acid Battery System (Figure 3-2) hold the Battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws). Carefully remove the
Battery.
In the case of the Intrinsically Safe Single Lithium Battery Systems (Figure 3-3) remove the
Cover/Modem Mounting Plate from the Battery Mounting Bracket and carefully remove the
Battery System in question.
3-2 / Service TeleFlow J Corrector
Figure 3-2 - TeleFlow With 6V Lead Acid Intrinsically Safe Battery System
5. To replace the battery:
In the case of the 6V Lead Acid Battery System (Figure 3-2):
- Position (hold) the Battery on the Right Battery Mounting Bracket and replace the Left
Battery Mounting Bracket (2 screws).
- Install (Plug) the Battery Wiring Harness Connector into CPU Board Connector J8.
- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
TeleFlow J Corrector Service / 3-3
Figure 3-3 - TeleFlow With 6V Single Lithium Battery System
In the case of the Single Lithium Battery System (Figure 3-3):
- Place the new Lithium Battery onto the Battery Mounting Bracket's right side.
- Install (Plug) the Battery Wires into CPU Board Connector J8 as follows: Black = (Neg.
- J8- GND), Red = (Pos. - J8 - PWR1).
- Install the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate onto the Battery Mounting Bracket.
- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
3.3.2 Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure (with Modem Option)
(see Figures 3-4, 3-5, 3-6 & 3-7)
1. Push the Activate Display Button on the TeleFlow's Instrument Front Cover.
2. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
3. Remove the Battery Plug from Connector J8 near the top of the Main Circuit Board.
3-4 / Service TeleFlow J Corrector
Note: In the event the TeleFlow requires continuous operation, a small auxiliary battery can be plugged into the Secondary Connector (J7).
Note: In the case of the Dual
Lithium Battery System (Figure 3-6), you may want to leave the battery associated with Connector J7 connected.
Figure 3-4 - TeleFlow With 6V Dual Lithium Battery System
4. Disconnect the phone wires from modem connectors TB1-1 (Black) and TB1-2 (Red) (see
Figure 2-14A) or from the modem’s RJ11 connector (J1) (see Figure 2-14A or 2-14B).
5. Disconnect the D-Type connector from modem connector J5 (see Figure 2-14A) or modem connector J2 (see Figure 2-14B). Unplug the two-wire Auxiliary Power Jack from CPU
Board connector P6.
6. Remove the #10-32 Hex Nut that secures the Cabinet Ground Cable to the TeleFlow
Corrector Case.
TeleFlow J Corrector Service / 3-5
7. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it.
Figure 3-5 - TeleFlow With 6V Lead Acid Battery
Note: This arrangement may be used with either the 1W, 6V Solar Panel System or the 5W,
6V Solar Panel System
8. In the case of the 6V Lead Acid Battery System (Figure 3-5), carefully remove the battery
(with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8" screws (A) that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting
Bracket to the rear of the unit.
Note: In the case of the Dual Lithium Battery System
(Figure 3-4) you may want to replace one battery at a time, i.e., replace the battery associated with connector J8 prior to removing and replacing the Lithium Battery associated with connector J7.
In the case of the 12V Alkaline Battery System (Figure 3-6), carefully remove the eight (8),
1.5V batteries from the Battery Holder
3-6 / Service TeleFlow J Corrector
Figure 3-6 - TeleFlow With 12V Alkaline Battery System
9. To replace the battery:
Follow steps 3 through 8 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
In the case of the 12V Alkaline Battery System (Figure 3-6), observe battery polarities when installing them into the Battery Holder.
- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
In the case of the Dual Lithium Battery System (Figure 3-4):
- Place the new Lithium Batteries onto the Battery Mounting Bracket.
- Install (Plug) the Right Battery Wires into CPU Board Connector J8 as follows: Black =
(Neg. - J8- GND), Red = (Pos. - J8 - PWR1).
- Install (Plug) the Left Battery Wires into CPU Board Connector J7 as follows: Black =
(Neg. - J7- GND), Red = (Pos. - J7 - PWR2).
- Install the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate onto the Battery/Radio Mounting Bracket.
- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
TeleFlow J Corrector Service / 3-7
3.3.3 Battery Removal/Replacement Procedure (with Radio Option)
(see Figures 3-7 & 3-8)
1. Push the Activate Display Button on the TeleFlow's Instrument Front Cover.
2. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
3. Remove the Battery Plug from Connector J8 near the top of the Main Circuit Board.
Note: In the event the TeleFlow requires continuous operation, a small auxiliary battery can be plugged into the Secondary Connector (J7).
4. Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the radio.
Figure 3-7 - TeleFlow With 12V Lead Acid Battery (Radio Removed)
5. If an MDS radio is present, unplug the two-wire power connector associated with the 2-
Wire Radio Power Interface Cable (395445-02-7) from the bottom of the radio. Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3) from the bottom of the radio.
3-8 / Service TeleFlow J Corrector
If a FreeWave radio is installed, unplug the two-wire Auxiliary Power Jack from CPU
Board connector P6. Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) from radio connector J1. Note: When re-installing the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-
01-4), make sure that the cable connector’s red wire aligns with FreeWave radio connector
J1's Pin 1.
Figure 3-8 - TeleFlow With MDS Radio Option
6. Unscrew the Antenna Cable from the bottom of the Radio.
7. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio Mounting Plate (with radio) to the
Battery/Radio Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.
TeleFlow J Corrector Service / 3-9
8. Carefully remove the Battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8" screws (A) that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.
9. To replace the battery:
- Follow steps 3 through 8 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
- Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
3.3.4 CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement (without Radio/Modem
Option)
(see Figure 3-2)
Note:
The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the TeleFlow has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual S14006). The CPU Board should only be removed to replace the On Board Lithium Battery.
1. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
2. Remove the Battery Plug(s) from Connector J8 and/or J7 near the top of the CPU Board.
Also remove the Solar Panel Power Plug from connector J10 and/or the Auxiliay Power
Plug from Connector J6 if both or either of them are used.
3. Hold the Battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with
2 screws)n (see Figure 3-2). Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting
Bracket. Carefully remove the Battery (with wiring harness).
4. Remove the Right Battery Mounting Bracket.
5. Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, Field I/O and Solar Panel (if present) connectors from the CPU Board edge connectors. Label the various wiring harnesses/connectors so that they will be replaced in the proper PCB connectors.
J5 PIN
7
8
9
10
J5 NAME
GND
LRXD
LTXD
WAKEUP
COLOR
Black & Brown
White
Red
Green
FUNCTION
Ground
Receive Data Input
Transmit Data Output
Wakeup Signal
Table 3-1 - Local Port Connections to J5
6. Carefully remove the PC Board Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by
2 (#4-40 x 1/4" screws).
Note:
Exercise extreme care to avoid damage to surface mounted components.
3-10 / Service TeleFlow J Corrector
7. Remove the screw that secures the Pressure Sensor Interface Cable Connector to the CPU
Board Standoff at J1 and unplug the Flex Cable Connector from J1.
8. Remove the two (2) M/F (#4-40 x 5/8") Hex Standoff Post that secure the CPU Board to the
Main Mounting Bracket. This will require the use of a 3/16" Wrench or Hex Driver.
9. Remove the remaining 3 (#4-40 x 1/4") screws that secure the CPU Board to the Main
Mounting Bracket.
10. Disconnect (unplug) the Display Module Connector from J2 and the Wakeup Switch Connector from J3.
11. Carefully remove the CPU Board from the TeleFlow Enclosure. Be careful not to damage the surface mounted components. Avoid contact with the Main Mounting Bracket, Wiring
Harnesses, etc. Note: This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe work area.
12. To Replace the CPU Board:
- Carefully place the CPU Board into the TeleFlow J enclosure and connect the Wakeup
Switch Connector to J3. Note: This connector is not keyed and can be installed backward (with no resulting damage to the unit).
- Install the LCD Display Module Connector into J2 (yellow conductor goes to Pin 1 of J2).
- Install the Pressure Sensor Cable Connector into J1. Replace the J1 Connector/Cable
Securing Screw so that the hardware is installed as follows: Screw, Washer, Con-nector
Hardware, Washer, Mounting Standoff.
- Secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting Bracket with the 3 screws and the two hex standoffs.
- Follow steps 1 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
3.3.5 CPU Circuit Board Removal/Replacement
(with Radio/Modem Option)
Note:
The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the TeleFlow has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual S14006). The CPU Board should only be removed to replace the On Board Lithium Battery.
1. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
2. Remove the Battery Plug from Connector J8 near the top of the Main Circuit Board.
3. If equipped with a modem follow steps 4 through 7 of Section 3.3.2.
If equipped with a radio, follow steps 4 through 7 of section 3.3.3, but disconnect the Radio
Power Connector (P6) from CPU Board AUX PWR Connector J6. Unplug any remaining harnesses (I/O, Solar Power, Secondary Power) from the CPU Board’s card edge connectors (J10, J7, J5, J13 & J14).
4. Carefully remove the Battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x3/8" screws (A) that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the TeleFlow Corrector .
TeleFlow J Corrector Service / 3-11
5. While holding the Main Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8" screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the TeleFlow J . Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the TeleFlow Housing.
6. Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, Field I/O and Solar Panel (if present) connectors from the CPU Board edge connectors. Label the various wiring harnesses/connectors so that they will be replaced in the proper PCB connectors.
CPU PIN
P5-10
P13-1
P13-2
P13-3
P13-4
P13-5
P13-6
P13-7
P14-8
J5 NAME
WAKEUP
GND
RDCD
N/A
RCTS
RRTS
RRXD
RTXD
AI
COLOR
Yellow
Black
Green
N/A
Brown
Blue
White
Red
Orange
FUNCTION
Wakeup
PCOMM Ground
Data Carrier Detect Input
N/A
Clear To Send Input
Request To Send Output
Receive Data Input
Transmit Data Output
Analog Input
Table 3-2 - CPU Board Network Port Connections from MDS Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01 B 3) or
FreeWave Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4)
7. Carefully remove the PC Board Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by
2 (#4-40 x 1/4" screws).
8. Remove the screw that secures the Pressure Sensor Interface Cable Connector to the CPU
Board Standoff at J1 and unplug the Ribbon Cable Connector from J1.
9. Remove the two (2) M/F (#4-40 x 5/8") Hex Standoff Post that secure the CPU Board to the
Main Mounting Bracket. This will require the use of a 3/16" Wrench or Hex Driver.
10. Remove the 3 (#4-40 x 1/4") screws securing the CPU Bd. to the Main Mounting Bracket.
11. Disconnect (unplug) the Display Module Connector from J2 and the Wakeup Switch Connector from J3.
12. Carefully remove the CPU Board from the TeleFlow Enclosure. Be careful not to damage the surface mounted components. Avoid contact with the Main Mounting Bracket, Wiring
Harnesses, etc.
13. To Replace the CPU Board:
3-12 / Service TeleFlow J Corrector
- Carefully place the CPU Board into the TeleFlow J Enclosure and connect the Wakeup
Switch Connector to J3. Note: This connector is not keyed and can be installed backward
(with no resulting damage to the unit).
- Install the LCD Display Connector into J2 (yellow conductor goes to Pin 1 of J2).
- Install the Pressure Sensor Cable Connector into J1. Replace the J1 Connector/Cable
Securing Screw so that the hardware is installed as follows: Screw, Washer, Connector
Hardware, Washer, Mounting Standoff.
- Secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting Bracket with the 3 screws and the two hex standoffs.
- Follow steps 1 through 11 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question (see Table 3-1 for Local Port wiring and Table 3-2 for Network Port wiring).
3.3.6 Removal/Replacement of the On Board Fuse F1
F1 is a 350mA (Schurter 3402.0043) fast acting fuse that is located on the CPU Board.
1. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect power from the CPU board by unplugging P10, P8, P7 and P6 as required.
3. Remove F1 with a pair of Needle-nose pliers or a pair of tweezers.
4. Carefully press the replacement fuse (using Tweezers or Needle-nose Pliers) into its receptacle.
5. Reconnect power to the CPU board.
6. Close and secure the Door.
3.3.7 Removal/Replacement of the On Board Battery
Note:
The On Board Battery should be changed in an ESD safe area.
The On Board Tadiran TL-5134/P Lithium Thionyl Chloride Battery provides 1AH of 3.6VDC
Backup power for RAM, Real Time Clock and analog switches which are powered from the
V+5B Supply.
1. Remove the CPU Board (see appropriate Removal/Replacement Procedure).
2. If it is desired to save the contents of RAM, it will be necessary to install the Main Battery
Power Supply at J8 prior to removal of the Lithium Battery.
3. Slide the rubber hold-down band from the Lithium Battery and carefully pull the three pronged battery off the CPU Board.
4. Carefully install the replacement Lithium Battery onto the CPU Board making sure to install the rubber hold-down band.
TeleFlow J Corrector Service / 3-13
5. Disconnect The Main Battery Power Supply from J8.
6. Reinstall the CPU Board (see appropriate Removal/Replacement Procedure).
Figure 3-9 - TeleFlow J CPU Board
3.3.8 Removal/Replacement of the Display/Switch Panel Assembly
1. To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
2. Follow the appropriate steps to remove the CPU Board without removing any wiring except the Power Supply Connector at J8.
3-14 / Service TeleFlow J Corrector
3. With the Battery removed and the CPU Board loose (but still wired into the system), slightly move the CPU Board toward the front of the unit and remove the connectors from
J2 (Display) and J3 (Wakeup).
Note:
It is recommended that you secure the CPU Board with at least 2
screws until you are ready to replace the LCD Display/Switch Assembly.
4. Carefully remove the ribbon cables associated with the LCD Display/Switch Panel
Assembly. These cables run between the Main Mounting Bracket and the left side of the enclosure (right side when facing the front of the unit).
5. Remove the eight (8) #4-40 screws which secure the LCD Display/Switch Panel Assembly to the Door.
6. The LCD Display/Switch Panel Assembly can be disassembled if it is desired to replace either the Membrane Switch Panel or LCD Display Sub-assembly. The LCD Display Sub assembly is secured to the Membrane Switch Panel via four screws (with washers).
7. To replace the LCD Display/Switch Panel assembly:
- Installed the LCD Display/Switch Panel Ass’y. on the Door via eight mounting screws.
- Carefully route the Ribbon Cables between the Main Mounting Bracket and the left side of the enclosure (right side when facing the front of the unit). Run the cables under the
Main Mounting Bracket (approximately 1") and plug them into their respective connectors. The two wire cable plugs into J3 (Wakeup) and can be installed without regard to polarity (with no resulting damage to the unit). The LCD Display Module Connector plugs into J2 (yellow wire adjacent to pin 1 of J2).
8. Remove the screws that were temporarily securing the Main Mounting Bracket and secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting Bracket (via three (3) screws and two hex stand-offs.
9. Carefully replace the PC Board Shield (securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket with two
(2) screws).
10. Replace the PC Shield Label (secured to the PC Board Shield and two hex stand-offs).
11. Replace the Battery and Battery mounting Hardware. Connect the Battery to J8.
12. Close and secure the Door.
3.3.9 Removal/Replacement of the TeleCounter Assembly
Note
This procedure is written under the assumption that a replacement TeleCounter
Assembly is to be installed. If a replacement part is not available the entire
TeleFlow Corrector should be removed (since without the TeleCounter Assembly there is no means to support the unit).
TeleFlow J Corrector Service / 3-15
1. Configure the replacement TeleCounter Assembly (see Section 2.2.2).
2. Remove the three (3) screws (and lock if present) which secure the Instrument Front
Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
3-16 / Service
Figure 3-10 - Location Of TeleCounter Mounting Screws
(viewed with top cut away)
TeleFlow J Corrector
3. Disconnect the TeleCounters wires from the CPU Board edge connectors and remove the harness to accommodate removal of the TeleCounter Assembly. These wires are color coded as follows:
Blue (J5-1 - DIN 0)
Black (J14-6 - GND)
Green (J14-2 - PULSE)
Red (J14-7 - EXC)
Orange (J14-8 - AI)
4. Remove the four screws which secure the TeleCounter Assembly to the base of the
TeleFlow Corrector (see Figure 4-14).
5. While securing the TeleFlow Corrector, remove the nuts which secure the base of the
TeleCounter Assembly to the Turbine Meter and remove the TeleCounter.
6. While securing the Corrector, install the replacement TeleCounter Assembly (with top gasket) to the base of the unit such that the wiring harness runs through the large hole at the base of the Corrector. Install and tighten the four screws that secure the TeleCounter
Assembly to the bottom of the Corrector.
7. Install a new gasket to the top of the site installed turbine meter and mount the TeleFlow
Corrector. When mating the TeleFlow Corrector to the turbine meter, it is essential that the input shaft of the TeleCounter and the opening on the output shaft of the turbine meter mate properly. Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. Once the surfaces are aligned, the mounting washers and nuts may be installed and tightened.
8. Connect the TeleCounter's wires to J5 & J14 (see step 3).
9. Close the Front Cover and replace the three (3) cover securing screws (and lock if present).
3.3.10 Removal/Replacement of the Modem or Radio Options
Removal/Replacement of the 9600 bps Modem Option is covered in BBI Customer Instruction
Manual as follows: Modem P/N 396039-02-2 (see CI-9600)
Modem P/N 400000-01-6 (see CI-9600TF)
Removal/Replacement of the MDS Radio Option is covered in Appendix D. Removal/-
Replacement of the FreeWave Radio Option is covered in Appendix E.
3.3.11 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion TIB Option
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Transmitter Interface Board Option is covered in BBI
Product Information Package PIP-EXPTIBTF.
3.3.12 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-232 Intf. Bd. Option
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-232 Interface Board Option is covered in BBI
Product Information Package PIP-EXP232TF.
TeleFlow J Corrector Service / 3-17
3.3.13 Removal/Replacement of the Exp. RS-485 and/or AO Bd. Option
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board Option is covered in BBI Product Information Package PIP-EXP485/AO.
3.4 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
3.4.1 Battery & Fuse F1 Checks (Processor not running or no power)
Check the inputs to the PWR1, PWR2 & SPWR circuits at the card edge connector.
The CPU Board requires a Supply Voltage of 5.4 to 16 (VDC) for normal operation. PWR1,
PWR2 and SPWR share a single 350mA Fuse. Auxiliary Power Out (J6-1 & J6-2) is not fused.
• If Power is below Spec. at PWR1 (P8), PWR2 (P7) pr SPWR (P10) check the battery (and solar panel if present).
• If the correct voltage is present at the PWR1, PWR2 or SPWR terminals check Fuse F1 on the CPU Board.
PIN #
P10-1
P10-2
P8-1
P8-2
P7-1
P7-2
P6-1
P6-2
+SP
-SP
PIN
NAME
PWR1
GND
PWR2
GND
AUX PWR
GND
CONNECTION
Solar Panel +
Solar Panel -
Battery (+)
Battery (-)
Battery (+)
Battery (-)
+5 to +16 (VDC)
Ground/Return
NOTES
Solar Pwr.
Solar Pwr.
Primary Pwr.
Primary Pwr.
Secondary Pwr.
Secondary Pwr.
Auxiliary Pwr.
Auxiliary Pwr.
3.4.2 LED Checks
Table 3-3 - Power Plugs P6, P7, P8 & P10
The CPU Board contains two LEDs (D27 is green & D26 is red). These LEDs are situated near the top of the CPU Board between the PWR2 & AUX POWER connectors on the card edge.
These LEDs function as follows:
D27 - Green: This LED indicates the TeleFlow™ operating mode.
Flash 5/Sec. = Communications or Calculation Mode.
Short Flash 1/Sec. = Sleep Mode.
D26 - Red: This LED indicates when the Check Sum calculated for Compensation/-
Calibration EPROM is either correct or incorrect.
ON = Check Sum invalid.
3-18 / Service TeleFlow™ Corrector
OFF = Check Sum is valid.
Flashing = Flash PROM download in progress.
• If these LEDs are inoperable, check the voltage at PWR1. Check fuse F1.
• These LEDs flash alternately during download to the FLASH PROM.
3.4.3 LCD Display Checks
On initial system startup, the LCD will indicate that a warm or cold start is in progress. The display will then scroll through its list twice. Verify that the LCD displays the following messages:
1. Date & Time
2. Network Comm. Active (Note: This message may appear intermittently.)
3. TeleCorr Version X.X
4. Local & Group Address
5. Unc Rate Alarm
6. Meter ID
7. System Power
8. Aux Input
9. Flowing Pressure Value in PSIG
10. Flowing Temperature Value in Deg. F.
11. Unc Flow Rate
12. Flow Rate
13. Flow Time
14. UncVolume Today
15. Corrected Volume Today
16. Yesterday's (yesday's) Volume
17. Yesterday's Unc Volume
18. Volume Totalizer
Additionally, one or more of the following messages may appear:
1. AGA 8 Calc Status
2. System Power Status (Could be Alarm)
• If the LCD Display is difficult to read, check its Contrast Adjustment on the CPU Board.
This Adjusting Pot. (R-18) is situated above and behind the Green LED (D27).
All active alarms are displayed once per display scroll cycle.
3.4.4 Calibration Checks
Calibrations can be verified (see Appendix F - Section F.8.4.1) or conducted (see Appendix F
-Section F.8.4.2). The TeleFlow Menu System (TMS) provides Help Menus if F2 (Function Key
#2) is pressed during a calibration routine. For units not running a TMS load, calibration can be performed utilizing OpenBSI’s Calibration Tool (see document # D5129 - OpenBSI
CALIBRATION TOOL User Manual).
TeleFlow™ Corrector Service / 3-19
3.4.5 TMS Menu System
(see Appendix F)
This system is used to determine the actual status of the Pressure Transducer, the RTD and all I/Os. The TeleFlow Menu System (TMS) provides the following capabilities:
- Status of Current Gas Flow Information
- View/Change Configuration
- Radio Communications Set-up
- Status of Alarms
- Special Functions
- Security level 4 Maintenance Operations
3.4.6 Field Wiring/Signal Checks
- Log Collection
- Calibration of RTD and SP Transducer
- Status of Comm. Port
- Set Time & Date
- Security Maintenance
Check Input or Output Field Wires at the Card Edge Connector and at the field device. Check wiring for continuity, shorts & opens. Check the I/O signals at the Card Edge J5 Connectors
(see Figures 3-11 through 3-16 & Table 3-4).
Figure 3-11 - 3-Wire RTD Temperature Input (see Section 2.5.5)
3-20 / Service
Figure 3-12 - DI Wired to TeleFlow™ (see Section 2.6.1)
TeleFlow™ Corrector
J13-2
J13-3
J13-4
J15-5
J13-6
J13-7
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J14-4
J14-5
J14-6
CPU PIN
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
J5-5
J5-6
J5-7
J5-8
J5-9
J5-10
J13-1
J14-7
J14-8
Signal
DIN 0
GND
Function
Discrete Input 0
Ground
DOUT 0
DIN 1
GND
DOUT 1
Discrete Output 0
Discrete Input 1
Ground
Discrete Output 1
GND
LRXD
Ground
Receive Data Input
LTXD Transmit Data Output
WAKEUP Wakeup Signal
GND Ground
Notes
See Section 2.6.1 & Section 2.6.3
See Section 2.6.2
See Section 2.6.1
See Section 2.6.2
See Section 2.6.5.2
See Section 2.6.5.2
See Section 2.6.5.2
RDCD
RDTR
RCTS
RRTS
RRXD
RTXD
GND
PULSE
Data Carrier Detect Input See Section 2.6.5.3
Data Term Ready Output See Section 2.6.5.3
Clear To Send Input See Section 2.6.5.3
Request To Send Output See Section 2.6.5.3
Receive Data Input
Transmit Data Output
Ground
Pulse Input
See Section 2.6.5.3
See Section 2.6.5.3
See Section 2.6.3
RTD-
RTD+
Return
Sense
RTDEXC Excitation
GND Ground
See Section 2.5.5
See Section 2.5.5
See Section 2.5.5
EXC
AI
Excitation
Analog Input
See Section 2.6.3 &
Section 2.6.4
See Section 2.6.4
Table 3-4 - Field I/O Wiring List
TeleFlow™ Corrector Service / 3-21
Figure 3-13 - DO Wired to TeleFlow Corrector (see Section 2.6.2)
Figure 3-14 - Auxiliary AI Wired to TeleFlow Corrector (see Section 2.6.4)
Figure 3-15 - TeleCounter Wired to TeleFlow™ Corrector (see Section 2.6.3)
3-22 / Service TeleFlow™ Corrector
Figure 3-16 - PC Connected to TeleFlow™ Local Port (see Section 2.6.5)
TeleFlow™ Corrector Service / 3-23
BLANK PAGE
Section 4
SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 MODEL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
3530-50B-AB-C-D-EFG-H-J-K-M-N-P = Model Number Structure
PACKAGING
NO PRESSURE SENSOR
25 PSI STATIC
100 PSI STATIC
300 PSI STATIC
1000 PSI STATIC
2000 PSI STATIC
APPLICATION PROGRAM*
Standard
ACCOL
Custom Program
POWER SUPPLY (* = 0 or 2)
External
External With I.S. Interface
External With Radio
External With Modem
Alkaline Battery
Lithium Battery Pack (Single)
Lithium Battery Pack (Single) I.S.
Lithium Battery Pack (Dual)
1W-6V Lead Acid Solar Panel System
1W-6V Lead Acid Solar Panel System I.S.
5W-6V Lead Acid Solar Panel System.
5W-6V Lead Acid Solar Panel System I.S.
5W-12V Lead Acid Solar Panel System
5W-12V Lead Acid Solar Panel System
(With Radio)
Alkaline Rechargeable Battery
D
1
2
9
A B
0 0
2 0
2 2
2 3
2 5
2 8
E F G
0 0 *
0 0 1
0 1 *
0 2 *
1 * *
2 * *
2 0 1
3 * *
4 * *
4 0 1
5 * *
5 0 1
6 * *
6 1 *
7 * *
CERTIFICATION
None
Class 1 Division 1 (UL-I.S.)
Class 1 Division 2 (CUL-N.I.)
RTD*
Without
With
PULSE COUNTER
None
Counter With Index (CW)
Counter With Index (CCW)
METER INDEX RATE
None
1 CF/Rev.
5 CF/Rev.
10 CF/Rev.
100 CF/Rev.
1000 CF/Rev.
0.1 M
1 M
10 M
100 M
3
3
3
3
/Rev.
/Rev.
/Rev.
/Rev.
G
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
N
0
1
2
7
8
9
1
2
J
0
H
0
1
ENCLOSURE
Standard (without Pressure Sensor)
Standard (with Pressure Sensor)
Speci al (without Pressure Sensor)
Special (with Pressure Sensor)
A C
0 0
2 0
0 1
2 1
MOUNTING KIT*
None
Standard (Rockwell, Roots
Type)
American Meter Type
COMMUNICATION
RS-232 (* = Any Selection)
Radio (* 1 = 0 or 6)
Modem (* = Any Selection)
E F
* 0
* 1 1
* 2 2
3
DIGIT BLANKING*
None
1 st nd
Digit (Tenths)
Digit (Ones) rd Digit (Tens)
See Table 4-2 for Model Number Breakdown for 3530-50B Expansion Boards
Table 4-1 - Model Number Breakdown for 3530-50B
* Note: Field changeable items may not match the unit's Model # as factory shipped.
TeleFlow J Corrector Specifications / 4-1
M
0
1
2
3
K
0
1
2
EXPANSION
BOARDS
D E G P NOTES
(* = Any Selection)
None
Expansion TIB
0 0 0 0 No Expansion Bds.
2 # * 1 1 Ext. Pwr. or +12V Lead Acid Batt.
Expansion RS-232
Expansion A0 (I.S.)
2
2
2
2
2
*
0
*
0
*
*
1
1
1
1
1 2
2
2
3
3
No Certification or Class I, Div. 2
Ext. Pwr., Class I, Div. 1
Class I, Div. 1 (ISTRAN)
Ext. Pwr., Class I, Div. 1
Class I , Div. 1 (ISTRAN)
Expansion RS-485 2 # * 1 4
Note: * 1 = 0 (No Certification) or 2 (Class I, Division 2 Certification)
Note: # = 0 (External Power System) or 6 (12Vdc Lead Acid Battery)
Table 4-2 - Model Number Breakdown for 3530-50B (Expansion Boards)
4.2 PERFORMANCE
Calculation Accuracy:
Static Pressure Accuracy:
Static Pressure Resolution:
Ambient Temp. Effect on Static
Pressure:
Power Supply Effect:
(All Variables)
Reproducibility:
RTD Temperature Range:
RTD Resolution:
RTD Reading Accuracy:
Ambient Temp. Effect on
RTD Reading Accuracy:
Conforms to accepted published results ±10 parts per million when calculated using fixed values.
±.1% FS
0.005% FS
0.25% FS (Over Operating Temperature Range)
0.005% FS
±0.1% in 1-Hour Period
(Including hysteresis and repeatability)
-40 E to +248 E F (-40 E to +120 E C)
±0.02
E F
±0.25
E F (Not including RTD Element)
0.1% FS (Over Operating Temperature Range)
4-2 / Using TMS TeleFlow J Corrector
4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Operating Range: -40 to +60 E C (-40 to 140 E F)
0 to +40 E C (+32 to 104 E F)(w/alkaline battery)
5% to 90% (noncondensing)
Vibration Effect:
Transient Susceptibility:
ESD Susceptibility:
EMI Susceptibility:
EMI Radiation:
Hazardous Locations:
< ±0.1% FS for 15-150 Hz at 1 g and 150-2000 Hz at .5g on any axis per SAMA PMC 33.1-1978.
Meets the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-
1989 (formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
Meets the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV (No Damage).
Meets the requirements of IEC 801-3 level 3
(10V/M) from 500KHz to 500MHz. Effect on pressure and temperature readings is < ±0.25%
FS. Computational, archival, communications, and control functions are not impaired.
Meets FCC Rules Part J, Subpart 15, Class A for radiated emissions.
Intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division 1,
Groups C & D hazardous location (in certain configurations - see Section 5.1 for model numbers)
(see Appendix B).
Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups
C & D hazardous locations (in certain configurations configurations - see Section 5.1 for model numbers) (see Appendix A).
4.4 CPU, MEMORY & PROGRAM INTERFACE
Processor:
Memory:
RAM Battery Backup:
80C188EB, 16-bit microprocessor operating at
8MHz.
- 256K bytes Flash PROM.
- 128K bytes of Battery Backed Static RAM.
Lithium battery (3.6 V) with 5000 hours cumulative backup.
4.5 COMMUNICATIONS
Communication Ports:
Signal:
Two asynchronous ports standard
RS-232 Levels
TeleFlow J Corrector Specifications / 4-3
Local Port:
Network Port:
Communication Rates:
Protocol:
For configuration, data collection, etc.
For Radio or Modem
Selectable from 1200 bps to 19.2 Kbps
Bristol Standard Asynchronous Protocol (BSAP) compatible with International Standard, ISO 1745,
2111 & 2629. Interface compatible for use with
Radio Modems or Phone-line Modems (Private Line or Switched Network types).
4.6 DISCRETE INPUTS
No. of Inputs:
Input Voltage Range:
2 DIs (one used with TeleCounter Assembly)
0 to 16 Vdc
Input Threshold:
Pullup Voltage:
Input Leakage:
Sink Current (to pull input low):
Allowable Source Leakage:
4.7 DISCRETE OUTPUTS
No. of Outputs:
Switched Voltage Range:
Load:
Off-state Leakage:
On-state Resistance (to ground):
4.8 PULSE INPUT
Voltage Range:
Minimum Frequency:
Maximum Frequency:
4-4 / Using TMS
High = 3.6V (Min)
Low = 0.98V (Max)
4.8V (Nominal) at terminal (with input open)
15uA (Max)
100uA (Min)
7uA (Max)
2 DOs
0 to 16 Vdc (Transorb Clamped)
100 mA Max.
8uA (Typical), 100uA (Max)
0.29 Ohms (Typical), 0.50 Ohms (Max)
0 to 16V
DC
5KHz (Max.) (0-5V Square Wave)
TeleFlow J Corrector
Minimum Pulse Width:
Input Threshold (Low)
Input Threshold (High)
200 Hz (Open Collector or Dry Contact)
3 Hz (From TeleCounter)
100uS
1.95V (Typical), 1.50V (Minimum)
2.95V (Typical), 3.50V (Maximum)
4.9 ANALOG INPUT
Input Range
Load Resistance
Configuration
4.11 POWER
0 to 16 Vdc
155K Ohms
Resolution .5mV
Uncalibrated Error at 25
Temperature Effect
E C <.5% FS (Typical)
<.25% FS (per 100 E F)
4.10
RTD INPUT
Type 100-Ohm Platinum Bulb (DIN 43760 Curve)
3-Wire
Operating Voltage
Ripple Voltage Tolerance
( # 60Hz)
Operating Current
Min. = +5.4 Vdc (Max. = +16 Vdc)
Max. = 100 mVpp
Noise Voltage Tolerance
Connector Type
(J7, J8 & J10)
Wire Size
Fuse Type & Rating
Typ. = 81mA Communication Mode (Max. = 90mA)
Typ. = 63mA Calculation Mode (Max. = 68mA)
Typ. = 0.9mA Sleep Mode (Max. = 1.6mA)
Max. = 100 mVpp
Pluggable MSTB (or equivalent)
Max. = 14AWG
350mA (Schurter 3402.0043)
TeleFlow J Corrector Specifications / 4-5
4.12 AUXILIARY POWER
Output Voltage Equals [Vin - (Iload) x Ron)] where:
Vin = Power at the PWR Connector
Iload = Load Current
Ron = On Resistance
1.8A Continuous (2.5A Momentary)
Typ. = 0.37 Ohms (Max. = 0.5 Ohms)
Max. Load Current
On Resistance
4.13 BACKUP BATTERY
Type
Capacity
Voltage
Discharge Current (Backup)
Tadiran TL-5134 (Lithium Thionyl Chloride)
1 Ah
3.6Vdc (Nominal)
Max. = 60uA
4-6 / Using TMS TeleFlow J Corrector
TeleFlow Corrector
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1. A version of the TeleFlow Corrector is available which is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Group C and D hazardous locations or nonhazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive TeleFlow
Corrector. Refer to the TeleFlow Corrector User’s Manual for general information. In the event of a conflict between the TeleFlow Corrector User’s Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2. The TeleFlow Corrector includes both nonincendive and unrated field circuits. Unless a circuit is specifically identified in this document as nonincendive, the circuit is unrated. Unrated circuits must be wired using Division 2 wiring methods as specified in article 501-4(b) of the National Electrical
Code, NFPA 70 for installation within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the
Canadian Electrical Code for installation in Canada.
3. The local communications port terminates in a circular connector on the bottom of the TeleFlow
Corrector enclosure. The wiring on this connector is unrated. No connections may be made to this port unless the user ensures that the area is known to be nonhazardous. Connections to this port must be temporary and short in duration to ensure that flammable concentrations do not accumulate while it is in use.
4. Optional power systems (solar panels and battery packs) are approved for use with the nonincendive
TeleFlow Corrector as described in the Model Specification. The connection to these solar panels is approved as a nonincendive circuit, so that Division 2 wiring methods are not required. The nominal panel voltage must match the nominal battery voltage (6V or 12V).
5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect the Solar PWR, PWR1, PWR2 or
AUX PWR terminals unless the area is known to be nonhazardous.
6. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.
7. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - The area must be known to be nonhazardous before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.
8.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless power has been disconnected and the area is known to be nonhazardous.
9. An RTD is normally supplied with the TeleFlow Corrector. Connection to the RTD is approved as a nonincendive circuit, so that Division 2 wiring methods are not required.
10. The signals available for customer wiring are available in Table A1.
11. The UL listed nonincendive TeleFlow Corrector includes radio communications (MDS
Model 2310, 4310, 4710, 9710 or 9810) or (FreeWave Spread Spectrum Radio) which is used in conjunction with a 5W, 12V Solar Panel System. Installation of a BBI modem in the TeleFlow Corrector housing is approved. Connection to the radio or modem is approved as a nonincendive circuit, so that Division 2 wiring methods are not required.
Table A1 - CPU Board Customer Wiring Signal Names
Signal Name
SOLAR PWR
PWR 1 & 2
AUX POWER
DIN 0 & 1
Signal Description
Solar Panel inputs; 5W, 6V or 12V. Refer to ¶ 4 of this document.
Power supply inputs; maximum 16VDC. Refer to ¶ 5 of this document.
Power output to Radio or Modem; maximum 16VDC. Refer to ¶ 5 of this document.
Discrete inputs; maximum 16VDC. Use Division 2 wiring methods.
11/21/2000 Appendix A, Document CI3530-50B Page 1 of 2
TeleFlow Corrector
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
Table A1 - CPU Board Customer Wiring Signal Names (Continued)
Signal Name
DOUT 0 & 1
LRXD, LTXD,
& WAKEUP
Signal Description
Discrete outputs; maximum 16VDC, 100mA. Use Division 2 wiring methods.
Local communications port; factory wired, maximum input or output is
±16VDC. Refer to ¶ 3 of this document.
Note: When WAKEUP is used with an optional radio refer to ¶ 11 of this document.
RDCD, RDTR,
RCTS, RRTS,
RRXD, RTXD
Pulse
RTD-, RTD+,
RTD EXC
Remote communications port (for radio or modem). Refer to 3530-50B Model
Spec. and ¶ 11 of this document.
Pulse input; maximum 16VDC. Use Division 2 wiring methods.
RTD inputs and excitation; refer to ¶ 9 of this document.
AI EXC & AI
Analog input and excitation; maximum 16VDC. Use Division 2 wiring methods.
Note: When AI is used with an optional radio Refer to ¶ 11 of this document.
11/21/2000 Appendix A, Document CI3530-50B Page 2 of 2
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
1.
A version of the TeleFlow J is available which is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Group C and D hazardous locations. Read this document carefully before installing an intrinsically safe TeleFlow. Refer to the
TeleFlow User's Manual for general information. In the event of a conflict between the
TeleFlow User's Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2.
The TeleFlow includes both intrinsically safe and unrated field circuits. Unless a circuit is specifically identified in this document as intrinsically safe, it may not be wired.
3.
The local communications port terminates in a circular connector on the bottom of the
TeleFlow enclosure. The wiring on this connector is unrated. WARNING: No connections may be made to this communications port unless the user ensures that the area is known to be nonhazardous.
4.
Optional power systems (solar panels and battery packs) are approved for use with the intrinsically safe TeleFlow as described in the Model specification. The solar panel can be mounted remotely, with the cable length not to exceed 25 feet. Connections to these components are approved as intrinsically safe circuits. Do not substitute any other battery, solar panel, or other power source. When an externally powered TeleFlow is used in a
Division 1 location, it must be used in conjunction with a BBI IStran Communication
Interface and installed per instruction manual CI-3530-IStran.
5.
An RTD is typically supplied with the TeleFlow. Connection to the BBI-supplied RTD is approved as an intrinsically safe circuit. BBI part numbers for the RTD are 39545X-YY-Z
(with 6' cable & fixed RTD) and 39514X-YY-Z (with 15' cable & Fixed RTD), where X represents the digits 5-8, YY represents 01-11, and Z represents 0-9, and 392610-XX-Y (with bendable RTD), where XX represents the digits 01-03 and Y represents 5-9 . These part numbers all designate the same basic associated assembly, with the different combinations representing whether an optional connection head is included, whether a thermowell is included, and the lengths of the RTD probe and thermowell. The RTD cable length is not to exceed 50 feet.
6.
WARNING: Installation of a radio or modem in the intrinsically safe TeleFlow housing is not permitted. Connection to the network communications port on the CPU Board is only permitted via a Model 3530-IStran, which is located in a Nonhazardous/Division 2 area (see Figures B5 through B12 and CI-3530-IStran).
7.
WARNING: Substitution of components may impair intrinsic safety.
8.
Illustrations of the approved internal battery systems are provided in Figures B1 and B2.
9.
Figures B3 through B14 show approved connections to the intrinsically safe TeleFlow.
10. See Appendix B of PIP-EXP232TF when making connections to a RS-232 Expansion Board in a Class I, Division 1 location.
12/05/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 1 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
12/05/03
Figure B1 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow with 6V Lead Acid Battery System
Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 2 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B2 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow With 6V Single Lithium Battery System
12/05/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 3 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
12/05/03
Figure B3 - Approved Power & RTD Connections
Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 4 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B4 - Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow Discrete Input Wiring Diagram
Figure B5 - Modem System with Independent Power Supply
12/05/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 5 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B6 - Modem System with Single Power Source
12/05/03
Figure B7 - Radio with Independent Power Source
Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 6 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B8 - Radio with Single Power Source
12/05/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 7 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
12/05/03
Figure B9 - Multidrop Radio System (Featuring MDS Radio)
(TeleFlows not situated in a Division 1 - Intrinsically Safe Area)
Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 8 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
12/05/03
Figure B10 - Multidrop Radio System (Featuring FreeWave Radio)
(TeleFlows not situated in a Division 1 - Intrinsically Safe Area)
Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 9 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
12/05/03
Figure B11 - Multidrop Modem System
(TeleFlows not situated in a Division 1 - Intrinsically Safe Area)
Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 10 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B12 - TeleFlow with External Power Source
12/05/03
Figure B13A - Model 2808-IXX Connected to an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow
(IStran powers TeleFlow (via J8) - TeleFlow Connector J6 powers 2808-IXX
Analog Input Wiring Diagram 1
Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 11 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B13B - Intrinsically Safe Model 2808-IXX
Connected to an Intrinsically Safe TeleFlow
IStran powers TeleFlow (via J8) and 2808-IXX
Analog Input Wiring Diagram 2
12/05/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 12 of 13
TeleFlow
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B14 - Wiring Diagram
Intrinsically Safe Discrete I/O & Pulse Input Signals via IStran #1
Intrinsically Safe RS-232 Signals via IStran #2
12/05/03 Appendix B, Document CI3530-50B Page 13 of 13
BLANK PAGE
Appendix C
COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL SUPPORT
C.1 GENERAL
BSAP is Bristol Babcock’s Synchronous Asynchronous Protocol for network communications.
The TeleFlow Corrector acts as a slave to a Bristol Babcock host device and must be polled.
C.2 BSAP COMMUNICATION LISTS
The lists identified in Table C-1 are provided for data gathering by Bristol Babcock nodes connected to the TeleFlow network port. When configuring the Master Module in the host device’s ACCOL load, enter the desired list number (from the left column of Table C-1) on the
Master Module’s POINT terminal.
18
20
21
22
50
51
52
53
60
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
List # List Name
Configuration Template
AGA7 Calculated Data List - w/AGA8
Configuration List #1
Configuration List #2
Control List
AGA 8 Gross Method List
AGA 8 Detail Method List
AGA7 Calculated Data List - w/NX19
Communication Configuration List
Live Data List
Rate Volume List
Input List
LCD Display List
Poll List 1 (User Configurable)
Poll List 2 (User Configurable)
Poll List 3 (User Configurable)
Event List (User Configurable)
Table C-1 - TeleFlow Point List Names
The point lists available in the TeleFlow
-
Corrector Firmware are provided on the pages that follow.
Underlined entries are new and appear for the first time in Firmware Version 1.6.
TeleFlow
-
Corrector Page C-1
Signal Description
TeleFlow Version
Unit ID
Meter ID
Meter Number
Alarm Rep Format
Alarm Rep Format
Display Alarms
Flow Equations
Pressure Base
Temperature Base
Meter Factor - K
Calib. Factor - M
AGA 8 Method
Gross Method
Contract Hour
Low Flow Cutoff
Press Full Scale
Press Low Scale
Temp High Scale
Temp Low Scale
Rate Lo-Lo Limit
Rate Lo Limit
Rate Hi Limit
Rate Hi-Hi Limit
Rate Hi Deadband
Rate Lo Deadband
AFR Lo-Lo Limit
AFR Lo Limit
AFR Hi Limit
AFR Hi-Hi Limit
AFR Hi Deadband
AFR Lo Deadband
VOL Lo-Lo Limit
VOL Lo Limit
VOL Hi Limit
VOL Hi-Hi Limit
VOL Hi Deadband
VOL Lo Deadband
Pres Lo-Lo Limit
Pres Lo Limit
List #10 - Configuration List
Default
Value
Signal Name
N.NN
9999
Unnamed Meter
0.0
Short
Normal
Off
1992
14.73 Psia
60.0 Deg. F
100.0 PPCF
1.0
GROSS
GCN
7.0
15.0 Secs
2000.0 Psig
0.0 Psig
300.0 Deg. F
0.0 Deg. F
0 MSCFH
0 MSCFH
3000 MSCFH
5000 MSCFH
50 MSCFH
50 MSCFH
0.0 ACFH
0.0 ACFH
3000.0 ACFH
5000.0 ACFH
50.0 ACFH
50.0 ACFH
-99999.0 MSCF
-99999.0 MSCF
999999.0 MSCF
999999.0 MSCF
50.0 MSCF
50.0 MSCF
0.0 Psig
100 Psig
PROGREV..
UNITID..CFG
METERID..CFG
METERNUM..CFG
#ALARM.FORMAT
#ALARM.FORMAT.001
ALRMDISP.ENA.CFG
FLOWEQN.SELECT.CFG
PRESBASE..CFG
TEMPBASE..CFG
KFACT..CFG
MFACT..CFG
AGA8MTH..CFG
GROSSMTH..CFG
CONTRACT.HOUR.CFG
LFLOW.LIMIT.CFG
SPFULL.FSCALE.CFG
SPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG
TEMPFULL.FSCALE.CFG
TEMPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG
RATELOLO..LLAL
RATELO..LAL
RATEHI..HAL
RATEHIHI..HHAL
RATEHIDB..HIDB
RATELODB..LODB
AFRLOLO..LLAL
AFRLO..LAL
AFRHI..HAL
AFRHIHI..HHAL
AFRHIDB..HIDB
AFRLODB..LODB
VOLLOLO..LLAL
VOLLO..LAL
VOLHI..HAL
VOLHIHI..HHAL
VOLHIDB..HIDB
VOLLODB..LODB
SPLOLO..LLAL
SPLO..LAL
Page C-2 TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Signal Description
List #10 - Configuration List (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
Pres Hi Limit
Pres Hi-Hi Limit
Pres Hi Deadband
Pres Lo Deadband
Temp Lo-Lo Limit
Temp Lo Limit
Temp Hi Limit
Temp Hi-Hi Limit
Temp Hi Deadband
Temp Lo Deadband
Batt Lo-Lo Limit
Batt Lo Limit
Batt Hi Limit
Batt Hi-Hi Limit
Batt Hi Deadband
Batt Lo Deadband
Atmospheric Pres
Heating Value
Heat Value Src
Specific Gravity
Gravity type is:
Methane Content
Nitrogen Content
CO2 Content
Ethane Content
Propane Content
H2O Content
H2S Content
Hydrogen Content
CO Content
Oxygen Content
I-Butane Content
N-Butane Content
I-Pentan Content
N-Pentan Content
Hexane Content
Heptane Content
Octane Content
Nonane Content
Decane Content
Helium Content
1500 Psig
2000 Psig
50 Psig
10 Psig
32.0 Deg. F
50.0 Deg. F
150.0 Deg. F
250.0 Deg. F
10.0 Deg. F
3.0 Deg. F
5.5 Volts
6.0 Volts
14.0 Volts
16.0 Volts
0.5 Volts
0.5 Volts
14.73 Psia
1000.0 BTU/CF
Fixed
0.6
Real
89.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
8.0 Mole %
3.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
SPHI..HAL
SPHIHI..HHAL
SPHIDB..HIDB
SPLODB..LODB
TEMPLOLO..LLAL
TEMPLO..LAL
TEMPHI..HAL
TEMPHIHI..HHAL
TEMPHIDB..HIDB
TEMPLODB..LODB
BATTLOLO..LLAL
BATTLO..LAL
BATTHI..HAL
BATTHIHI..HHAL
BATTHIDB..HIDB
BATTLODB..LODB
ATMOS..CFG
HTVAL.VAL.CFG
HVSRC..CFG
GRAVITY.VAL.CFG
GRAVTYP..CFG
CH4.CNTENT.CFG
N2.CNTENT.CFG
CO2.CNTENT.CFG
C2.CNTENT.CFG
C3.CNTENT.CFG
H2O.CNTENT.CFG
H2S.CNTENT.CFG
H2.CNTENT.CFG
CO.CNTENT.CFG
O2.CNTENT.CFG
IC4.CNTENT.CFG
NC4.CNTENT.CFG
IC5.CNTENT.CFG
NC5.CNTENT.CFG
C6.CNTENT.CFG
C7.CNTENT.CFG
C8.CNTENT.CFG
C9.CNTENT.CFG
C10.CNTENT.CFG
HE.CNTENT.CFG
TeleFlow
-
Corrector Page C-3
Signal Description
List #10 - Configuration List (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
Argon Content
Sampler Function
Sampler Volume
Pulse Width
Flow Rate Contrl
Valve Ctrl. Limit
Flow Setpoint
Flow Deadband
Ke - Prop Gain
Ti - Integral Tm
Td - Deriv Time
Maximum Flw Rate
Valve Travel Tim
Calc Interval
Logging Interval
Break Log on Chg
Logical Off
Trending Log
Netwrk Baud Rate
RTS delay Mode
RTS Txmit delay
Aux. Power Default
Radio Scheduling
Listen Duration
Comm. Timeout
Start Poll Hour
Stop Poll Hour
Local Comm Time
Local Timeout
Time per Node
Time per Group
Time Past Hour
Temperature Unit
K-Factor Units
Pressure Units
Energy Units
Unc. Volume Unit
Volume Units
Press Conversion
K-Factor Conversion
Volume Conversion
Energy Conversion
Hourly
Disabl
Off
Enable
9600 bps
Timer
0 msec
Off
Disabl
120.0 Secs
20.0 Secs
0.0
24.0
120.0 Secs
20.0 Secs
26.0 Secs
5.0 Secs
0.0 Mole %
Disabl
100.0 MSCF
1.0 Secs
Disabl
Disabl
0.0 MSCFH
1.0 % stpt
1.0
2.0 Secs
0.0 Secs
5000 MSCFH
30 Secs
60 Secs
60.0 Secs
Deg. F
PPCF
0.0 (0-7)
0.0 (0-4)
0.0 (0-5)
2.0 (0-5)
1.0 (to psi)
1.0 (to UV)
0.001 (to CV)
1.0 (to ENG)
AR.CNTENT.CFG
SAMPLER.ENA.CFG
SAMPVOL..CFG
SAMPDUR..CFG
FLWCNTL.ENA.CFG
CTLLIMIT.ENA.CFG
SETPNT..CFG
DEADBND..CFG
GAIN..CFG
INTEGRAL..CFG
DERIV..CFG
MAXRATE..CFG
VALVE.TIME.CFG
CALCINT..CFG
LOGINT..CFG
LOGBRK.ENA.CFG
LOFF.. **
TREND.ENA.CFG
NETBAUD..CFG
RTSMODE..CFG
RTSDEL..CFG
RADIO.POWER.DFLT
SCHED.ENBL
RADIO.TIME.SP
RADIO.TIMOUT.SP
RADIO.START.HOUR
RADIO.END.HOUR
LOCAL.TIME.SP
LOCAL.TIMOUT.SP
NODE.POLL.TIME
GROUP.POLL.TIME
OFFSET.POLL.TIME
TEMPUNIT.SELECT.CFG
KUNIT.SELECT.CFG
PRESUNIT.SELECT.CFG
ENGYUNIT.SELECT.CFG
AVOLUNIT.SELECT.CFG
VOLUNIT.SELECT.CFG
PRESCNVT.FACTOR..
KCNVT.FACTOR..
VOLCNVT.FACTOR..
ENGYCNVT.FACTOR..
Page C-4 TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Signal Description
List #10 - Configuration List (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
Heat value Conv.
Nomination Function
Nomination Units
Nomination Mode
Stop Mode
Daily Nomination
Dial On Nom Alarm
Alarm Percentage
Next Start Date
Next Start Hour
Next Stop Date
Next Stop Hour
1.0 (to BTU)
Disabl
MCF
Fast
Open
Off
Disabl
100.0 %
0.0
7.0
0.0
7.0
HVCNVT.FACTOR..
NOMIN.ENA.CFG
NOMUNIT.SELECT.CFG
NOMMODE.SELECT.CFG
NOMSTOP.SELECT.CFG
NOMDAILY.SELECT.CFG
NOMALM.DIAL.ENBL
CURRENT.ALARM.PCT
NEXT.START.DATE
NEXT.START.HOUR
NEXT.STOP.DATE
NEXT.STOP.HOUR
Uncorrected Rate
Flow Rate
Flowing Pressure
Flowing Temp
Pressure Base
Temperature Base
Zb (@Pb, Tb)
Zf (@Pf, Tf)
Specific Gravity
Heating Value
Atmospheric Pres
Pressure Base
Temperature Base
Low Flow Cutoff
TeleFlow Version
Meter Number
Flow Equations
Calc Interval
Contract Hour
Logging Interval
List #11 - AGA7 Calculated Data List - w/AGA8
0.0 ACFH
0.0 MSCFH
0.0 Psig
0.0 Deg. F
14.73 Psia
60.0 Deg. F
1.0
1.0
UNCRATE..CALC
FLOWRATE..CALC
STATPRES.VAL.INP
FTEMP.VAL.INP
PRESBASE..CFG
TEMPBASE..CFG
ZB.FACTOR.CALC
ZF.FACTOR.CALC
List #12 - Configuration Data List #1
0.6
1000.0 BTU/CF
14.73 Psia
14.73 Psia
60.0 Deg. F
15.0 Secs
GRAVITY.VAL.CFG
HTVAL.VAL.CFG
ATMOS..CFG
PRESBASE..CFG
TEMPBASE..CFG
LFLOW.LIMIT.CFG
List #13 - Configuration Data List #2
0.0
0.0
1992
60 Secs
7
Hourly
PROGREV..
METERNUM..CFG
FLOWEQN.SELECT.CFG
CALCINT..CFG
CONTRACT.HOUR.CFG
LOGINT..CFG
TeleFlow
-
Corrector Page C-5
List #13 - Configuration Data List #2 (Continued)
Signal Description Default
Value
Signal Name
Break Log on Chg
Logical Off
Heat Value Src
Gravity type is:
AGA 8 Method
Gross Method
Disabl
Off
Fixed
Real
GROSS
GCN
LOGBRK.ENA.CFG
LOFF.. **
HVSRC..CFG
GRAVTYP..CFG
AGA8MTH..CFG
GROSSMTH..CFG
Sampler Function
Sampler Volume
Pulse Width
Flow Rate Contrl
Valve Ctrl. Limit
Flow Setpoint
Flow Deadband
Ke - Prop Gain
Ti - Integral Tm
Td - Deriv Time
Valve Travel Tim
Maximum Flw Rate
Nomination Function
Nomination Units
Nomination Mode
Stop Mode
Daily Nomination
Dial On Nom Alarm
Alarm Percentage
Next Start Date
Next Start Hour
Next Stop Date
Next Stop Hour
Specific Gravity
Heating Value
CO2 Content
Nitrogen Content
Gross Method
Gravity type is:
List #14 - Control List
MCF
Fast
Open
Off
Disabl
100.0 %
0.0
7.0
0.0
7.0
Disabl
100.0 MSCF
1.0 Secs
Disabl
Disabl
0 MSCFH
1.0 % stpt
1.0
2.0 Secs
0.0 Secs
30 Secs
5000 MSCFH
Disabl
SAMPLER.ENA.CFG
SAMPVOL..CFG
SAMPDUR..CFG
FLWCNTL.ENA.CFG
CTLLIMIT.ENA.CFG
SETPNT..CFG
DEADBND..CFG
GAIN..CFG
INTEGRAL..CFG
DERIV..CFG
VALVE.TIME.CFG
MAXRATE..CFG
NOMIN.ENA.CFG
NOMUNIT.SELECT.CFG
NOMMODE.SELECT.CFG
NOMSTOP.SELECT.CFG
NOMDAILY.SELECT.CFG
NOMALM.DIAL.ENBL
CURRENT.ALARM.PCT
NEXT.START.DATE
NEXT.START.HOUR
NEXT.STOP.DATE
NEXT.STOP.HOUR
List #15 - AGA 8 Gross Method
0.6
1000.0 BTU/CF
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
GCN
Real
GRAVITY.VAL.CFG
HTVAL.VAL.CFG
CO2.CNTENT.CFG
N2.CNTENT.CFG
GROSSMTH..CFG
GRAVTYP..CFG
Page C-6 TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Signal Description
Methane Content
Nitrogen Content
CO2 Content
Ethane Content
Propane Content
H2O Content
H2S Content
Hydrogen Content
CO Content
Oxygen Content
I-Butane Content
N-Butane Content
I-Pentan Content
N-Pentan Content
Hexane Content
Heptane Content
Octane Content
Nonane Content
Decane Content
Helium Content
Argon Content
Uncorrected Rate
Flow Rate
Flowing Pressure
Flowing Temp.
Pressure Base
Temperature Base
Fpv Fctor (NX19)
Netwrk Baud Rate
RTS Delay Mode
RTS Txmit Delay
Aux. Pwr Default
Radio Scheduling
Listen Duration
Comm Timeout
List #16 - AGA 8 Detail Method
Default
Value
Signal Name
89.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
8.0 Mole %
3.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
CH4.CNTENT.CFG
N2.CNTENT.CFG
CO2.CNTENT.CFG
C2.CNTENT.CFG
C3.CNTENT.CFG
H2O.CNTENT.CFG
H2S.CNTENT.CFG
H2.CNTENT.CFG
CO.CNTENT.CFG
O2.CNTENT.CFG
IC4.CNTENT.CFG
NC4.CNTENT.CFG
IC5.CNTENT.CFG
NC5.CNTENT.CFG
C6.CNTENT.CFG
C7.CNTENT.CFG
C8.CNTENT.CFG
C9.CNTENT.CFG
C10.CNTENT.CFG
HE.CNTENT.CFG
AR.CNTENT.CFG
List #17 - AGA7 Calculated Data List - w/NX19
0.0 ACFH
0.0 MSCFH
0.0 Psig
0.0 Deg. F
14.73 Psig
60.0 Deg. F
1.0
UNCRATE..CALC
FLOWRATE..CALC
STATPRES.VAL.INP
FTEMP.VAL.INP
PRESBASE..CFG
TEMPBASE..CFG
FPV.FACTOR.CALC
List #18 - Communications Configuration List
9600 bps
Timer
0 msec
Off
Disabl
120.0 Secs
20.0 Secs
NETBAUD..CFG
RTSMODE..CFG
RTSDEL..CFG
RADIO.POWER.DFLT
RADIO.SCHED.ENBL
RADIO.TIME.SP
RADIO.TIMOUT.SP
TeleFlow
-
Corrector Page C-7
List #18 - Communications Configuration List (Continued)
Signal Description Default
Value
Signal Name
Start Poll Hour
Stop Poll Hour
Local Comm Time
Local Timeout
Time per Node
Time per Group
Time Past Hour
Demand Polling
Listen Interval
Radio On Time
Demand Poll Start
Demand Poll End
Alarm Dialout
Dial on Cutoff
Logical Off
Dial on Txmitter
Dial on RAM Batt
Dial on FP Error
Dial on Self-chk
Dial on AFR Alm
Dial on Pressure Alm
Dial on temp Alm
Dial on Rate Alm
Dial on Batt Alm
Dial on Aux Alm
Dial on Ovrchrg
Dial on Volume
Dial on Nom Alarm
Off
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
0.0
24.0
120.0 Secs
20.0 Secs
26.0 Secs
5.0 Secs
60.0 Secs
Disabl
1.0 Secs
300.0 msec
0.0
24.0
Disabl
Disabl
RADIO.START.HOUR
RADIO.END.HOUR
LOCAL.TIME.SP
LOCAL.TIMOUT.SP
NODE.POLL.TIME
GROUP.POLL.TIME
OFFSET.POLL.TIME
DEMAND.POLL.ENBL
DEMAND.INTVL.TIME
DEMAND.LISTEN.TIME
DEMAND.POLL.STRT
DEMAND.END.HOUR
DIAL.ENABLE..
CUTOFF.DIAL.ENBL
LOFF.. **
TXFAIL.DIAL.ENBL
BBATLOW.DIAL.ENBL
FPERRALM.DIAL.ENBL
SELFALM.DIAL.ENBL
AFRALM.DIAL.ENBL
SPALM.DIAL.ENBL
TEMPALM.DIAL.ENBL
RATEALM.DIAL.ENBL
BATTALM.DIAL.ENBL
AUXALM.DIAL.ENBL
CHRGALM.DIAL.ENBL
VOLALM.DIAL.ENBL
NOMALM.DIAL.ENBL
Uncorrected Rate
Live Static Pres
Live Temperature
Flow Rate
Operator Change
Uncorrected Rate
Flow Rate
List #20 - Live Data List
0.0 ACFH
0.0 Psig
0.0 Deg. F
0.0 MSCFH
Off
UNCRATE..CALC
STATPRES.VAL.LIVE
FTEMP.VAL.LIVE
FLOWRATE..CALC
CONFIG.CHANGE.
List #21 - Rate Volume List
0.0 ACFH
0.0 MSCFH
UNCRATE..CALC
FLOWRATE..CALC
Page C-8 TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Signal Description
List #21 - Rate Volume List (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
Energy Flow Rate
Daily Flow Rate
Flow Time Today
Analog Value
Today’s Volume
Today’s Unc. Vol.
Today’s Energy
Flow Time Yesday
Analog Value
Yesday’s Volume
Yesday’s Unc. Vol.
Yesday’s Energy
Monthly Volume
Monthly Energy
Volume Totalizer
Unc. Vol. Totalizer
Energy Totalizer
Monthly Unc Vol
Prev Month Vol
Prev Month Uvol
Prev Month Enrgy
0.0 MMBTUH
0.0 MSCFD
0.0 Mins
0.0
0.0 MSCF
0.0 ACF
0.0 MMBTU
0.0 Mins
0.0
0.0 MSCF
0.0 ACF
0.0 MMBTU
0.0 MSCF
0.0 MMBTU
0.0 MSCF
0.0 ACF
0.0 MMBTU
0.0 ACF
0.0 MSCF
0.0 ACF
0.0 MMBTU
ENGYRATE..CALC
DFLWRATE..CALC
FLWTMTDY.TODAY.CALC
AZERO.. **
VOLTDY.TODAY.CALC
UVOLTDY.TODAY.CALC
ENGYTDY.TODAY.CALC
FLWTMYDY.YESDAY.CALC
AZERO.. **
VOLYDY.YESDAY.CALC
UVOLYDY.YESDAY.CALC
ENGYYDY.YESDAY.CALC
VOLMON.MONTH.CALC
ENGYMON.MONTH.CALC
VOLTOT.ACCUM.CALC
UVOLTOT.ACCUM.CALC
ENGYTOT.ACCUM.CALC
UVOLMON.MONTH.CALC
LVOLMON.MONTH.CALC
LUVOLMON.MONTH.CALC
LENGYMON.MONTH.CALC
Pulse Frequency
Total Pulses
Flowing Pres
Flowing Temperature
System Power
Power Input #1
Power Input #2
Backup Battery
PC Board Temp.
Auxiliary Input
Discrete Out #1
Discrete Out #2
Discrete In #1
Discrete In #2
List #22 - Input List
0.0 Hz
0.0
0.0 Psig
0.0 Deg. F
0.0 Volts
0.0 Volts
0.0 Volts
0.0 Volts
0.0 Deg. F
0.0
Off
Off
Off
Off
FREQ..INP
PULSES..INP
STATPRES.VAL.INP
FTEMP.VAL.INP
BATTERY.VOLTS.INP
PWRSRC1..INP
PWRSRC2..INP
BBATVLT..INP
BRDTMP..INP
AUXINP..INP
DO1.STATE.OUT
DO2.STATE.OUT
DI1.STATE.IN
DI2.STATE.IN
TeleFlow
-
Corrector Page C-9
Signal Description
Meter ID
System Power
Flowing Pressure
Flowing Temp.
Uncorrected Rate
Flow Rate
Flow Time Today
Today’s Unc. Vol.
Today’s Volume
Yesday’s Volume
Yesday’s Unc. Vol.
Volume Totalizer
List #50 - LCD Display List
Default
Value
Signal Name
Unnamed Meter
0.0 Volts
0.0 Psig
0.0 Deg. F
0.0 ACFH
0.0 MSCFD
0.0 Mins
0.0 ACF
0.0 MSCF
0.0 MSCF
0.0 ACF
0.0 MSCF
METERID.CFG
BATTERY.VOLTS.INP
STATPRES.VAL.INP
FTEMP.VAL.INP
UNCRATE..CALC
FLOWRATE..CALC
FLWTMTDY.TODAY.CALC
UVOLTDY.TODAY.CALC
VOLTDY.TODAY.CALC
VOLYDY.YESDAY.CALC
UVOLYDY.YESDAY.CALC
VOLTOT.ACCUM.CALC
Page C-10 TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Alarm Rep Format
Alarm Rep Format
On Signal
Operation Mode
Fpv Equations
Heat Value Src
AGA 8 Method
Gross Method
Gravity type is:
Sampler Function
Unc. Sampler Out
Flow Rate Contrl
Valve Ctrl Limit
Logging Interval
Break Log on Chg
Trending Log
RTS delay Mode
Calibration Mode
Discrete In #1
Discrete Out #1
Discrete Out #2
Charge Regulator
Power System
Aux. Power Defualt
Radio Scheduling
Demand Polling
Radio Turnon
Radio Shutdown
Temperature Unit
K-Factor Units
Operator Change
Display Alarms
Alarm Dialout
Dial On Cutoff
Logiacl Off
Dial On Txmitter
Dial On RAM Batt
Dial On FP Error
Dial On Self-chk
C.3 MASTER SIGNAL DIRECTORY
Logical Signals
Signal Description Default
Value
Off
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Off
Deg. F
PPCF
Off
Disabl
Timer
Off
Off
Off
Off
Disabl
6 Volt
Off
Disabl
Disabl
Off
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Short
Normal
Off
Config
AGA8
Fixed
DETAIL
HV, G, C
Real
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
15 Min
Disabl
Signal Name
#ALARM.FORMAT.
#ALARM.FORMAT.001
#ON..
RUN.ENABLE.
FLOWEQN.SELECT.CFG
HVSRC..CFG
AGA8MTH..CFG
GROSSMTH..CFG
GRAVTYP..CFG
SAMPLER.ENA.CFG
USAMPLER.ENA.CFG
FLWCNTL.ENA.CFG
CTLLIMIT.ENA.CFG
LOGINT..CFG
LOGBRK.ENA.CFG
TREND.ENA.CFG
RTSMODE..CFG
CALIB.MODE.
DI1.STATE.IN
DO1.STATE.OUT
DO2.STATE.OUT
CHRGREG.ENA.CFG
PWRRNG.SELECT.CFG
RADIO.POWER.DFLT
RADIO.SCHED.ENBL
DEMAND.POLL.ENBL
RADIO.LOCAL.ENBL
RADIO.RESET.REQ
TEMPUNIT.SELECT.CFG
KUNIT.SELECT.CFG
CONFIG.CHANGE..
ALRMDISP.ENA.CFG
DIAL.ENABLE..
CUTOFF.DIAL.ENBL
LOFF.. **
TXFAIL.DIAL.ENBL
BBATLOW.DIAL.ENBL
FPERRALM.DIAL.ENBL
SELFALM.DIAL.ENBL
TeleFlow
-
Corrector Page C-11
Low Flow Cutoff
AGA 8 Calc Fail
Sensor Checksum
Transmitter Fail
Low Backup Batt.
FP Math Error
Self-Check Fail
Logical Off
Discrete In #2
Batt. Overcharge
Nom Alrm Reached
TeleCorr Version
Calc Interval
Meter Factor
Calib factor
Pressure Units
Energy Units
Unc. Volume Unit
Volume Units
Page C-12
Signal Description
Dial On AFR Alarm
Dial On Pres Alarm
Dial On Temp Alarm
Dial On Rate Alarm
Dial On Batt Alarm
Dial On Aux Alarm
Dial On Over Charge
Dial On Volume
Dial On Nom Alarm
Logiacl Off
Nomination
Nom in Progress
Nomination Units
Nomination Mode
Stop Mode
Daily Nomination
Time Sync Inhibit
NRT Inhibit
Logical Signals (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Disabl
Off
Disabl
Off
MCF
Fast
Open
Off
Off
Off
AFRALM.DIAL.ENBL
SPALM.DIAL.ENBL
TEMPALM.DIAL.ENBL
RATEALM.DIAL.ENBL
BATTALM.DIAL.ENBL
AUXALM.DIAL.ENBL
CHRGALM.DIAL.ENBL
VOLALM.DIAL.ENBL
NONALM.DIAL.ENBL
LOFF.. **
NOMIN.ENA.CFG
NOMPROG.ACTIVE.CALC
NOMUNIT.SELECT.CFG
NOMMODE.SELECT.CFG
NOMSTOP.SELECT.CFG
NOMDAILY.SELECT.CFG
TS.INH
NRT.INH
Logical Alarm Signals
Clear
Clear
OK
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Off
Off
Clear
Clear
LFCUTALM..
AGA8ERR..
COMPCHK.FAIL.
TXMITTER.FAIL.
BBAT.LOW.
FPERR..
SELFCHK.FAIL.
LOFF.. **.
DI2.STATE.IN
BATTERY.OVRCHG.
NOMALM..
Analog Signals
0.0
60 Secs
100.0 PPCF
1.0
0.0 (0-7)
0.0 (0-4)
0.0 (0-5)
2.0 (0-5)
PROGREV..
CALCINT..CFG
KFACT..CFG
MFACT..CFG
PRESUNIT.SELECT.CFG
ENGYUNIT.SELECT.CFG
AVOLUNIT.SELECT.CFG
VOLUNIT.SELECT.CFG
TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Signal Description
Press Conversion
K-Factor Conversion
Volume Conversion
Energy Conversion
Heat Value Conv.
Low Flow Cutoff
Specific Gravity
Heating Value
Atmospheric Pres
Pressure Base
Temperature Base
Live Static Pres
Live Temperature
Absolute Press
Absolute Temp
ZB (@Pb, Tb)
Zf (@Pf, Tf)
FpV Factor (NX19)
Daily Flow Rate
Energy Flow Rate
Flow Time
Current Volume
Current Unc. Vol.
Current Energy
Flow Time Today
Analog Value
Analog Value
Analog Value
Today’s Unc. Vol.
Today’s Energy
Flow Time Yesday
Yesday’s Volume
Yesday’s Unc. Vol.
Yesday’s Energy
Monthly Volume
Monthly Unc. Vol.
Monthly Energy
Volume Totalizer
Unc. Vol. Totalizer
Energy Totalizer
Methane Content
TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Analog Signals (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
1.0 (to psi)
1.0 (to UV)
0.001 (to CV)
1.0 (to ENG)
1.0 (to BTU)
15.0 Secs
0.6
1000.0 BTU/CF
14.73 Psia
14.73 Psia
60.0 Deg. F
0.0 Psig
0.0 Deg. F
0.0 Psia
0.0 Deg. R
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.0 MSCFD
0.0 MMBTUH
0.0 Mins
0.0 MSCF
0.0 ACF
0.0 MMBTU
0.0 Mins
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 ACF
0.0 MMBTU
0.0 Mins
0.0 MSCF
0.0 ACF
0.0 MMBTU
0.0 MSCF
0.0 ACF
0.0 MMBTU
0.0 MSCF
0.0 ACF
0.0 MMBTU
89.0 Mole %
PRESCNVT..FACTOR
KCNVT..FACTOR
VOLCNVT..FACTOR
ENGYCNVT..FACTOR
HVCNVT..FACTOR
LFLOW.LIMIT.CFG
GRAVITY.VAL.CFG
HTVAL.VAL.CFG
ATMOS..CFG
PRESBASE..CFG
TEMPBASE..CFG
STATPRES.VAL.LIVE
FTEMP.VAL.LIVE
ABSPRES..FLW
ABSTEMP..FLW
ZB.FACTOR.CALC
ZF.FACTORCALC
FPV.FACTOR.CALC
DFLWRATE..CALC
ENGYRATE..CALC
FLOWTIME.CURR.CALC
VOLUME.CURR.CALC
UVOLUME.CURR.CALC
ENERGY.CURR.CALC
FLWTMTDY.TODAY.CALC
AZERO.. **
AZERO.. **
AZERO.. **
UVOLTDY.TODAY.CALC
ENGYTDY.TODAY.CALC
FLWTMYDY.YESDAY.CALC
VOLYDY.YESDAY.CALC
UVOLYDY.YESDAY.CALC
ENGYYDY.YESDAY.CALC
VOLMON.MONTH.CALC
UVOLMON.MONTH.CALC
ENGYMON.MONTH.CALC
VOLTOT.ACCUM.CALC
UVOLTOT.ACCUM.CALC
ENGYTOT.ACCUM.CALC
CH4.CNTENT.CFG
Page C-13
Signal Description
Nitrogen Content
CO2 Content
Ethane Content
Propane Content
H2O Content
H2S Content
Hydrogen Content
CO Content
Oxygen Content
I-Butane Content
N-Butane Content
I-Pentan Content
N-Pentan Content
Hexane Content
Heptane Content
Octane Content
Nonane Content
Decane Content
Helium Content
Argon Content
B-2nd Virial
C-3rd Virial
Flow Setpoint
Flow Deadband
Ke - Prop Gain
Ti - Integral Tm
Td - Deriv Time
Maximum Flw Rate
Valve Travel Tim
Sampler Unc. Vol.
Unc. Pulse Width
Sampler Volume
Pulse Width
Contract Hour
Local Baud Rate
Netwrk Baud Rate
RTS Txmit delay
Power Input #1
Power Input #2
Backup Battery
PC Board Temp
Page C-14
Analog Signals (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
8.0 Mole %
3.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0 Mole %
0.0
0.0
0.0 MSCFH
1.0 % stpt
1.0
2.0 Secs
0.0 Secs
5000 MSCFH
30 Secs
1000 ACF
1.0 Secs
100.0 MSCF
1.0 Secs
7.0
19200 bps
9600 bps
0.0 msec
0.0 Volts
0.0 Volts
0.0 Volts
0.0 Deg. F
N2.CNTENT.CFG
CO2.CNTENT.CFG
C2.CNTENT.CFG
C3.CNTENT.CFG
H2O.CNTENT.CFG
H2S.CNTENT.CFG
H2.CNTENT.CFG
CO.CNTENT.CFG
O2.CNTENT.CFG
IC4.CNTENT.CFG
NC4.CNTENT.CFG
IC5.CNTENT.CFG
NC5.CNTENT.CFG
C6.CNTENT.CFG
C7.CNTENT.CFG
C8.CNTENT.CFG
C9.CNTENT.CFG
C10.CNTENT.CFG
HE.CNTENT.CFG
AR.CNTENT.CFG
AGA8B.COEFF.CALC
AGA8C.COEFF.CALC
SETPNT..CFG
DEADBND..CFG
GAIN..CFG
INTEGRAL..CFG
DERIV..CFG
MAXRATE..CFG
VALVE.TIME.CFG
SAMPUVOL..CFG
USAMPDUR..CFG
SAMPVOL..CFG
SAMPDUR..CFG
CONTRACT.HOUR.CFG
LOCBAUD..CFG
NETBAUD..CFG
RTSDEL..CFG
PWRSRC1..INP
PWRSRC2..INP
BBATVLT..INP
BRDTMP..INP
TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Signal Description
Aux Analog Zero
Aux Analog Full
Aux Hi-Hi Limit
Aux Hi Limit
Aux Lo Limit
Aux L0-L0 Limit
Aux High Deadband
Aux Low Deadband
Press Low Scale
Press Full Scale
Pres Hi-Hi Limit
Pres Hi Limit
Pres Lo Limit
Pres Lo-Lo Limit
Pres Hi Deadband
Pres Lo Deadband
Temp Low Scale
Temp High Scale
Temp Hi-Hi Limit
Temp Hi Limit
Temp Lo Limit
Temp Lo-Lo Limit
Temp Hi Deadband
Temp Lo Deadband
Rate Hi-Hi Limit
Rate Hi Limit
Rate Lo Limit
Rate Lo-Lo Limit
Rate Hi Deadband
Rate Lo Deadband
AFR Hi-Hi Limit
AFR Hi Limit
AFR Lo Limit
AFR Lo-Lo Limit
AFR Hi Deadband
AFR Lo Deadband
VOL Hi-Hi Limit
VOL Hi Limit
VOL Lo Limit
VOL Lo-Lo Limit
VOL Hi Deadband
TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Analog Signals (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
0.0
100.0
150.0
100.0
10.0
0.0
10.0
3.0
0.0 Psig
2000.0 Psig
2000 Psig
1500 Psig
100 Psig
0.0 Psig
50 Psig
10 Psig
0.0 Deg. F
300.0 Deg. F
250.0 Deg. F
150.0 Deg. F
50.0 Deg. F
32.0 Deg. F
10.0 Deg. F
3.0 Deg. F
5000.0 MSCFH
3000.0 MSCFH
0.0 MSCFH
0.0 MSCFH
50.0 MSCFH
50.0 MSCFH
5000.0 ACFH
3000.0 ACFH
0.0 ACFH
0.0 ACFH
50.0 ACFH
50.0 ACFH
999999.0 MSCF
999999.0 MSCF
-99999.0 MSCF
-99999.0 MSCF
50.0 MSCF
FIZERO.ZSCALE.CFG
FIFULL.HSCALE.CFG
FIHIHI..HHAL
FIHI..HAL
FILO..LAL
FILOLO..LLAL
FIHIDB..HIDB
FILODB..LODB
SPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG
SPFULL.FSCALE.CFG
SPHIHI..HHAL
SPHI..HAL
SPLO..LAL
SPLOLO..LLAL
SPHIDB..HIDB
SPLODB..LODB
TEMPZERO.ZSCALE.CFG
TEMPFULL.FSCALE.CFG
TEMPHIHI..HHAL
TEMPHI..HAL
TEMPLO..LAL
TEMPLOLO..LLAL
TEMPHIDB..HIDB
TEMPLODB..LODB
RATEHIHI..HHAL
RATEHI..HAL
RATELO..LAL
RATELOLO..LLAL
RATEHIDB..HIDB
RATELODB..LODB
AFRHIHI..HHAL
AFRHI..HAL
AFRLO..LAL
AFRLOLO..LLAL
AFRHIDB..HIDB
AFRLODB..LODB
VOLHIHI..HHAL
VOLHI..HAL
VOLLO..LAL
VOLLOLO..LLAL
VOLHIDB..HIDB
Page C-15
Signal Description
VOL Lo Deadband
Batt Hi-Hi Limit
Batt Hi Limit
Batt Lo Limit
Batt Lo-Lo Limit
Batt Hi Deadband
Batt Lo Deadband
Total Pulses
Pulse Frequency
Signon Flag
Meter Number
Reg. Active Time
Reg. Limit @ 77 F
Temp. Coefficient
Radio ON Minute
Radio ON Second
Listen Duration
Comm Timeout
Start Poll Hour
Stop Poll Hour
Local Comm Time
Local Timeout
Time per Node
Time per Group
Time Past Hour
Listen Interval
Radio on Time
Demand Poll Strt
Demand Poll End
Maximum Dialouts
Last start date
Last start hour
Last stop date
Last stop hour
Last Target Amt
Amount Delivered
Percent Delivered
Nom start date
Nom start hour
Nom stop date
Nom stop hour
Page C-16
Analog Signals (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 Mins
0.0 Mins
120.0 Secs
20.0 Secs
0.0 Secs
24.0 Secs
120.0 Secs
20.0 Secs
26.0 Secs
5.0 Secs
60.0 Secs
1.0 Secs
300.0 msec
0.0
24.0
2.0 /hour
0.0
50.0 MSCF
16.0 Volts
14.0 Volts
6.0 Volts
5.5 Volts
0.5 Volts
0.5 Volts
0.0
0.0 Hz
0.0
0.0
30.0 Secs
14.4 Volts
20.0 mv/Deg.
VOLLODB..LODB
BATTHIHI..HHAL
BATTHI..HAL
BATTLO..LAL
BATTLOLO..LLAL
BATTHIDB..HIDB
BATTLODB..LODB
PULSES..INP
FREQ..INP
SIGNON..
METERNUM..CFG
REGDLAY..CFG
REGVOLT..CFG
TEMPCOEF..CFG
HOUR.MIN.CFG
HOUR.SEC.CFG
RADIO.TIME.SP
RADIO.TIMOUT.SP
RADIO.START.HOUR
RADIO.END.HOUR
LOCAL.TIME.SP
LOCAL.TIMOUT.SP
NODE.POLL.TIME
GROUP.POLL.TIME
OFFSET.POLL.TIME
DEMAND.INTVL.TIME
DEMAND.LISTEN.TIME
DEMAND.START.HOUR
DEMAND.END.HOUR
MAXDIAL.PER.HOUR
LAST.START.DATE
LAST.START.HOUR
LAST.STOP.DATE
LAST.STOP.HOUR
LAST.TARGET..
LAST.ACTUAL..
LAST.NOMIN.PCT
CURRENT.START.DATE
CURRENT.START.HOUR
CURRENT.STOP.DATE
CURRENT.STOP.HOUR
TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Signal Description
Target Amount
Amount Delivered
Percent Delivered
Alarm Percentage
Percent Elapsed
Next start date
Next start hour
Next stop date
Next stop hour
Next Target Amt
Uncorrected Rate
Flowing Pressure
Flowing Temp
Flow Rate
System Power
Auxiliary Input
Today’s Volume
Load Date
Unit ID
Meter ID
System Password
Password #2
Password #3
Password #4
Password #5
Password #6
Password #7
Password #8
Password #9
Password #10
Password #11
Password #12
Password #13
Password #14
Password #15
TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Analog Signals (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
7.0
0.0
7.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 %
100.0 %
0.0 %
0.0
CURRENT.TARGET..
CURRENT.ACTUAL..
CURRENT.NOMIN.PCT
CURRENT.ALARM.PCT
CURRENT.TIME.PCT
NEXT.START.DATE
NEXT.START.HOUR
NEXT.STOP.DATE
NEXT.STOP.HOUR
NEXT.TARGET..
Analog Alarm Signals
0.0 ACFH
0.0 Psig
0.0 Deg. F
0.0 MSCFH
0.0 Volts
0.0
0.0 MSCF
UNCRATE..CALC
STATPRES.VAL.INP
FTEMP.VAL.INP
FLOWRATE..CALC
BATTERY.VOLTS.INP
AUXINP..INP
VOLTDY.TODAY.CALC
String Signals
MM/DD/YY HH:MM #LOAD..
9999 UNITID..CFG
Unnamed Meter METERID..CFG
SYSTEM 6666666
BBI 4 4
PW.1.
PW.2.
PW.3.
PW.4.
PW.5.
PW.6.
PW.7.
PW.8.
PW.9.
PW.10.
PW.11.
PW.12.
PW.13.
PW.14.
PW.15.
Page C-17
Signal Description
String Signals (Continued)
Default
Value
Signal Name
PW.16.
(see * below)
Password #16
Modem Init. String
MODEM.INIT.STR
Primary Dialout #
Alternate Phone #
* = ATE0S7=30 S11=55 S0=1 VIX0&C1
** = Place Holder (First appears in Firmware Version 1.6)
DIAL1..NUMBER
DIAL2..NUMBER
Page C-18 TeleFlow
-
Corrector
Instruction Manual
CI-3530-50B
May, 2006
TeleFlow Corrector Model 3530-50B
RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE for MDS
Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios
Appendix D
www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
BLANK PAGE
Appendix D
RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE
For MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
1.2 LEDs ................................................................................................................................... 1
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4
2.2 WIRING LISTS.................................................................................................................... 4
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................ 5
Model 4710 General Specs ................................................................................................ 5
Model 9710 General Specs. ............................................................................................... 5
Model 9810 General Specs. ............................................................................................... 6
TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................... 6
Model 4710 Transmitter Specs. .......................................................................................... 6
Model 9710 Transmitter Specs. .......................................................................................... 7
Model 9810 Transmitter Specs. .......................................................................................... 7
RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................... 7
Model 4710 Receiver Specs. .............................................................................................. 7
Model 9710 Receiver Specs. .............................................................................................. 8
Model 9810 Receiver Specs. .............................................................................................. 8
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 9
REFERENCED OEM MANUALS
MDS 4710A – Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide –
MDS Doc. 05-3305A01, Rev. B, Sept. 2000 ( PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf
) for model MDS 4710A
MDS 4710B – Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,
Sept. 2000 ( PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf
) for model MDS 4710B
MDS 9810 – Spread Spectrum Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 9810/24810 900 MHz/2.4GHz Spread Spectrum Transceivers Installation and Operation Guide –
MDS Doc. 05-3301A01, Rev. B, April 2000 ( PDF = 3301B-x810.pdf
) for model MDS 9810
MDS 9710A Remote Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710/9710 Series 400MHz/900 MHz Remote Data Transceiver – MDS Doc. 05-3305A01,
Rev. B, Sept. 2000 (Installation & Operation) ( PDF = 3305B-710AC.pdf
) for model MDS 9710A
CI-3530-50B Appendix D Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
Appendix D
RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE
For MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REFERENCED OEM MANUALS (Continued)
MDS 9710B Data Transceiver (Radio)
MDS 4710B/9710B Data Transceiver Installation and Operation Guide – MDS Doc. 05-3316A01, Rev. E,
Sept. 2000 ( PDF = 3316E-x710B.pdf
) for model MDS 9710B
CI-3530-50B Appendix D Page 0-2 Table Of Contents
Appendix D
RADIO INSTALLATION GUIDE for MDS Model 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radios
Section 1 - INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Each TeleFlow Corrector may be ordered with a MDS Radio Installed, i.e., "Radio Equipped," or as a
"Radio Ready" unit. Radio Ready units contain all hardware required to field install a Bristol provided
MDS Radio except the radio, antenna and external antenna cable. Radio Ready units can be ordered with or without an optional Polyphaser (Lightning/Impulse Suppresser) (see Figures 1, 2 & 3).
Each Bristol supplied MDS Data Transceiver (Radio) Option mounts inside the TeleFlow Corrector
Enclosure and is secured to the Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket by four screws. The Radio/Modem
Mounting Bracket is secured to the Battery Mounting Bracket by four screws.
TeleFlow Correctors equipped with the MDS Radio Option utilize the following additional hardware:
1.
MDS Radio Transceiver (Choice of seven models):
Model 4710 (9600 Baud/330-512 MHz)
Model 9710 (9600 Baud/800-960 MHz)
Model 9810 (900MHz -Spread Spectrum)
2.
MDS Radio Mounting Plate(s) (secured to rear of MDS radio via four (4) screws) - Secures Radio to
Battery Mounting Bracket via four (4) screws (see Figure 1 - mounting holes are indicated by four (4)
“Bs.”
3.
Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3) - 25-Pin D-Type Plug P1 connects to radio and 8 open-ended wires connect to CPU Board Connectors P13 & P14 (see Table 2).
4.
2-Wire Radio Power Cable (395445-02-7) - Plugs into the Radio Power Connector and wired to P6 of
TeleFlow). (see Table 1)
5.
Internal Coaxial Antenna Cable or Polyphaser and Polyphaser Cable.
6.
12V Battery Mounting Bracket (for Radio Option) with 12V Battery.
1.2 LEDs
MDS Radio model 9810 is supplied with six (6) LEDs that function as follows:
TR - Terminal Ready RTS (Request To Send) has been received by the internal modem from
MR - Modem Ready the TeleFlow.
CTS (Clear To Send) time has elapsed and the radio is ready to transmit data from the TeleFlow.
CD - Carrier Detect
TD - Transmit Data
The radio senses an RF signal from the master station.
Reflects the current state of the TXD line from the TeleFlow.
LED ON = 0 Bit, LED OFF = 1 Bit.
IN - Radio Inhibited/Disabled A ground on Pin 12 of the INTERFACE connector disables all radio
RD - Receive Data functions. This LED is dimly lit when Pin 12 of the INTERFACE connector is grounded and power is applied to the radio.
Reflects the current state of the Receive Data line from the transceiver's internal modem. LED ON = 0 Bit, LED OFF = 1 Bit.
MDS Radios models 4710 & 9710 are supplied with four (4) LEDs that function as follows:
CI-3530-50B Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 1
Rapid Flash - (Five times/second) = Fault Indication.
Off = No power applied to radio or radio is in sleep mode.
Continuous = Radio is receiving a data signal from a continuously keyed radio.
TXD - Transmit Data A mark signal is being received at the Data Interface.
RXD - Receive Data A mark signal is being sent out from the Data Interface.
Page 2
Figure 1 - TeleFlow with Radio Option
Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-50B
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 RADIO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION
DANGER
MDS Radio models 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 provided by Bristol Inc. are approved for use in Class I, Groups C & D, Division 2, Hazardous Locations. The installer must be familiar with hazardous location installation guidelines before installation or maintenance is undertaken. Do not begin radio installation or service to the TeleFlow Corrector unless the area is known to be non-hazardous.
Refer to the appropriate appendix of the MDS Installation, Operation & Field
Maintenance Manual applicable to the radio in question, for approved conditions under which the MDS radio can be installed in hazardous locations.
AVOID OPERATING EQUIPMENT DURING AN ELECTRICAL STORM. THE IM-
PULSE SUPPRESSOR MAY SAVE EQUIPMENT FROM DANGER, BUT SHOULD
NOT BE CONSIDERED AS BEING SAFE FOR PERSONNEL.
Figure 2 - Bottom View of MDS Radios
2.1.1 Radio Removal/Replacement Procedure
To remove the Radio Transceiver follow steps 1 through 5 below. To replace the Radio Transceiver follow steps 2 through 5 below in reverse order, installing rather than removing the item in question and then perform step 6.
1. Loosen the three (3) quarter-turn fasteners (and remove the lock if present) which secure the
Instrument Front Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
CI-3530-50B Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 3
2.
Disconnect power from the radio by removing the two-wire power plug from the bottom of the radio.
3.
Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3) from the bottom of the Radio.
4.
Unscrew the Antenna Lead from the bottom of the radio.
5.
Unscrew the four (4) screws that secure the radio (via the Radio/Modem Mounting Bracket) to the
Battery Mounting Bracket (Location B Figure 1).
6. Remove the MDS radio
7. Close and secure the Door.
2.2 WIRING LISTS
Radio Power Cable (395445-02-7)
RADIO
Pwr. Conn.
COLOR
TeleFlow CPU
SIGNAL
+ RED 1
- BLK 2
16.5 V Max
13.8 V Typ.
GND
Table 1 - Radio Power Cable (395445-02-7) Wire List
NOTE
Plug the Cable Connector (which has the Locking Clip removed) into the
Radio (only). Plug the Cable Connector (which has the Locking Clip) into the TeleFlow.
Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (392733-01-3)
CPU Pin #
CPU Board
Sig. Name
Radio D-Conn. #
& Wire Color
Radio D-Conn.
Signal Name
Function
Ground
J13-2
J13-4
J13-5
J13-6
J13-7
RDCD
RCTS
RRTS
RRXD
RTXD
8 (Green)
5 (Brown)
4 (Blue)
3 (White)
2 (Red)
DCD (Out)
CTS (Out)
RTS (In)
RXD (Out)
TXD (In)
J14-8 AI 21 RSSI
Data Carrier Detect Input
Clear To Send Input
Request To Send Output
Receive Data Input
Transmit Data Output
Receive Signal Strength
Indicator/Analog Input
Table 2 - TeleFlow/Radio Interface Cable (392733-01-3) Wire List
Page 4 Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-50B
Figure 3 - Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable 392733-01-3
Note:
The red RSSI conductor (Receive Strength Signal Indicator) can be used to monitor the receiver's signal strength when a volt meter is placed across
RRSI (Orange) and Ground (CPU Connector J13-1).
Section 3 - SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1.1 Model 4710 General Specs.
Frequency Band:
Frequency Increments:
Frequency Stability:
380-512 MHz
6.25 kHz or 5 kHz (factory configurable)
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
Primary Power:
Voltage: 13.8 Vdc nominal
(10.5 - 16 Vdc Operating Range)
1.8 A nominal, 2.5 A maximum TX Supply Current:
RX Supply Current:
Reverse Polarity Protection:
3.1.2 Model 9710 General Specs.
Frequency Band:
Frequency Increments:
150 mA (< 16 mA in Sleep Mode)
Diode across primary input
800-960 MHz
6.25 kHz or 5 kHz (factory configurable)
CI-3530-50B Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 5
Frequency Stability:
Primary Power:
Voltage:
TX Supply Current:
RX Supply Current:
Reverse Polarity Protection:
3.1.3 Model 9810 General Specs.
Frequency Band:
Frequency Hopping Range:
Frequency Stability:
Primary Power:
Voltage:
TX Supply Current:
RX Supply Current:
Standby Current (Sleep Mode):
Reverse Polarity Protection:
3.2 TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
3.2.1 Model 4710 Transmitter Specs.
Frequency Range:
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
13.8 Vdc nominal
(10.5- 16 Vdc Operating Range)
1.8 A nominal, 2.5 A maximum
150 mA (< 16 mA in Sleep Mode)
Diode across primary input
902-928 MHz part 15 Spread Spectrum Band
8 selectable zones each containing 128 frequencies for a total of 1019 frequencies
±
0.00015% (1.5 PPM), -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F) For all Models
13.8 Vdc nominal
(10.5- 26.0 Vdc Operating Range)
<400 mA
<125 mA
<30 mA
Diode across primary input
Power Output:
Duty Cycle:
Output Impedance:
Frequency Stability:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
Spurious & Harmonic Emissions:
Page 6
380-512 MHz, Programmable in 6.25 kHz or 5 kHz increments (factory configurable) to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.
5 Watts/+37 dBm (maximum) at the Antenna
Connector
Continuous
50 Ohms
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
12.5 kHz
-65 dBc
Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-50B
Response Time:
Time-out Timer:
3.2.2 Model 9710 Transmitter Specs.
Frequency Range:
Power Output:
Duty Cycle:
Output Impedance:
Frequency Stability:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
Spurious & Harmonic Emissions:
Response Time:
Time-out Timer:
3.2.3 Model 9810 Transmitter Specs.
Frequency Band:
Power Output:
Duty Cycle:
Output Impedance:
Frequency Stability:
Spurious Emissions:
Harmonic Emissions:
Transmitter Keying:
3.3 RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS
3.3.1 Model 4710 Receiver Specs.
Frequency Range:
CI-3530-50B
5 ms
Internal; programmable from 1-255 seconds in
1-second increments
800-960 MHz, Programmable in 6.25 kHz or 5 kHz increments (factory configurable) to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.
5 Watts/+37 dBm (maximum) at the Antenna
Connector
Continuous
50 Ohms
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
12.5 kHz
-65 dBc
5 ms
Internal; programmable from 1-255 seconds in
1-second increments
902-928 MHz Part 15 Spread Spectrum Band.
.1 to 1 Watt (20-30 dBm ± 1dB)
Continuous
50 Ohms
±
0.00015% (1.5 PPM), -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F) For all Models
-60 dBc
-80 dBc
Data activated
380-512 MHz Programmable in 6.25 kHz increments to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.
Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 7
Frequency Stability:
Intermodulation:
IF Selectivity:
Desensitization:
Spurious and Image Rejection:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
Sensitivity:
Squelch Opening Time:
3.3.2 Model 9710 Receiver Specs.
Frequency Range:
Frequency Stability:
Intermodulation:
IF Selectivity:
Desensitization:
Spurious and Image Rejection:
RF Channel Bandwidth:
Sensitivity:
Squelch Opening Time:
3.3.3 Model 9810 Receiver Specs.
Frequency Band:
Frequency Stability:
Intermodulation:
Desensitization:
Page 8
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
75 dB minimum (EIA)
65 dB minimum at adjacent Channel
65 dB minimum on 12.5 kHz Channel
85 dB minimum
12.5 kHz
12 dB SINAD at -110 dBm
2 ms
800-960 MHz Programmable in 6.25 kHz increments to any channel pair in radio operating sub-band.
1.5 PPM, -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
75 dB minimum (EIA)
65 dB minimum at adjacent Channel
65 dB minimum on 12.5 kHz Channel
85 dB minimum
12.5 kHz
12 dB SINAD at -110 dBm
2 ms
902-928 MHz Part 15 Spread Spectrum Band.
±0.00015% (1.5 PPM), -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F) For all Models
75 dB minimum (EIA)
65 dB minimum (EIA) on 12.5 kHz Channels
Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide CI-3530-50B
Spurious and Image Rejection:
Bit Error Rate:
3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.4.1 MDS Models 4710, 9710 & 9810
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
70 dB minimum
Less than 10
-6
at -110 dBm
Full Performance -30
°
C to +60
°
C,
(-22
°
F to +140
°
F)
95% at +40
°
C (104
°
F)
CI-3530-50B Appendix D - MDS 4710A/B, 9710A/B & 9810 Radio Installation Guide Page 9
BLANK PAGE
Appendix E
FreeWave RADIO OPTION
For Instruction Manuals
CI-3530-50B
Issue: 04/2002
FREE
W AVE
Model Number: DGRO9RFS
RS232
6V
Serial Number: XXX-XXXX
FCC ID: KNY-205-108213
Canada: 2329 102 336A
FreeWavw Technologies, Inc.
Boulder, CO 80301. This device complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received, including interferences that may cause undesired operation.
1
Bristol Babcock
Appendix E
FreeWave RADIO OPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
1.1
1.2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.3
PAGE #
GENERAL INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 1
LEDs................................................................................................................................... 1
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE
RADIO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION ............................................ 4
Radio Removal/Replacement Procedure .......................................................................... 4
Radio Installation Procedure ............................................................................................ 5
WIRING LISTS.................................................................................................................. 9
ADDITIONAL FreeWave INFORMATION ..................................................................... 9
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 10
TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 10
RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 10
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................... 11
Reference Document
FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual
FreeWave Technologies, Inc.
1880 South Flatiron Court
Boulder, CO 80301
CI-3530-50B Appendix E Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION
TeleFlow J Correctors may be ordered with a FreeWave Radio installed, i.e., "Radio
Equipped," or the FreeWave Radio may be “ field installed." TeleFlow Correctors contain all hardware required to field install a BBI provided FreeWave Radio except the radio (with
Radio/Mounting Plate), signal cable, four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws, the antenna and the external antenna cable. The FreeWave Radio option can be used with or without an optional Polyphaser (Lightning/Impulse Suppresser) (see Figures 1 through 6).
The BBI supplied FreeWave Radio is mounted to the Radio Mounting Plate via four (4) 4-
40 UNC-2A x 1/4 Pan Head Screws. The Radio Mounting Plate (with Radio Option) mounts inside the TeleFlow J Enclosure and is secured to the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate
(Battery Cover) via (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws. The Radio/Modem Mounting Plate is secured to the Battery Mounting Bracket by four screws.
TeleFlow Correctors equipped with the FreeWave Radio Option utilize the following additional hardware:
1. FreeWave Wireless Data Transceiver
2. Radio Mounting Plate (secured to rear of the radio via four (4) screws) - Secures Radio to Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) via four (4) screws (see Figures 2 & 3).
Mounting holes for Radio to Radio Mounting Plate are indicated by four (4) ‘ Cs.
’
Mounting holes for Radio Mounting Plate to Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery
Cover) are indicated by four (4) ‘ Bs.
’
3. Radio/Teleflow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) - 10-Pin Jack Connector (MTA-100) connects to the radio while the eight (8) open-ended wires (see Table 4) are connected to
CPU Board Connectors J6/P6 (Power) and J13/P13 (Network).
4.
Internal Coaxial Antenna Cable or Polyphaser and Polyphaser Cable.
5.
Four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws - secures radio to Radio Mounting Plate.
6.
Four (4) No. 4 washers (Internal Tooth Lock) - used with item 5 above.
.
7.
Four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws - secures Radio Mounting Plate to Radio/Modem
Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) (Location B - Figures 2 & 3)
1.2 LEDs
The FreeWave Radio is supplied with three (3) visible LEDs that provide important information on the operation of the transceiver. Compare the status of radio’s LEDs with
Tables 1 and 2 to aid you in the troubleshooting process.
CD - Carrier Detect LED
TX Transmit LED
CTS - Clear To Send LED
CI-3530-50B Appendix E Page 1 FreeWave Radio Option
Table 1 - LED Status in Point to Point Communications
Condition
Power Disconnected
Connected, no repeater, sending sparse data
Master calling slave through repeater
Master connected to
Repeater, not to slave
Repeater connected to slave
Mode 6, disconnected
Setup Mode
Master Slave Repeater
CD TX CTS CD TX CTS CD TX CTS
SR SR SR SR O BR SR O BR
SG IF IF SG IF IF
SR SD
FO SD
SG
SR
IF
O
SG SG
SR
SR
IF
BR
SG
SR
SR
SG
SR
SG
O
O
IF
O
SG
BR
BR
IF
SG
SR
SR
SG
SG
O
SD
IF
SG
BR
SR
IF
SG
Table 1 & Table 2 Legend:
BR
FO
IF
O
SD
SG
SR
Blinking Red
Flashing Orange
Intermittent Flash Red
Off
Solid Red, Dim
Solid Green
Solid Red, Bright
Table 2 - LED Status in Multipoint Communications
Condition
Power Disconnected
Repeater & slave connected to master, no data
Repeater & slave connected to master, master sending data to slave
Repeater & slave connected to master, slave sending data to master
Master Slave Repeater
CD TX CTS CD TX CTS CD TX CTS
SR SD O SR O BR SR O BR
SR
SR
SG-
SR
SD
SD
SD
O
O
IF
SG
SG
SG
O
O
IF
SR*
SR*
SR*
SG
SG
SG
SD
SD
SR
SR*
SR*
SR*
* = CTS will be Solid Red with a solid link, as the link weakens the CTS LED on the repeater and slave radios will begin to flash.
FreeWave Radio Option Page 2 CI-3530-50B Appendix E
Figure 1 - FreeWave Radio
Figure 2 - Radio Mounting Plate installation Diagram
CI-3530-50B Appendix E Page 3 FreeWave Radio Option
Section 2
INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 RADIO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION
DANGER
The FreeWave Wireless Data Transceiver (Radio) model DGRO-115 provided by Bristol Babcock is approved for use in Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C & D or non-hazardous locations. The installer must be familiar with hazardous location installation guidelines before installation or maintenance is undertaken. Do not begin radio installation or service to the TeleFlow J unless the area is known to be non-hazardous.
AVOID OPERATING EQUIPMENT DURING AN ELECTRICAL STORM. THE
IMPULSE SUPPRESSOR MAY SAVE EQUIPMENT FROM DANGER, BUT
SHOULD NOT BE CONSIDERED AS BEING SAFE FOR PERSONNEL.
2.1.1 Radio Removal/Replacement Procedure
To remove the Radio follow steps 1 through 6 below. To replace the Radio perform step 6 of section 2.1.2 and then follow steps 2 through 6 below in reverse order, installing rather than removing the item in question and then perform step 7.
1. Loosen the three (3) quarter-turn fasteners (and remove the lock if present) which secure the Instrument Front Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
2. Disconnect power from the radio by removing the two-wire auxiliary power jack from the TeleFlow CPU Board connector P6.
3. Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) from the lower edge of the radio.
4. Unscrew the Antenna Lead from the bottom of the radio.
5. Unscrew the four (4) screws that secure the radio (via the Radio Mounting Plate) to the
Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) (Location B Figure 2).
6. Remove the FreeWave radio (installed on the Radio Mounting Plate).
7. Close and secure the Door.
FreeWave Radio Option Page 4 CI-3530-50B Appendix E
Figure 3 - FreeWave Radio Option Installed in TeleFlow
(without Polyphaser Option)
2.1.2 Radio Installation Procedure
To install the FreeWave Radio Option into a TeleFlow (for the first time) follow steps 1 through 9 below.
CI-3530-50B Appendix E Page 5 FreeWave Radio Option
1.
Loosen the three (3) quarter-turn fasteners (and remove the lock if present) which secure the Instrument Front Cover. Open the Instrument Front Cover.
2.
Loosen the four screws that secure the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (Battery Cover) to the Battery Mounting Bracket (Location A - Figure 3) and remove the Radio/Modem
Mounting Plate.
3. Install the FreeWave radio (mounted on the Radio Mounting Plate) onto the
Radio/Modem Mounting Plate using four (4) 4-40 x 1/4 pan head screws (see Figures 4
& 2).
Figure 4 - FreeWave Radio Mounted on Radio Mounting Plate
4. Install the Radio/Modem Mounting Plate (with radio installed) onto the TeleFlow’s
Batery Mounting Bracket. Secure the screws loosened in step 2 (Location A - Figure 3).
FreeWave Radio Option Page 6 CI-3530-50B Appendix E
5. Install the Radio Cable (396306-01-2) between the radio’s RF connector and the bottom of the TeleFlow enclosure (see Figure 3 & 5) (also see Section 2.3.1 of CI-3530-10B).
Note: If an optional Polyphaser is used install Radio Cable (396306-02-0) between the radio’s RF connector and the top of the Polyphaser (within the enclosure) (see Figure 6). TeleFlow enclosures that support a Polyphaser have is
.625” diameter mounting hole while those that support a radio (without Polyphaser
Option) have a .580” diameter mounting hole.
Figure 5 - Top View - TeleFlow with FreeFlow Radio (without Polyphaser)
Figure 6 - Partial View - TeleFlow with Polyphaser Installed
CI-3530-50B Appendix E Page 7 FreeWave Radio Option
6. Follow the “Tuning Transceiver Performance” section of the FreeWave Technologies,
Inc. FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual to configure the radio.
Note: The setup program is invoked by connecting the radio to any PC equipped with a terminal program (such as Hyperterminal), setting the parameters for that terminal to those of Table 3, and putting the radio into setup mode.
Connection to the PC requires a special RS-232 cable with a 9-pin Female D-
Type connector on the PC side and a 10-pin Female MTA-100 Connector assembly on the radio side. A cable can be constructed as illustrated in Figure
7. The terminal program must be running before invoking the setup program.
The setup program is invoked by shorting MTA-100 Connector pins 4 (GND) and 2 (MENU) together.
Table 3 - Setup Menu Terminal Settings
PARAMETER
Baud Rate
Data Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Parity Check
Carrier Detect
SETTING
19,200
8
None
1
None/Off
None/Off
Figure 7 - Cable Diagram for Radio to PC Interface
7. Install the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) between Radio Connector J1 and TeleFlow CPU Board Connectors J6 & J13 (see Table 4). Make sure that the cable connector’s red wire aligns with FreeWave Radio connector Pin 1 (see Figures 1 & 3).
8. Connect the Antenna Cable between the remote Antenna and the Radio Cable (or
Polyphaser on the bottom of the TeleFlow Corrector.
9. Close and secure the Door.
FreeWave Radio Option Page 8 CI-3530-50B Appendix E
2.2 WIRING LISTS
Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4)
CPU Pin #
J6-1
J6-2
J13-1
J13-2
J13-4
J13-5
J13-6
J13-7
CPU Board
Sig. Name
AUX PWR
GND
GND
RDCD
RCTS
RRTS
RRXD
RTXD
Wire Pin. #
& Color
01 (Red)
04 (Black)
06 (Black)
08 (Green)
10 (Brown)
09 (Blue)
05 (Red)
07 (White)
Note: Pins 2 & 3 are not used.
Radio
Signal Name
B+
GND
GND
DCD (Out)
CTS (Out)
RTS (In)
TXD (Out)
RXD (In)
Function
DC Power (+)
DC Power (-) Ground
Ground
Data Carrier Detect Output
Clear To Send Output
Request To Send Input
Transmit Data Output
Receive Data Input
Table 4 - Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable (396369-01-4) Wire List
2.3 ADDITIONAL FreeWave INFORMATION
The FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual contains indepth details on modem parameters, operation, installation, tuning transceiver performance, and more. Copies of the FreeWave Spread Spectrum Wireless Data Transceiver User Manual can be obtained from FreeWave Technologies, Inc. (electronically) by contacting their Technical Support Group.
FreeWave Tech. Support can be reached at 303-444-3862 or 303-786-9948.
Online information about Spread Spectrum Modem (Model DRG09RFS) can be obtained at www.freewave.com or www.freewave.com/ProductInformation/products.htm.
CI-3530-50B Appendix E Page 9 FreeWave Radio Option
Section 3
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency:
Power Requirements:
Transmit Current:
Receive Cuurrent:
Idle Current:
Operating Modes:
3.3 RECEIVER SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity:
902 - 928 MHz
650 mA at 12V for 1W
600 mA at 8.5V for 400mW
100 mA at 12V
65 mA at 12V
Point-to-Point
Point-to-Multipoint
Peer-to-Peer
Store and Forward Repeater
Data Transmission:
Error Detection:
Data Encryption:
Link Throughput:
Interface:
32 Bit CRC, resend on error
Substitution, dynamic key
115 Kbaud
RS-232, 1200 Baud to 115.2 Kbaud,
Async., full duplex
3.2 TRANSMITTER SPECIFICATIONS
Output Power:
Range:
Modulation:
Occupied Bandwidth:
1W (+30 dBm) at 9.5V to 18.0V
400mW (+25 dBm) at 7.5V to 9.5V
20 Miles - Line of sight distance with unity gain antenna at 900 MHz.
GFSK, 120 kBs - 170 kBs
230 kHz
-108 dB at 10 -6 raw BER
FreeWave Radio Option Page 10 CI-3530-50B Appendix E
Selectivity: 40 dB at fc ±230kHz
60 dB at fc ±460 kHz
3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Full Performance -40 ° C to +60 ° C,
(-40 ° F to +140 ° F)
5% to 90% (noncondensing)
CI-3530-50B Appendix E Page 11 FreeWave Radio Option
BLANK PAGE
Appendix F
Issue: 05/2002
Using the TeleFlow
TM
Menu System
For Instruction Manual CI-3530-50B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8
Tl eleCounter
Bristol Babcock
Appendix F
USING THE TeleFlow
MENU SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE #
F.8 ORGANIZATION OF THE START-UP MENUS....................................................... F-15
F.8.1.1
F.8.1.2
F.8.1.3
F.8.1.4
Instantaneous Gas Flow Readings Menu................................................................... F-16
Today/Yesterday Readings .......................................................................................... F-17
AGA8/NX-19 Compressibility...................................................................................... F-17
Gas Composition Menu................................................................................................ F-17
F.8.1.5
Plot Trend Data............................................................................................................ F-17
F.8.3.1
F.8.3.2
F.8.3.3
F.8.3.4
F.8.3.5
Live Inputs ................................................................................................................... F-20
Configuration Constants Menu................................................................................... F-21
Alarm Configuration.................................................................................................... F-24
Gas Composition .......................................................................................................... F-26
PID Flow Controller/Sampler Control Constants...................................................... F-26
Nomination Function ............................................................................................ F-26
Status ..................................................................................................................... F-26
ENABLE ................................................................................................................ F-26
SETPOINT............................................................................................................. F-27
GAIN ...................................................................................................................... F-27
INTEGRAL ............................................................................................................ F-27
DERIVATIVE ........................................................................................................ F-28
DEADBAND .......................................................................................................... F-28
SPAN ...................................................................................................................... F-28
VALVE TRAVEL TIME ........................................................................................ F-28
PROCESS LIMITING ........................................................................................... F-28
FLOW RATE.......................................................................................................... F-28
SAMPLER FUNCTION ........................................................................................ F-28
SAMPLER VOLUME ............................................................................................ F-28
SAMPLER PULSE WIDTH .................................................................................. F-29
UNC SAMPLER .................................................................................................... F-29
CI-3530-50B Appendix F Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE #
F.8.3.6
UNC SAMPLE VOLUME ..................................................................................... F-29
UNC SAMPLE PULSE WIDTH ........................................................................... F-29
Nominations ................................................................................................................. F-29
Nominations Operation......................................................................................... F-30
Enabling the Nomination Function...................................................................... F-30
Beginning a Nomination Period ........................................................................... F-33
Ending a Nomination Period ................................................................................ F-33
Changing the Nomination Target ........................................................................ F-33
F.8.3.7
Manually Starting/Ending a Nomination Period ................................................ F-33
Read/Write Configuration ........................................................................................... F-33
F.8.4.1
F.8.4.2
Verification ................................................................................................................... F-34
Calibration Procedures ................................................................................................ F-35
Calibration of Static Pressure............................................................................... F-35
Calibration of RTD Temperature ......................................................................... F-36
ENABLE ................................................................................................................ F-37
REMAIN ACTIVE FOR ........................................................................................ F-38
TIMEOUT IF NO COMM AFTER........................................................................ F-38
START OFFSET MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS............................. F-38
POLL ENABLE START HOUR & POLL ENABLE END HOUR ...................... F-38
START OFFSET INTO HOUR ............................................................................. F-39
POLL TIME PER NODE ...................................................................................... F-39
POLL TIME PER GROUP .................................................................................... F-39
AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT DEFAULT........................................................ F-39
RTS DELAY MODE .............................................................................................. F-39
RTS TRANSMIT DELAY...................................................................................... F-39
F.8.5.1
RADIO SHUTDOWN ............................................................................................ F-39
RADIO SENSING ................................................................................................. F-39
Modem Configuration .................................................................................................. F-39
DIAL ENABLE ...................................................................................................... F-40
MODEM INITIALIZATION ................................................................................. F-40
PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER.............................................................................. F-40
ALTERNATE PHONE NUMBER ........................................................................ F-40
MAX DIALS PER HOUR ...................................................................................... F-40
PORT TYPE ........................................................................................................... F-41
LOCAL BAUD RATE ............................................................................................ F-41
NETWORK BAUD ................................................................................................ F-41
RTS DELAY MODE .............................................................................................. F-41
RTS TRANSMIT DELAY...................................................................................... F-41
PRESSURE Pf ....................................................................................................... F-42
TEMPERATURE Tf .............................................................................................. F-42
CORR FLOW RATE .............................................................................................. F-42
UNCORR FLOW RATE ........................................................................................ F-42
SYSTEM VOLTAGE ............................................................................................. F-42
RAM BATTERY..................................................................................................... F-42
AUXILIARY INPUT.............................................................................................. F-43
CORRECTOR VOLUME....................................................................................... F-43
CI-3530-50B Appendix F Page 0-2 Table Of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE #
NOMINATION ...................................................................................................... F-43
F.8.9.1
F.8.9.2
F.8.9.3
F.8.9.4
RESET HARDWARE................................................................................................... F-43
CHANGE LOCAL ADDRESS ..................................................................................... F-44
CHANGE GROUP NUMBER ..................................................................................... F-44
CHARGE REGULATOR SET-UP............................................................................... F-44
REGULATOR DELAY .......................................................................................... F-44
NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE........................................................................ F-45
CHARGE VOLTAGE............................................................................................. F-45
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT........................................................................ F-45
F.8.9.5
F.8.9.6
F.8.9.7
LIST CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................ F-46
CHANGE SYSTEM COLUME, RATE OR OTHER UNITS...................................... F-46
ARCHIVE EDIT........................................................................................................... F-48
Overview ................................................................................................................ F-48
Editing Archives In The Product.......................................................................... F-49
Editing Archive Definitions In Files .................................................................... F-49
Writing Files to A product .................................................................................... F-49
Archive Memory Usage ......................................................................................... F-49
Effect On TMS Archive Conversion To ASCII..................................................... F-50
Effect Of Different Archive Sizes On TMS Usage ............................................... F-50
Entering Security Codes ....................................................................................... F-51
Access Levels ......................................................................................................... F-51
Security Code Storage ........................................................................................... F-51
Security Code Maintenance .................................................................................. F-52
ADDENDUM
Using the Windows™ UOI/TMS/Smartkit Shell ............................................ Addendum
CI-3530-50B Appendix F Page 0-3 Table Of Contents
Appendix F
Using the TeleFlow™ Menu System
F.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW
The TeleFlow J Menu System ( TMS ) is a collection of software generated menus which are displayed on a personal computer (PC) to allow a user to configure and monitor a Model 3530-50B
TeleFlow Corrector. TMS menus provide:
* Sign-on to the 3530-50B TeleFlow Corrector
* Change the PC communications setup parameters
* Invoke menus to configure the TeleFlow Corrector for operation
* Read current gas flow and total information
* Set the TeleFlow Corrector Date and Time
* Change the TeleFlow Corrector network address
* Reset the TeleFlow Corrector to factory default conditions
* Collect & Display the Daily, Periodic, 15 Minute & Audit Logs
F.2 INSTALLING TMS SOFTWARE
TMS software requires a PC (computer) with a minimum of 640 kilobytes of RAM, a minimum
1 megabytes of fixed disk storage, and a 3.5" diskette drive.
1. With the DOS Prompt displayed on the screen, set the PC to the root directory. For example, if your root directory is on the C drive, type CD \ and press the [ENTER] key.
2. Insert the TMS program diskette into the appropriate 3.5" diskette drive.
Type: A:INSTALL A C <Directory> [ENTER]
Where A: is the 3.5" diskette drive, <Directory> is the Directory on the Hard
Disk where TMS is to be installed, and C: is the hard disk drive on which TMS will be installed.
3. Once the installation is finished, change directory (CD) to the directory where TMS was installed; i.e., type CD C:\TMS and press [ENTER]. This will set the PC to the TMS directory.
4. Type DIR and press [ENTER] to display the names of the files in the directory. Verify that it contains the following files:
TeleCorr.UML
TeleCorr.UCL
TeleCorr.UHL
TeleCorr.UMS
TeleCorr.UCS
TeleCore.UHS
TeleFlow.UML
TeleFlow.UCL
TeleFlow.UHL
TeleFlow.UMS
TeleFlow.UCS
TeleFlow.UHS
TMS.EXE
HLPFILE.D50
ATOOLS.INI
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-1
Also check the sub-directory SAMPLES; it should include the following files:
ATOOLS.INI SECAMS.REL
Figure F-1 - TeleFlow Corrector Connected to PC Via the Local Comm. Cable
5. Change the AUTOEXEC.BAT file to contain a PATH statement to the
Directory where TMS is installed. Set the correct time and date on the PC before starting the TMS program.
If the computer has no hard disk, TMS can be operated from drive A on portable computers but log collections will be restricted unless multiple disks are used.
Note: Since TMS is distributed as a compressed file, it must first be installed on a hard disk and then copied to a floppy drive. The files necessary for TMS to execute from a floppy are:
TMS.EXE, TELECORR.UML, TELECORR.UCL, and TELECORR.UHL. The ATOOLS.INI &
HLPFILE.D50 may also be required.
F.2.1 Communication Connections
The TeleFlow J communicates with the PC through the Local Port as shown in Figures F-1 & F-
3. The Local Port has been provided specifically for installation/startup and on-site configuration and data collection.
F-2 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
The cable used for local communications connects to the TeleFlow J via a round 7-pin VII plug.
A 9-pin D-type connector provides the connection to the PC.
Cable wiring (Pin) connections between the computer and the TeleFlow Local Port are listed in
Table F-1.
To install the Local Communications Cable, align the cable connector's white line and notch
(above the white pointer) with the white arrowhead on the Local Port Jack and carefully push the connector into the jack. To remove the Local Communications Cable from the TeleFlow
Local Port twist the section above the white dot to the right (in the direction of the white pointer) and then carefully pull the cable connector from the jack (see Figure F-2).
Figure F-2 - Local Communications Cable Connector VII Plug/Jack
CI-3530-50B
Figure F-3 - TeleFlow J Corrector Local Port Communication Link
Using TMS / F-3
Caution
To minimize power consumption, the TeleFlow enters a "SLEEP Mode" which it awakes from whenever the Local Communications Cable is plugged into the
Local Port. Battery life will be substantially reduced if this cable is left plugged into the TeleFlow J , regardless if the other end (D Conn.) is terminated or open.
Therefore; always unplug this cable whenever the Local Port is not being utilized.
Wire
Color
Black
White
Red
Green
Brown
VII
Plug Pin #
6
2
7
1*
4*
D Conn.
Pin #
5
2
3
N/A*
N/A*
Signal Name
GND
RXD
TXD
N/A
N/A
Table F-1 - Local Communications Cable Wiring List
* Pins 1 & 4 are shorted together in the VII Plug/D Conn. wiring harness (AKA the Local
Communications Cable). This short pulls the wakeup signal to ground whenever the Local
Communications Cable is plugged into the TeleFlow J . Pins 7 & 8 of the D-Type Connector are shorted together (RTS TO CTS).
F.2.2 ATOOLS.INI Setup File
The TMS software installation places an initialization file named ATOOLS.INI in the TMS directory, and TMS 'looks' for this file in the local directory when it starts up. This INI file contains text commands that replace those that would otherwise have to be typed in on the startup command line.
The items identified below may be included in the file as required by the user. Words listed in upper case should be spelled exactly as shown (though upper case letters are not a requirement). Each entry should begin in column 1 of the file. Any quotation marks '' shown surrounding an entry choice are NOT part of the entry, and should not be typed in the file.
POLL-RATE= n sets the Display Refresh Poll Rate. Valid entries are: 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 and 1.0.
The default value is set to 0.3.
ADDRESS= n sets the Local Address to be used for communication. Valid entries are in the range (1-
127). The default value is set to 1.
GROUP= n sets the Expanded BSAP Group Number used for communication. Valid entries are in the range (0-127). The default value is set to 0.
F-4 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
PORT=COMn: sets the default communication port, where 'COMn:' is replaced with either 'COM1:' or
'COM2:' NOTE: If this entry is omitted, 'COM1:' will be chosen as the default.
BAUDRATE=x sets the default BAUD rate for this port. Valid entries for x include: '150', '300', '600',
'1200', '2400','4800', '9600', '19200', or '19.2k'. NOTE: If this entry is omitted, 19200 will be used as the default BAUD rate.
MODEM=modem type declares the type of modem which will be used. Valid entries for modem_type are:'BBI_FSK', for the Bristol Babcock FSK modem, 'Hayes' for a Hayes modem or 'UDS' for a UDS modem. Note: If this entry is omitted, 'NO MODEM' will be used.
NAME=username may be used; in conjunction with the "Password" command, to omit the normal sign-on sequence if only one person will be using this TMS system. Username must be replaced with a valid username, up to 10 ASCII characters in length, which represents the one person who will be using TMS . If the NAME= entry is included, the PASSWORD= entry must also be defined.
PASSWORD=accesscode may be used; in conjunction with the "Name" command, to omit the normal sign-on sequence if only one person will be using the TMS system. "Accesscode" must be replaced with up to 6 ASCII characters which represent the password of the one person who will be using TMS . This entry must be used in conjunction with the NAME= entry.
XMT_FACTORY_SETTINGS=nnn determines whether the 3530 transmitter calibration menus will include the selection for "Set to factory defaults''. 'nnn' is replaced with either 'YES' to include this selection, or NO to omit it. The default is NO.
A number of error messages are built into TMS . They appear along the bottom of the CRT screen. Sometimes these messages scroll by too quickly to be read. In some cases, it may be useful to activate WAIT_ON_ERROR mode, which halts scrolling of error messages (to allow them to be read) and prompts the user to press any key to cause processing to continue.
WAIT_ON_ERROR=nnn controls waiting whenever an error message is displayed. The use of this command is recommended, particularly when the system is being set up by the system manager.
'nnn' is replaced with 'YES' or 'NO'. The default is NO.
TIMEOUT=seconds specifies the maximum expected time (in seconds) that TMS will wait to respond to a poll. Replace seconds with the maximum expected timeout value. If not specified here, this is defined on the Communications Setup Menu.
It is sometimes necessary to alter the initialization sequence sent to a modem before a phone number is dialed. Normally, the set-up stream is initialized to Q0E0V0X4, a standard Hayes modem stream. The following two keywords are available to modify the stream:
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-5
F6
F7
F8
INS
F2
F3
F4
F5
TOT_INIT_MODEM=string will replace the current set-up stream, with string. For example, if the set-up stream is
Q0E0V0X4, and TOT_INIT_MODEM=ABCDE is included in the ATOOLS.INI file, the set-up stream will now be ABCDE.
CAT_INIT_MODEM=string will concatenate string to the end of the current set-up stream. For example, if the set-up stream is Q0E0V0X4, and CAT_INIT_MODEM=ABCDE is included in the
ATOOLS.INI file, the set-up stream will now be Q0E0V0X4ABCDE.
If a Hayes or UDS modem is specified via the 'MODEM=' keyword, the following keywords may be used:
PHONE=phone_number when used with a Hayes or UDS modem, this keyword will cause the number specified by phone_number to be dialed.
DIAL=dialing_mode specifies the type of dialing technique to be used for modem dialing. Valid entries for dialing_mode are either 'TONE' or 'PULSE'.
A sample ATOOLS.INI file might include the following:
PORT=COM1:
BAUDRATE=19200
COLOR=YES
XMT_FACTORY_SETTINGS=NO
WAIT_ON_ERROR=YES
F.2.3 PC Function Key Usage
The TMS program uses the PC function keys (keys F1...F8), the INS key, and the PAGE UP key as follows:
Call up a help screen, if one is available.
Examine signal details or advance to the next display.
Back out to the previous menu level.
Toggle Manual Inhibit/Enable.
Back up one menu page.
Toggle Control Inhibit/Enable.
Move forward to another menu page.
The Insert key will activate a menu poke point or complete a change in signal value.
F-6 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
PAGE UP This key clears a displayed field - key is used prior to making value changes.
F.3 TMS PROGRAM STARTUP
TMS is used with both TeleFlow Gas Flow computers and TeleFlow Correctors. There are different menu sets for each of these devices, and in some cases customers may have created
'custom' menus tailored to their own needs.
F.3.1 Automatic Startup
If custom menus are not being used, start TMS by typing TMS<CR>. TMS will send an
'identification' message to the attached device, and depending on the response TMS will select either TeleFlow or TeleCorr menus as required; the user does not need to supply a menu set name.
F.3.2 Manual Startup
If user-created custom menus are to be used, start TMS by typing TMS -fNNNNNNNN, where
NNNNNNNN is the name of the custom menu set to be used. Note that a menu set must con-tain three files; 1) NNNNNNNN.UML, 2) NNNNNNNN.UCL, and 3) NNNNNNNN.UHL, that were created using the BBI UMS, UCS, and UHS Linker software. If all three are not present, TMS will ignore the name NNNNNNNN and use either TeleFlow or TeleCorr menus by default.
F.3.3 Startup With Initialization File
The TMS software installation places an initialization file named ATOOLS.INI in the TMS directory, and TMS 'looks' for this file in the local directory when it starts up. This INI file contains text commands that replace those that would otherwise have to be typed in on the startupo command line.
The INI file supplied with TMS contains default Name and Password and other text lines that allow the user to startup at the highest access level allowed, in expectation that after the
TeleCorr has been configured the INI will be edited to contain only the Name and Password giving the access level desired by the user. Users can define names and passwords that allow access at levels from 2 to 5, with 5 being the highest.
If an ATOOLS.INI file has been set-up, TMS will attempt to start-up, overriding default parameters with the values configured in the ATOOLS.INI file. If communications with the
TeleFlow Corrector is successful, the main menu for security level 2 or the main menu for the security level associated with the Name and Password commands specified in the ATOOLS.INI
file will appear.
If after typing TMS followed by pressing the [ENTER] Key, communications can't be established, a Help Menu will appear. Perform the following seven (7) steps:
Note: Poke Point ( ) Selections are made by moving the cursor to the desired poke point and then pressing the INSERT [INS] Key.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-7
1. Press F3; the Sign-on Menu of Figure F-6 will appear (see Section F.5).
2. Select the System Set-up poke point ( ). The System Set-up Menu of Figure F-7 will appear (see Section F.6).
3. Select the Reconfigure Communications poke point ( ). The BBI Tools Communications Set-up Menu of Figure F-4 will appear (see Section F.4).
4. Select the Define Local Link poke point ( ). The BBI Tools Communications Port Set-up
Menu of Figure F-5 will appear.
If necessary select the COM1 poke point ( ) to change from COM2 port usage (or visaversa). Keep in mind that these are the PC's port connections to the TeleFlow J . The default setting is Communications Port 1 (COM1).
If necessary select the 19200 poke point ( ) to set the baud rate. The default setting is
19200 bps.
If necessary change the type of modem that the PC is communicating with. The default is NO MODEM (Note: This is the equivalent to choosing None, so if the connection between the PC and the TeleFlow J is via the Local Communications Cable the default setting of NO MODEM can be left alone).
5. Press BACKDISP ( F4) to return to the BBI Tools Communications Set-up Menu.
6. Press the F3 Key to go to the Sign-on Menu (Figure F-6) (Section F.5).
7. Select the Sign-on To On-line Function poke point ( ). The Operator Name will prompt.
Enter the operator name (up to ten (10) characters in length). Enter the password (up to six (6) characters in length). If sign-on is successful, the Main Menu for the associated security level will appear (Figure F-8) (Section F-7).
Once a user has successfully logged on, pressing F4 (Back Display); from any of the main menus, will invoke the Sign-on Menu. This will allow the user to change security level if required.
F.4 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP MENUS
The address of the TeleFlow J Corrector must be specified to TMS. The address and other parameters are entered via the Communication Menus of Figure F-4 and F-5. Either local or global communications are supported.
Note:
Certain communications setup parameters may, if desired, be pre-defined in
a text file called ATOOLS.INI. See ATOOLS.INI Setup File under section F.2
(see ATOOLS.INI Setup File)
If your computer is directly connected to the TeleFlow Local Communications Port), proceed as follows:
F-8 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
BBI TOOLS COMMUNICATIONS SETUP MENU
HELP (F2 Key) Available
ACTIONS
Identify Local Node
Identify Global Node
Define Local Link
Node Attached to PEI Hardware
Target Node is not Local Node
Baud Rate, Port, Modem Usage
Issue Node Routing Table/Time Sync
STATUS
Global Node Address: 0000
Local Node Address: 1
Baud Rate: 19200 Timeout: 2 seconds Comm Port: COM1
NO MODEM
Press NEXT DISPLAY Key (F3) To Enter Program With Communications System As Defined
Figure F-4 - BBI Tools Communications Setup Menu (Main Comm. Menu) o Move the cursor to the "Identify Local Node" poke point, then press [INS]. The BBI Tools
Communications Setup Menu (not shown) will appear. This menu allows the operator to reconfigure the Local Address, Local Node Name and the Expanded BSAP Group
Address (0-127 defaulted to 0). This menu also provides a poke point for examining the
NETOP File (to aid in node name determination).
o Type in the local address field (1 factory default), press [INS], then press F4.
If you are communicating through the Network (Global Communications), use this procedure: o The TMS program will communicate globally through the Master Node of a network to any 33XX which is a slave to a lower level node. Select the Identify Global Node poke point. The BBI Tools Global Communications Setup Menu will appear. Specify the
33XX's node name as it appears in the Netfile for the network. Note: A NETOP File poke point is provided for examining network setup information. After entering the node name, press [F4] to return to the BBI Tools Communications Setup Menu.
If the operator selects the Define Local Link poke point, the following message will be displayed at the lower left corner of the menu: TIME SYNCH/NRT SENT . This message indicates that the
PC's time and networking information have been sent to the TeleFlow J .
F.4.1 Setting The Baud Rate, Port & Modem Usage Parameters
The PC Serial Port is set to 19200 baud through COM1 by default. To change the default communications port or the baud rate, select the Define Local Link poke point and press [INS]; the
BBI TOOLS COMMUNICATIONS PORT SETUP MENU of Figure F-5 will appear.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-9
Use the poke points on this menu to change the port and baud rate selections as required. 19200 baud and No Modem are the default settings and should always be used with the TeleFlow J .
When entries on this screen are complete, press [F4] to return to the BBI Tools Communications
Setup Menu. Press [F3] to change all the settings in the PC to the new settings. The TMS will then attempt to communicate with the TeleFlow Corrector. If communications are successfully established, the Sign-on Menu (Figure F-6) will appear on the screen.
Note: The Main Comm. Menu referenced by the bottom line of the BBI TOOLS COM-
MUNICATIONS PORT SETUP MENU is the BBI TOOLS COMMUNICATIONS SETUP MENU of Figure F-4.
BBI TOOLS COMMUNICATIONS PORT SETUP MENU
HELP (F2 Key) Available
Select Baud Rate: 19200 Baud Timeout: 2 Seconds
150
300
600
1200
Selected Comm Port: COM1
COM1 COM2
2400
4800
9600
19200
3308 Node Type:
Download Retry yes/NO
Modem: NO MODEM
None BBI FSK
(HEADBAND)
UDS 202S/D HayesSmart Help
Press Back Display Key (Function Key 4) To Return To The Main Communications
Figure F-5 - Comm. Setup Baud Rate Menu
F.5 SIGN-ON MENU
SIGN-ON MENU
Security Sign-on to On-line Function
System Set-up
Sign-off and Exit
Figure F-6 - Sign-On Menu
The Sign-On Menu provides poke points for signing onto the TMS, configuring the communications system and exiting from the program.
F-10 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
Typically, if you do not specify the local address when starting TMS from the command line, this menu will appear after the Startup Menu and Communication Setup Menu. If an address is specified, however, this menu will appear first.
If you intend to use on-line mode, which is the most common arrangement, you may need to change the system setup first. To do so, move the cursor to the 'System Set-up' poke point, and press [INS]. Follow the directions in section F.6 to change the system setup.
If the system setup does not need to be changed, you may sign on as follows:
1. Move the cursor to the 'Security Sign-On' poke-point and press [INS]. TMS will read all the allowed names and passwords from the TeleFlow into the PC, and then display a prompt for an operator name.
2. When the "Enter Operator Name" prompt appears at the bottom left of the screen, type in the operator name and press [INS]. TMS will compare the name to those read from the TeleFlow and either accept or reject the name. The factory default name is
SYSTEM. (Be sure to use the [INS] key, not [ENTER]. If the name is valid a 'password' prompt will appear.
3. When the 'Password' prompt appears, type in the password. The password for
SYSTEM is 666666. To maintain security, the password characters will not be visible as they are typed. Press [INS] to enter the password; TMS will compare it to the one associated with the accepted name and either accept or reject the password.
Note:
The security level associated with your username/password (or security code) will determine which functions you are allowed to access within the TMS. Cer-tain poke points and functions shown on the menus in this manual will NOT be visible for those users who have signed on at less than the highest security level.
F.6 SYSTEM SET-UP
This menu may be accessed through the 'System Set-up' poke point on the Sign-on Menu of
Figure F-6.
SYSTEM SET-UP color/MONOCHROME Display
Block Cursor/default Cursor
Reconfigure Communications Set-up
Sign-off and Exit
Figure F-7 - System Setup Menu
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-11
The color/MONOCHROME Display poke point of Figure F-7 alerts the operator that the system is configured for a black & white monitor. The word that is capitalized connotes the type of monitor used, i.e., Black & White or Color. If this poke point were chosen (as it appears in Figure
F-7) the screen would change to color and the poke point would appear as follows:
COLOR/monochrome Display.
If the Reconfigure Communications Set-up poke point is selected, the BBI Communications Setup
Menu of Figure F-4 will be displayed (see Section F.4).
Figure F-8
On-Line Function Tree Diagram
F-12 / Using TMS
Figure F-9
Main Menu (Levels 3 & 4) Tree Diagram
CI-3530-50B
F.7 ON-LINE FUNCTIONS
When sign-on is successful, an initial TMS menu will appear. It will be either an On-Line Functions Menu or a Main Menu. To select a menu item, move the cursor up or down (to a poke point) using the arrow keys, then press the [INS] key to activate the (poke point) selection.
The appearance of the initial menu will vary depending upon what security code was entered during sign-on. An On-line Function Menu will be displayed for security levels 5 & 6, while security levels 2 through 4 will receive a variation of the Main Menu.
Users who signed on with a security level 1 will receive a Sign-on Error Menu. This menu will prompt the operator as follows: "Operator is signed-on at security level one which has no access. Press F4 to return to the sign-on menu".
Users signing on at security level 2 see a start-up menu MAIN MENU which allows them to view summary data (see Figure F-10). Users at level 3 & 4 are provided a similar menu (unique to each) which provides them with additional capabilities (see Figures F-11 & F-12).
M A I N
Station ID ________________
M E N U
Meter ID ________
- - - - - - - - - - - CORRECTED VOLUME - - - - - - - - - - -
Today __________ ______
Month __________ ______
Rate ________ ______
Yesterday __________ ______
Totalizer __________ ______
Rate ________ ______
Today __________ ______
Month __________ ______
Rate
- - - - - - - - - - - UNCORRECTED VOLUME - - - - - - - - - - -
Yesterday __________ ______
Totalizer ________ ______
_________ ______
Sign-off and Exit
Figure F-10 - MAIN MENU (Start-up Menu Security Level 2)
Note: Special Functions & Security Maintenance Poke Points of Figure F-13 are not available at level 5.
The menu of Figure F-13 reflects security level 6 functions. The security level 5 On-line Func-tion
Menu is similar; however, the Radio/Modem Control, Special Functions and Security
Maintenance poke points are not available to security level 5 users. Additionally, the Alarm
Status Information poke point for security level 6 users (Figure 13) is called Status Information on the security level 5 On-line Function Menu.
The data entries on the menu of Figure F-10 are Read Only. Users at level 2 are allowed to view information but do not have the ability to change anything.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-13
Station ID
Meter K Factor
M A I N
__________________
________ ______
M E N U
Meter ID ________
Unc Volume ________ ______
- - - - - - - - - - - CORRECTED VOLUME - - - - - - - - - - -
Today __________ ______
Month __________ ______
Rate ________ ______
Yesterday __________ ______
Totalizer __________ ______
Rate ________ ______
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SP In Use ________ ______ SP Live ________ ______
Temp In Use _______ ______ Temp Live _______ ______
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Collect All Logs (Daily, Periodic, Audit, Config)
Collect Individual Logs Draw a Trend Plot
View Configuration
View Alarms
View Gas Composition
Maintenance Operations
Sign-off and Exit
Figure F-11 - MAIN MENU (Start-up Menu Security Levels 3)
M A I N
Station ID ________________
Meter K Factor ______
M E N U
Meter ID
Unc Volume
________
________
- - - - - - - - - - - CORRECTED VOLUME - - - - - - - - - - - -
______
Today ________ ______
Month ________ ______
Rate _______ ______
Yesterday
Totalized
Rate
________ ______
________ ______
_______ ______
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SP In Use
Temp In Use
________ ______ SP Live
_______ ______ Temp Live
________
_______
______
______
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Gravity
Heating Value
______
______
______
______
BATTERY VOLTAGE ______ ______
CO2 Content
N2 Content
______
______
______
______
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Collect All Logs (Daily, Periodic, Audit, Config)
Collect Individual Logs Draw a Trend Log Plot
Configure System
View Alarms
Configure Gas Composition
Maintenance Operations
F-14 / Using TMS
Figure F-12 - MAIN MENU (Start-up Menu Security Level 4)
CI-3530-50B
ON-LINE FUNCTIONS MENU
Current Gas Flow Information
Collect Logs
Configurable Data
Transmitter Calibration
Radio/Modem Control
Serial Port Information
Alarm Status Information
Set Date and Time
Special Functions
Security Maintenance
Sign-off and Exit
Figure F-13 - Start-up Menu Security Level 6
BACKDISP (F4) may be used from any of the start-up menus to access the standard System
Sign-on Menu (Figure F-6). The System Sign-on Menu allows the user to sign-on at a new security level, access the communications set-up menus, or sign-off.
Users at level 3 are allowed to view configuration data, plot data, view alarm data and collect logs. Users at level 3 don't have the ability to write to the configuration data. In addition to the capabilities of level 3, users at level 4 have Write Access to 'Configuration' and 'Gas Com-position' data and can perform transmitter calibration functions.
F.8 ORGANIZATION OF THE START-UP MENUS
Depending on the security level, either an On-Line Functions Menu (Figure F-13) or a Main Menu
(Figures (F-10 through F-12) will appear when the user signs on. The On-Line Function Menu provides poke points ( ) which when chosen will lead to a new menu which in turn may contain poke points which (if chosen) may lead to one or more additional menus or screens (See Figure
F-13).
Some of the menus discussed in this section are accessed through the Main Menu of security levels 2 through 4. These menus are discussed with respect to the various levels. The abbreviated or lower level menus (associated with levels 2, 3 & 4) are a form of the menus associated with security levels 5 & 6. These menus (levels 2, 3 & 4) are not shown but are connoted in this manual (see Figures F-8 & F-9).
F.8.1
Read Current Gas Flow Information
This menu is accessible from the On-Line Functions Menu poke point ( ) Read Current Gas Flow
Information for users at security level 5 or 6. It provides Read-only access to the indicated gas flow information.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-15
Selecting an item from this menu will access a more detailed menu for the indicated information.
CURRENT GAS FLOW INFORMATION
Instantaneous Gas Flow Readings
Today / Yesterday Readings
AGA8/NX-19 Compressibility
Gas Composition
Plot Trend Data
Figure F-14 - Current Gas Flow Information Menu
F.8.1.1 Instantaneous Gas Flow Readings Menu
The Instantaneous Gas Flow Readings Menu is accessible to users at security level 5 or 6 and this menu provides the following flow readings:
FLOW RATE (Flow is displayed with the active unit) (MSCFH)
ENERGY RATE (MMBTUH)
UNCORRECTED FLOW RATE (ACFH)
STATIC PRESSURE (Psig)
TEMPERATURE (Deg. F)
COMPRESSIBILITY RATIO
STATIC PRESSURE __________ ______
TEMPERATURE
BASE PRESSURE
_______ ______
__________ ______
BASE TEMPERATURE
FVP METHOD _______
_______ ______
Zb Base
AGA8
-----------
________
Zf Flowing ________
Fpv ________ s = Zb/Zf
NX-19
-----------
Fpv ________
s = Fpv * Fpv
Figure F-15 - Compressibility Ratio Menu
F-16 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
F.8.1.2 Today/Yesterday Readings
The Volume, Energy & Flow Time Readings Menu is accessible to users at security level 5 or 6.
This menu provides the Flow Time, Volume Total, Energy Total and Nomination Quantities for
"Today and Yesterday," as well as the monthly and running volume and energy totals.
F.8.1.3 AGA8/NX-19 Compressibility
This menu provides Read Only access to the Flow Equation components. The TeleFlow supports
NX-19 1985, and AGA8 1992. Components for all are shown on this menu. When 1985 NX-19 is selected, AGA8 METHOD and AGA8 GROSS METHOD lines are meaningless.
F.8.1.4 Gas Composition Menu
The Gas Composition menu is accessible to users at security level 5 or 6. This menu is accessed
(Read Only) from the Read Current Gas Flow Information Menu or for (Read/Write) from the
Read/Write Configurable Data Menu.
N2
CO2
H2S
WATER
HELIUM
METHANE
ETHANE
PROPANE
NBUTANE
IBUTANE
ARGON
_______
_______
_______
________
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
GAS COMPOSITION
NPENTANE
IPENTANE
NHEXANE
NHEPTANE
NOCTANE
NNONANE
NDECANE
OXYGEN
CARB MONOX
HYDROGEN
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
HEATING VALUE ______ ______ HEATING VALUE SOURCE ______
GRAVITY
AGA8 METHOD
______
_______
GRAVITY TYPE
FVP METHOD _________ ______ AGA8 GROSS METHOD
______
______
Figure F-16 - Gas Composition Menu
F.8.1.5 Plot Trend Data
When the Plot Trend Data poke point of the Read Current Gas Flow Information Menu (Figure
F-14) a screen plot similar to Figure F-17 will appear. When the plot is initially called up on the screen, TMS will attempt to show all of the available data. Depending upon your application, this may result in too much data being compressed in too small an area. To adjust this, use the Zoom
In poke points, to concentrate on a smaller portion of the plot; this may make the plot easier to read.
The Trend Data plot includes two traces, one for pressure (P) and one for temperature (T).
Individual traces can appear in a variety of styles and/or colors. In the plot of Figure F-17, the
P trace uses circles, and the T trace uses a line.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-17
There are several poke points included with each screen plot, which may be used to alter the way data is presented.
SHIFT PAGE LEFT
This poke point shifts the period for data being plotted back in time, to show older data.
SHIFT COLUMN LEFT
This poke point performs the same function as SHIFT PAGE LEFT, except in smaller increments.
SHIFT PAGE RIGHT
This poke point shifts the period for data being plotted forward in time, to show more recent data.
SHIFT COLUMN RIGHT
This poke point performs the same function as SHIFT PAGE RIGHT, except in smaller increments.
F-18 / Using TMS
Figure F-17 - TREND DATA Screen
CI-3530-50B
ZOOM OUT 1.2X, 2X, 5X
The zoom out poke points increase the number of data points which will be displayed on the plot, but compresses the amount of space between data points. Zooming out results in a longer time-scale of data points being displayed in a given area of the screen.
ZOOM IN 1.2X, 2X, 5X
The zoom in poke points decrease the number of data points which will be displayed on the plot, but increases the amount of space between data points. Zooming in makes it easier to examine individual data points in the plot.
SCALE MODE: AUTO/MANUAL
The Scale Mode pokepoint toggles the mode used to determine the 0% and 100% scale values for an individual trace on the plot. Each trace has its own scale mode poke point.
If there are less than 4 traces for this plot, the word 'unused' will appear next to the extra poke point(s.)
When AUTO is selected, the word AUTO is capitalized, and manual is shown in lowercase letters. When MANUAL is selected, the word MANUAL is capitalized, and the word auto is shown in lowercase letters.
AUTO
The 0% value is automatically set to the value of the smallest data value for this trace currently being displayed on the screen. The 100% value is automatically set to the value of the largest data value for this trace currently being displayed on the screen. These values are displayed in the 0% and 100% fields at left, and are dynamically updated if the
SHIFT poke points are used to call up different time scales of data. AUTO mode ensures that the trace for a particular signal will never go above the 100% line, or below the 0% line on the screen.
MANUAL
Manual mode requires the operator to enter 0% and 100% data values for each individual poke point. Data values which are outside the 0 and 100% range defined by these values may not be visible on the screen, depending upon how far above or below the range, the value has gone.
SHOW/HIDE
Each trace has its own SHOW/HIDE poke point, which is used to turn on/off the display of a particular trace on the plot. When SHOW is selected, the trace will appear. When
HIDE is selected, the trace is omitted from the plot.
F.8.2 Log Utilities
Log Collect, Convert and Display functions are all presented utilizing a common menu. This menu presents the user with a matrix of menu poke-points describing what functions may be performed. In addition, the user may change the default disk drive on the log select menus via the View/Change Drive Directory Poke Point (see Figure F-18, also see Section 1.3.4.1). The
Meter ID defines the file name used to R/W log data.
COLLECT Poke Points : Collects a specific binary log and appends it to an existing binary file.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-19
CONVERT Poke Points : Converts collected binary data to ASCII and stores it in an ASCII Text
File on disk.
DISPLAY Poke Points : Displays the ASCII Text File.
LOG UTILITIES
Meter ID is: ________ View/Change Drive/Directory
COLLECT CONVERT DISPLAY
Combo Log
(Daily, Hourly, Audit, Config)
Daily Log
Periodic Log
Trend Data Log
Alarm/Event Log
Sign-off and Exit
Figure F-18 - Log Utilities Menu
F.8.3 Read/Write Configurable Data
This menu is accessible from the On-Line Functions Menu for users at security level 5 or 6. It provides Read/Write access to the indicated gas flow information.
READ/WRITE CONFIGURABLE DATA
Live Inputs/Outputs
Configuration Constants
Alarm Configuration
Gas Composition
PID Flow Controller / Sampler Control Constants
Nominations
Read/Write Configuration
F.8.3.1 Live Inputs
Figure F-19 - Read/Write Configurable Data Menu
The Live Inputs Menu is accessible from the Read/Write Configurable Data Menu for users at security levels 5 and 6. This menu indicates whether Calibration Mode is ON/OFF and provides
F-20 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
the mechanism for manually overriding an input value. The Auxiliary Inputs/Outputs Menu which allows the user to examine Auxiliary Inputs, Discrete Inputs and Outputs, the Pulse Input and the Power Input signals can be evoked by pressing F8.
LIVE INPUTS Page 1 of 2
CALIBRATION MODE ______
OVERRIDE STATUS
LIVE INPUT VALUE
STATIC
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
INPUT VALUE IN USE
CALIBRATED ZERO
CALIBRATED SCALE
PULSES COUNTED
______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ PULSE FREQUENCY ______
PRESS F8 TO VIEW AUXILIARY, DISCRETE, AND POWER INPUTS
Figure F-20 - Live Inputs Menu (Page 1 of 2)
AUXILIARY INPUT
AUXILIARY ZERO
DISCRETE INPUT 1
DISCRETE OUTPUT 1
POWER INPUT 1
SYSTEM VOLTAGE
AUXILIARY INPUTS/OUTPUTS Page 2 of 2
______
______ AUXILIARY SPAN ______
______ DISCRETE INPUT 2 ______
______ DISCRETE OUTPUT 2 ______
______ ______ POWER INPUT 2 ______ ______
______ ______ BACKUP BATTERY ______ ______
Figure F-21 - Auxiliary Inputs/Outputs Menu
F.8.3.2 Configuration Constants Menu
The Configuration Constants Menu is accessed from the Main Menu for security levels 2, 3 and
4. For security levels 5 and 6 this menu is accessed from the Read/Write Configuration Constants Menu. When accessed with a security level of 2 or 3, the parameters on this menu are
Read-Only. The parameters on this menu are READ/WRITE for users at security levels 4, 5, or
6. The Configuration Constants Menu consists of two separate pages (see Figures F-22 & F-23).
Meter K Factor is the meter calibration factor in pulses per cubic foot of gas and is supplied by the meter manufacturer. As time goes by the internal mechanisms of the meter will experience some wear that will ill effect the meter performance, typically resulting in a lower measurement of gas flow than is actually occurring. The Meter M Factor causes a correction.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-21
CONFIGURATION CONSTANTS Page 1 of 2 CONFIGURATION READ/WRITE
STATION ID ______________________ METER ID ______
______ ______ METER K FACTOR
GRAVITY
HEATING VALUE
FVP METHOD
AGA8 METHOD
CO2 CONTENT
______ ______ METER M FACTOR
______ GRAVITY TYPE
______ ______ HEATING VALUE SOURCE
______
______
______
AGA8 GROSS METHOD
NITROGEN CONTENT
______
______
______
______ ______
BASE PRESSURE PB
BAROMETER
CONTRACT HOUR
LOW FLOW CUTOFF
______ ______ BASE TEMPERATURE TB
______ ______
______
______ ______
PRESS F8 FOR PAGE 2 CONSTANTS
______ ______
Figure F-22 - Configuration Constants Menu (Page 1 of 2)
Configuration Constants Page 2 of 2 CONFIGURATION READ/WRITE
LOAD ID: _______ VER: ______ LOAD DATE _______________
TREND DATA LOG ______ (15 Minute Sample)
CALCULATION INTERVAL ______ ______ (1, 2, 5, 15, 60 Secs)
PERIODIC LOG INTERVAL ______
Figure F-23 - Configuration Constants Menu (Page 2 of 2)
Meter K Factor: The user entered Meter K Factor number is a ratio of the number of pulses produced by the TeleFlow Corrector TeleCounter Assembly’s Magnet Wheel (per revolution) to the amount of gas (in cubic feet or meters) that flows per revolution. This number is derived from information provided by the manufacturer of the turbine meter (Meter K Factor = Pulses per cubic feet or cubic meter of gas flow) and the Configuration Constants - Meter K Factor
Table (see Table F-2). It should be noted that there are two versions of TeleFlow Corrector
TeleCounter Assemblies, i.e., those with a 5-magnet, Magnet Wheel (10 pulses per meter revolution) and those with a 1-magnet, Magnet Wheel (one pulse per meter revolution).
Example 1: If the Corrector produces one pulse per revolution and this represents 10 cubic feet of gas, the Meter K Factor is .1, i.e., 1/10 = .1.
Example 2: If the Corrector produces ten pulses per revolution and this represents 10 cubic feet of gas, the Meter K Factor is 1, i.e., 10/10 = 1.
F-22 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
1
Meter K Factor
(1-Magnet Wheel)
(1 Pulse/Rev.)
.1
.01
.001
.0001
.00001
.2
10
Meter K Factor
(5-Magnet Wheel)
(10 Pulses/Rev.)
10
1
.1
.01
.001
.0001
2
20
Cubic Unit of Gas Flow to produce one revolution
Provided by Meter Mftr.
1 (ft 3 ) or (M 3 )
10 (ft 3 ) or (M 3 )
100 (ft 3 ) or (M 3 )
1,000 (ft 3 )
10,000 (ft 3 )
100,000 (ft 3 )
5 (ft 3 )
.1 (ft 3 )
Table F-2 - Configuration Constants - Meter K Factors
Meter M Factor: As time goes by, the internal mechanisms of the meter will experience some wear that will ill affect the meter performance, typically resulting in a lower measurement of gas flow than is actually occurring, or, requiring more gas flow to rotate the meter than that specified by the manufacturer’s Meter K Factor. To correct degraded performance (due to meter wear and other variables), the Meter Calibration Factor (M Factor) must be multiplied against the Meter K Factor. The Meter M Factor is a turbine meter correction/calibration factor for local conditions (it is typically larger than 1.00 and is factory set at 1.00). The Meter M Factor is determined empirically during "proving." Proving requires the customer to isolate and test the turbine meter in question with use of a standard (such as a Pulser). The Pulser will provide the user with the exact amount of gas flow actually required to produce one revolution of the turbine meter.
For example, a customer determines (by use of a Pulser) that the turbine meter in question actually requires 1002 cubic feet of gas flow to produce a pulse, when it should only take 1000 cubic feet per pulse (this is due to wear). The M Factor is calculated to be 1.002, i.e., 1002 divided by 1000. Once the customer enters 1.002 (for the Meter M Factor) into the Configuration
Constants Menu (Figure F-22), the Corrector will automatically correct the value to 1002, a closer representation of the actual volume.
LOW FLOW CUTOFF: LOW FLOW CUTOFF is the maximum amount of time between pulses before the Corrector enters Cutoff Mode. When the Correcetor enters Cutoff Mode, the flow rate is set to zero. The Corrector must detect two pulses within the period specified as the LOW
FLOW CUTOFF value (see Figure F-22) before Cutoff Mode will be exited. TeleFlow Correctors equipped with a 5-magnet, Magnet Wheel have a higher sensitivity than Correctors equipped with the 1-magnet, Magnet Wheel, i.e., TeleFlow Correctors that utilize the 5-magnet, Magnet
Wheel experience pulses 10 times more frequently (per revolution) than units equipped with a
1-magnet, Magnet Wheel. At any given installation, the LOW FLOW CUTOFF value may be set
10 times lower for a unit with a 5-magnet, Magnet Wheel than for a unit with a 1-magnet, Magnet
Wheel.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-23
CONTRACT HOUR: Defines the time period at which the ‘Daily Archive’ begins. When you view the Daily Archive, information will be provided for the 24 hour period proceeding the posted
CONTRACT HOUR.
F.8.3.3 Alarm Configuration
-
Four Alarm Configuration Menus are provided. Pages 1, 2, and 3 provide analog alarm configuration information, while page 4 deals with logic alarm configuration information. To change an alarm configuration deadband or limit value, enter the new value directly on the display
(page 1, 2 , or 3) or press F3 (Page 4) (with the cursor set on the highlighted value in question).
The menu which appears will allow the user to examine/change signal details.
-
Deadbands and Limits :
A deadband slows down the alarm response and prevents the signal from turning on and off too quickly if the signal oscillates at the threshold of the alarm limit.
Low Alarm, Low Low Alarm, High Alarm and High High Alarm limit data fields represent the alarm setpoints.
Note: When configuring an alarm signal, provide an adequate non-alarm zone to ensure that the signal is not in a continuous alarm state.
ALARM CONFIGURATION Page 1 of 4
DISPLAY ALARMS ON LCD DISPLAY ______
STATIC AUXILIARY
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE INPUT
---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- ------- CURRENT VALUE
LOW ALARM DEADBAND ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
LOW ALARM ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
LOW LOW ALARM ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
HIGH ALARM DEADBAND ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
HIGH ALARM ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
HIGH HIGH ALARM ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
PRESS F8 FOR ADDITIONAL ANALOG ALARM CONFIGURATION DATA
Figure F-24 - Alarm Configuration Menu Page 1 of 4
An alarm condition occurs when the signal value exceeds the alarm limit. The alarm remains activated until the signal returns to the non-alarm range defined by the alarm limits.
To enable (E) or inhibit (I) a Manual (M), Control (C) or Alarm (A) Status Bit (associated with the page 4 of 4 menu, i.e., the Logical Alarm Configuration Menu), press F3 (with the cursor on the highlighted State associated with the logic signal in question, i.e., Low Flow Cutoff, Backup
F-24 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
Battery, AGA8 Calc Error or Self-Check Failure. The menu which appears will allow the user to examine/change signal details.
CURRENT VALUE
ALARM CONFIGURATION Page 2 of 4
CORR FLOW UNC FLOW CORRECTED
RATE RATE VOLUME
---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
LOW ALARM
LOW LOW ALARM
---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
LOW ALARM DEADBAND ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
HIGH ALARM ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
HIGH HIGH ALARM ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
HIGH ALARM DEADBAND ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ---------- --------
PRESS F8 FOR MORE ALARM CONFIGURATION DATA
Figure F-25 - Alarm Configuration Menu Page 2 of 4
ALARM CONFIGURATION Page 3 of 4
CURRENT VALUE
SYSTEM
POWER
---------- --------
LOW ALARM
LOW LOW ALARM
---------- --------
---------- --------
LOW ALARM DEADBAND ---------- --------
HIGH ALARM
HIGH HIGH ALARM
---------- --------
---------- --------
HIGH ALARM DEADBAND ---------- --------
PRESS F8 FOR LOGICAL ALARM CONFIGURATION DATA
Figure F-26 - Alarm Configuration Menu Page 3 of 4
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-25
LOGICAL ALARM CONFIGURATION Page 4 of 4
STATE STATUS BITS
LOW FLOW CUTOFF
DISCRETE INPUT #2
Clear ME CE AE
Clear ME CE AE
BACKUP BATTERY
BATTERY OVERCHARGE
AGA8 CALC ERROR
FP MATH ERROR
Clear ME CE AE
Clear ME CE AE
Clear ME CE AE
Clear ME CE AE
SELF-CHECK FAILURE
TRANSMITTER FAILURE
SENSOR CHECKSUM ERROR
Clear ME CE AE
Active ME CE AE
OK ME CE AE
Figure F-27 - Logical Alarm Configuration Menu Page 4 of 4
F.8.3.4 Gas Composition
The Gas Composition Menu is accessible to users at security levels 5 & 6. This menu is accessed in Read Only mode from the Read Current Gas Flow Information Menu or in Read/Write mode from the Read/Write Configurable Data Menu (see Figure F-19).
F.8.3.5 PID Flow Controller /Sampler Control Constants
The PID Flow Controller / Sampler Control Constants Menu is accessible from the Read/Write
Configurable Data Menu to users at security level 5 or 6. The PID Controller is utilized in the
TeleFlow for Flow Rate Control.
Nominations Function
The Nominations Function provides for enabling/disabling the nominations feature (see
Section F.8.3.6). If this signal is set to the disable state, no nomination will be per-formed.
Status
The Status signal is an output of the nominations algorithm that indicates whether there is currently a nominations period in progress. The user may change the state of this signal to end an in progress nomination immediately, or to start the next period immediately (see Manually Starting/Ending a Nomination Period in Section F.8.3.6).
ENABLE
Pressing the PAGE UP (PgUp) key and then pressing the INS key will clear the
Enable/Disable displayed reading and the following the prompt will appear at the bottom of the menu: DO YOU WISH TO TURN THIS SIGNAL TO ITS ENABLED (TRUE)
STATE? If so, press the INS Key again. If you do not want the PID Flow Controller
F-26 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
enabled, type N. It is recommended that GAIN, INTEGRAL and DERIVATIVE adjustments be checked before turning a controller ON.
Warning
Do not turn the ENABLE selection ON without first checking the external process control loop.
The initial values displayed on the PID Menu may drive some critical processes beyond the extremes of safe limits. This could result in fire, explosion, property damage, and injury to persons. When setting the menu parameters, make sure the associated process is observed and protected.
PID FLOW CONTROLLER / SAMPLER CONTROL CONSTANTS
Nomination: function ______ Status ______
- - - PID - - - - - DO #1 SAMPLE OUTPUT - - -
ENABLE
SETPOINT
______ SAMPLER FUNCTION ______
__________ ______ SAMPLER VOLUME ______ ______
GAIN
INTEGRAL
DERIVATIVE
______ SAMPLER PULSE WIDTH ______ ______
______ ______ - - - DO #2 SAMPLE OUTPUT - - -
______ ______
UNC SAMPLER ______
DEADBAND
SPAN
______ ______ UNC SAMPLE VOLUME ______ ______
__________ ______ UNC SAMPLE PLS WIDTH _____ ______
VALVE TRAVEL TIME ______ ______
PROCESS LIMITING ______ (ENABLE = 8 SEC, DISABLE = NO LIMIT)
FLOW RATE __________ ______
Figure F-28 - PID Flow Controller/Sampler Control Constants Menu
SETPOINT
This field contains the operating point at which the flow rate is to be controlled. The setpoint units are MSCFH with a default setting of 1000 MSCF per Hour. To change the setpoint value, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once the new value has been typed in, press the INS key.
GAIN
The GAIN controls the amount of output change resulting from a change of the measured variable. The default value of 1.00 is typically used as a starting point; final gain is usually less. To change the Gain, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
INTEGRAL
The INTEGRAL determines the time it will take the PID to correct an error in the measured variable. The time is specified in repeats per minute. An entry of 1 can be used as a starting point; this would provide one (1) repeat per minute. To change the Integral setting, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-27
DERIVATIVE
DERIVATIVE compensates for a rapidly changing measured variable. The time is specified in seconds (SECS) and most applications will use a setting of zero (0). To change the Derivative value, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
DEADBAND
The DEADBAND provides a means of specifying a 'window' in which the variable does not affect the output. This entry is in percent (%) of the SETPOINT signal. As an example, a 5% entry would mean that the controller output must exceed the present setpoint by
5% before the output is changed. To change the Deadband value, press the PAGE UP
(PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
SPAN
This entry sets the SPAN for the PID CONTROLLER in (MSCFH). The controller uses this value (default = 5000 MSCFH) to convert the actual flow rate to percent for use by the PID controller; therefore, this value should be set as closely as possible to the expected operating maximum. To change the Span value, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
VALVE TRAVEL TIME
Valve Travel Time is the amount of time it takes an external valve to go from being fully open to fully closed (or visa-versa). The default value is 30 Seconds. To change the value of the Valve Travel Time, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
PROCESS LIMITING
Should the process variable not change by a certain amount within 8 seconds of the last change, an open condition is assumed and PID output stops. This automatic limiting can be disabled.
FLOW RATE
The Flow Rate value is Read Only data; it is the present calculated flow rate.
SAMPLER FUNCTION
The Sampler Function enables pulsing of Discrete Output #1 after a determined volume of gas has accumulated. Pressing the [PAGE UP] key and then pressing the INS key will clear the Enable/Disable displayed state of the Sampler Function and the following the prompt will appear at the bottom of the menu: DO YOU WISH TO TURN THIS SIGNAL
TO ITS ENABLED (TRUE) STATE?
If so, press the INS Key again; if not, type N.
SAMPLER VOLUME
The Sampler Volume is the volume of gas which must pass before a pulse is generated.
This value is in MSCF with a default of 100 MSCF. To change the Sampler value, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
F-28 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
SAMPLER PULSE WIDTH
The Sampler Pulse Width is the amount of time (in seconds) that the Discrete Output #1 will remain ON when a pulse is generated. The default value is 1 second. To change the value of the Sampler Pulse Width, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display.
Type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
UNC SAMPLER
The UNC Sampler enables pulsing of Discrete Output #2 after a determined volume of gas has accumulated. Pressing the [PAGE UP] key and then pressing the INS key will clear the Enable/Disable displayed state of the Sampler Function and the following the prompt will appear at the bottom of the menu: DO YOU WISH TO TURN THIS SIG-NAL
TO ITS ENABLED (TRUE) STATE?
If so, press the INS Key again; if not, type N.
UNC SAMPLE VOLUME
The UNC Sample Volume is the volume of gas which must pass before a pulse is generated. This value is in ACF with a default of 100 ACF. To change the Sampler value, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display and then type the desired value.
Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
UNC SAMPLE PULSE WIDTH
The UNC Sample Pulse Width is the amount of time (in seconds) that the Discrete Output #2 will remain ON when a pulse is generated. The default value is 1 second. To change the value of the Sampler Pulse Width, press the PAGE UP (PgUp) key to clear the display. Type the desired value. Once this value has been typed, press the INS key.
F.8.3.6 Nominations
The nomimations feature provides the user with the ability to set the TeleFlow to allocate precise amounts of gas flow during specific periods of time. These periods are called nomination periods . A nomination period may be set for any duration of time (not to exceed one month). The volume to be delivered (nominated) during a nomination period is the target . The target may be specified in terms of volume or energy. The user sets a nomination period by keying in the desired day of the month and hour to begin the period and the desired day of the month and hour to end the period. The daily nomination feature is used if the user desires the same start/stop times every day. A TeleFlow programmed with a daily nomination, will ignore the programmed start and end day numbers and will perform the nomination in question at the same time once per day.
The delivery of the nominated quantity (volume or energy during the nomination period) may be performed via one of the two unique schemes listed below.
The fast approach
The fast approach method permits full flow of gas through the meter in order to arrive at the target (volume or energy) as quickly as possible without regard to the programmed end time.
The PID method
The PID method sets the TeleFlow to calculate the time remaining in the nomination period and the remaining volume/energy required by the nomination and internally
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-29
enables the PID flow control algorithm in order to hit the target volume/energy at exactly the programmed end time.
Figure F-29 - Nominations Configuration Menu
The user programs the TeleFlow to either close the valve upon reaching the target or leave it in its last position.
Nomination Operation
Enabling the Nomination Function
The nomination function runs once per calculation cycle after the volume and energy accumulations have been updated by the TeleFlow. To setup and enable this feature follow the steps below.
1. Setup of the nominations feature depends on the desired control mode selection, i.e., the Fast approach mode or PID mode. The default control mode for nomination is the Fast ap-proach mode. If the desired control mode is the Fast approach mode, proceed to step 2; however, if the desired control mode selection is the PID mode, you must first program all the PID tuning parameters (see Section F.8.3.5 - Figure F-28) such as gain and integral. DO NOT enable the
PID flow control algorithm or the TeleFlow will automatically disable nomination. When properly configured the TeleFlow will automatically enable the PID flow control algorithm during nomination periods. When the menu of Figure F-28 has been con-figured and the nominations feature has been enabled, return to the Read/Write Con-figurable Data Menu
(Figure F-19).
F-30 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
2. Select the Nominations Configuration Menu (Figure F-29) via the Nominations poke point on the Read/Write Configurable Data Menu (Figure F-19). The operator should select the
VERIFY/SET Time and Date poke point prior to making new entries.
A description of the menu entries (Figure 3-29) used to implement the nomination function follows:
NOMINATION CONTROL - This section of the Nominations Configuration Menu provides the following six areas for nomination setup/selection:
Main function
The Main function selection is used to enable/disable the nomination function. If this signal is set to the disable state, nomination will not occur.
Quantity units
The Quantity units selection is used to set the target units as MCF or MMBTU.
Control mode
Control mode provides for the selection of either the Fast approach or PID modes of nomination operation.
Stop mode
The Stop mode selection allows the user to automatically have the valve closed, i.e., shut-in on stop mode, or left in the last position upon reaching the target (or programmed end period).
Daily only mode
When Daily mode is enabled, only the programmed start and end hours are used by the
TeleFlow; the Start/Stop days are ignored, i.e., nomination begins and ends within a 24 hour period every day.
Alarm at a level of
The Alarm at a level of setting can be configured as percentage of Volume (MCF) or Energy
(MMBTU). This feature allows the TeleFlow to provide an alarm (logical nomination alarm) or indication to an operator or computer that a specified amount of target has been reached.
The number entered (1 to 100) sets the percentage at which the logical nomination alarm will occur. If the dialout on nomination signal is set (see Figure 3-35), the TeleFlow will initiate a phone dialout according to the normal operation of the dialout feature. The status of this setting, i.e., whether or not a nomination alarm has occured, can be determined via the
Alarm Status Information Menu (see Figure F-37).
Status
The Status signal is an output of the nominations algorithm that indicates whether there is currently a nominations period in progress. The user may change the state of this signal to end an in progress nomination immediately, or to start the next period immediately (see
Manually Starting/Ending a Nomination Period).
CURRENT NOMINATION PERIOD - This section allows the operator to view the following information associated with a nomination which is currently in progress:
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-31
Start: day/hour
The actual time and day of the month when the current nomination period started is displayed. This may be the programmed time or the time at which an operator manually started a period.
Stop: day/hour
The programmed end time and day of the month at which the current nomination period will end. If using the Fast approach mode, the period may end sooner, i.e., when the target is reached. If using the daily nomination feature, the stop date (day) will show 0 to indicate that only the hour matters.
Target value
The Target value provides the value of Volume/Energy to be delivered during this period.
Amount delivered
The Amount Delivered reading provides the actual amount of volume/energy delivered so far during this period.
Percent elapsed time
This signal shows the percentage of time which has elapsed for the current nomination period, e.g., 4 hours into a 100 hour nomination period would cause this value to be 4.0.
Percent delivered
This signal provides the percentage of target delivered to this point in the current nomination period.
NEXT NOMINATION PERIOD - This section allows the operator to set/view the following parameters associated with the next nomination which is to be programmed (has been programmed): Note: New entries must be made prior to the ending of the current nomination period.
Start: day/hour
The actual start day (1-31) and start hour (0-23) when the next nomination period is to start is displayed or entered, and is ignored if the daily nomination feature is enabled.
Stop: day/hour
The actual stop day (1-31) and stop hour (1-23) when the next nomination period is to end, is displayed or entered, and is ignored if the daily nomination feature is enabled.
Target value
The Target value provides (is used to set) the value of Volume/Energy to be delivered during the next nomination period.
LAST NOMINATION PERIOD - This section allows the operator to view information associated with the last nomination period which was completed. The information displayed remains valid until the next time a nomination period ends (when the information is upgraded to reflect the new "last" nomination period. The start and end times stored here indicate the actual time that the nomination period ended, which is not necessarily the programmed time (because of the time required to close/open valves or complete other actions). The days are valid even if the daily nomination mode is active.
F-32 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
3. Program all the configuration items for the NEXT Nomination Period such as start and stop times and target value.
4. Set the desired parameters for NOMINATION CONTROL such as Quantity units , Control mode , Stop mode , Daily only mode and Alarm at a level of and then set the Main function signal to the Enable State.
5. If a radio or modem is to be used in conjunction with a "logical nomination alarm," access the
Radio Communications menu (Figure F-34) via the Radio/Modem Control poke point on the
ON-Line Functions Menu (Figure F-13). See Section F.8.5 to configure the radio or modem for logical nomination alarms.
Beginning a Nomination Period
When no nomination period is in progress, the TeleFlow compares the NEXT start date and time to the current time. If the date and time match (or time only for the daily nomination mode), a new period is begun. The current time is copied into the CURRENT START signals, and the next target is copied into the current target. The accumulators for the current period are zeroed and the current stop time is set to the next start time. If the PID mode is selected, a new flow setpoint is calculated and stored in the setpoint signal. The PID setpoint is recalculated every 15 minutes and whenever any parameter is changed.
Ending a Nomination Period
If the 'shut-in on stop' mode is in use, the current period end will end when the target accumulation is reached. At this time, the TeleFlow attempts to close the control valve. If PID control is being used, the setpoint is set to 0.0, the current cycle will ramp down accordingly. When the flow rate reaches 0.0, the current cycle accumulations and the actual end time are copied into the LAST signals. If the valve fails to close, the volume will continue to accumulate until until the programmed end time. If the shut-in on stop mode is not in use, the nomination period continues until the programmed end time.
Changing the Nomination Target
To change the target of the next period, the user should change the NEXT TARGET signal. If the operator wishes to change the target of a current period already in progress (re-nominate), the
CURRENT TARGET should be changed to the new value which reflects the total amount to be targeted for the period.
Manually Starting/Ending a Nomination Period
When no period is in progress, the user can immediately begin the NEXT period by setting the
Status signal to the ON state. The current start time will reflect the time that the user started the cycle. The target and stop times used will be those of the NEXT period. The user may immediately end a nomination period which is in progress by setting the Status signal to the OFF state. The current time will be stored as the LAST stop time.
F.8.3.7 Read/Write Configuration
Use the Read/Write Configuration Menu to:
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-33
Read a TeleFlow J configuration into a file on the PC.
Write a configuration file from the PC to the TeleFlow J .
View a configuration file already read.
READ/WRITE CONFIGURATION
---------------------------- PROCEDURE ------------------------------------
USE THESE POKE POINTS TO:
READ A TELECORRECTOR CONFIGURATION INTO A FILE ON THE PC
WRITE A CONFIGURATION FILE FROM THE PC TO THE TELECORRECTOR
VIEW A CONFIGURATION FILE ALREADY READ.
THIS TELECORRECTOR HAS A METER ID OF ________
THE CONFIGURATION FILE WILL BE NAMED ________.CFG
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
View/Change Drive/Directory
Read Configuration
Write Configuration
View the Configuration File
Select a Configuration File
Figure F-30 - Read/Write Configuration Menu
F.8.4 Transmitter Calibration/Verification
The TRANSMITTER CALIBRATION/VERIFICATION MENU is accessed from the Transmitter
Calibration poke point on either the ON-LINE FUNCTIONS MENU (levels 5 & 6) or the
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS MENU (Level 4). This menu provides access to verify calibration procedures and perform calibration procedures.
Selection of a Verification poke point automatically turns the calibration mode signal ON and invokes the appropriate Verification menu. When the calibration mode signal is turned ON, the
TeleFlow Corrector automatically freezes the P, and T variables at there current value.
The individual Verification Menus are identical except for the variable being verified.
The Calibration Menus have been customized to aid the Technician or Engineer who is performing or checking a TeleFlow J Corrector calibration(s). A Help Menu can be accessed by pressing F2. The Help Menu displayed is dependent upon the screen you are in when you press the F2 key.
F.8.4.1 Verification
The Verification menus for pressure (P) and temperature (T) are virtually identical except for the variable being verified.
The Verification menu contains the procedure required to perform the verification process. The live value for the variable being processed is displayed below the procedure. The verification procedure consists of applying a known test value to the variable being verified and waiting for the live value to stabilize. The ENTER key is used to indicate that this has occurred.
F-34 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
TRANSMITTER CALIBRATION / VERIFICATION
VERIFICATION PROCEDURES:
Verify Static Pressure (GP) Calibration
Verify Temperature (T) Calibration
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES:
Calibrate Gauge (Static) Pressure (GP)
Calibrate Temperature RTD (T)
Figure F-31 - Transmitter Calibration/Verification Menu
When the ENTER key is pressed, the user is prompted to enter the test value applied to the input. Entering the applied value causes an Audit/Event record to be written to the Teleflow
Corrector. This Audit/Event records contains an indication of which variable is being verified, the applied test value, and the actual live value.
The user may apply as many test values as needed.
F.8.4.2 Calibration Procedures
Calibration of Static Pressure
GAUGE PRESSURE (GP) CALIBRATION
DATA PLATE URL: 300 PSI
LIVE GP VALUE: 0.063 PSI
CALIBRATE ZERO
CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN
See help menu (F2) for calibration procedure.
Figure F-32 - Static Pressure (SP) Calibration Menu
The gauge pressure sensor of the TeleFlow Corrector is used to measure static pressure (SP) of the gas run.
1. Connect a precision test pressure source (±.025%) to the GP input of the Corrector.
2. Apply a test pressure equivalent to 0% of the desired GP range.
Example 1: If a range of 0 to 100 psi is chosen for a GP sensor with an upper range of 300 psi, 0% would be equal to 0 psi.
3. Move the cursor to the CALIBRATE ZERO poke point and observe the LIVE SP VALUE.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-35
4. Once the reading in the LIVE SP VALUE has stabilized, press the INS key to enter the pressure value.
5. Apply a pressure that is 15% to 100% of the transmitter's pressure range.
Example 2: If a range is 0 to 100 psi as cited in the previous example, 100% of the range would be equivalent to 100 psi. A lower value, down to 15 psi, could also be used.
6. Move the cursor to the CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN poke point.
7. Observe the LIVE SP VALUE field and note the applied pressure.
8. Once this value has stabilized, press the INS key.
9. Type in the applied pressure value in response to the prompt and press the INS key.
10. If, after calibrating and re-connecting the unit to the process, it is determined that the reading in the LIVE SP VALUE field does not agree with an external pressure indicating device, an offset correction may be performed. Proceed to the next step.
11. Apply a 0% test pressure to the TeleFlow Corrector and the monitoring device. Calculate the zero shift necessary to correlate the floating point number to external device reading.
Example 3: Assume that the GP sensor has an upper range limit of 300 psi and is calibrated to a 0 to 100 psi range. If the external monitoring device reads 1.4000 when the SP VALUE is 0.0, the difference is 0 - 1.4 = -1.4. A zero shift entry of -1.4 would return the reading to zero.
Calibration of RTD Temperature
1. Disconnect the regular RTD sensor and connect a 100 Ohm (± .025%) precision resistor across the RTD terminals (which is equivalent to 32 F).
2. Move cursor to CALIBRATE ZERO poke point.
3. Observe LIVE T VALUE.
4. When LIVE T VALUE stabilizes press [INS] key to calibrate the RTD Zero.
5. Disconnect the resistor of step 1 and connect a 140 Ohm (± .025%) precision resistor across the RTD terminals (which is equivalent to 220 F).
6. Move the cursor to the CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN poke point.
7. Observe LIVE T VALUE.
8. When LIVE T VALUE stabilizes press [INS] key to calibrate the RTD Operating Span.
F-36 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION OF RTD
SELECT DISPLAY UNITS
LIVE READING: +76.031 Degrees F
CALIBRATE ZERO (AT 100 OHMS)
CALIBRATE OPERATING SPAN
ADJUST LIVE READING
See help menu (F2) for calibration procedure.
Figure F-33 - Temperature Calibration of RTD Menu
9. If after re-connecting the unit to the process it is determined that the number in the LIVE
T VALUE field does not correlate with that measured by an external process monitoring device, offset compensation may be performed. Select the ADJUST LIVE READINGS poke point and press [INS]. This allows a linear shift of the RTD temperature span, e.g., if at
68 F the Live Reading value is 68.5
F, the error is .5
F. To correct this error enter 68 at the prompt.
F.8.5 Radio Communications Set-up & Modem Configuration
The Radio Communications Set-up Menu is accessible for users at security level 5 or 6 by selecting the Radio Control poke point on the On-Line Functions Menu. The information on this display is Read/Write for both level 5 and level 6.
Hourly and Local set-up columns are provided to facilitate Hourly (timed) or Local control of the
TeleFlow J radio. Radio Enable is implemented by providing control of the Auxiliary Power
Output.
ENABLE
Is used to enable Hourly or Local control of the radio. Enabling the Hourly radio scheduling causes the TeleFlow J to automatically turn on the radio (via the auxiliary power output) once per hour. Enabling the Local turn-on causes the TeleFlow J to immediately turn on the radio, and then reset the enable signal (back to the disable state). To Enable either feature, place the cursor on the appropriate selection and press the Page Up key followed by pressing the Insert key. Select Y from the following message: Do you wish to turn this signal to its Enable (TRUE) state? Y/N
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-37
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SET-UP
HOURLY LOCAL
ENABLE
REMAIN ACTIVE FOR
________ ________
________ Secs ________ Secs
TIMEOUT IF NO COMM AFTER ________ Secs ________ Secs
POLL ENABLE START HOUR ________
START OFFSET INTO HOUR
START OFFSET MINUTES
________ Secs
________
POLL ENABLE END HOUR ________
START OFFSET SECONDS ________
POLL TIME PER NODE ________ POLL TIME PER GROUP ________
AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT DEFAULT ________
RTS DELAY MODE ________ RTS TRANSMIT DELAY ________ msec
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RADIO SENSING ________
START HOUR
TURN ON RADIO EVERY
________ END HOUR ________
________ Secs KEEP RADIO ON FOR ________ msec
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
RADIO SHUTDOWN ________
PRESS F8 FOR MODEM DIAL SETUP
Figure F-34 - Radio Communications Setup Menu
REMAIN ACTIVE FOR
Is the maximum amount of time that the radio will remain active for (at the selected time), i.e., the "Enabled Time," before the radio will shutoff due to the lack of a received radio poll.
TIMEOUT IF NO COMM AFTER
Is the amount of time that the radio will remain enabled after successful communications have been established and completed. After each successful communication, the TeleFlow J radio will remain active for the time period specified under TIMEOUT IF NO COMM AFTER before shutting down. If during this period another message is received, the radio will remain active.
START OFFSET MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS
These are calculated variables which specify the time (On Time) within each hour that the radio will be enabled. This time is derived as follows: On Time = [(Time Per Node x (Local
Address -1)) + (Time Per Group x Group Number) + Start Time Offset]. If the minutes is set to 12 and the seconds is set to 42, the radio will be turned on at 12 minutes and 42 seconds after the hour. These signals may be control inhibited for testing purposes. If the user control inhibits these signals, the user-entered time will determine when the radio is turned on, and the calculated values will be ignored by the TeleFlow J .
POLL ENABLE START HOUR & POLL ENABLE END HOUR
Specifies the 0 to 23 hour time period within which the TeleFlow J radio Hourly Enable feature will be active. The radio will be enabled once per hour within this time period. These signals may be used to permit polling only during a specific time frame (such as daylight or normal office hours) each day. This will save the power required to turn on the radio when polling is desired.
F-38 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
START OFFSET INTO HOUR
Specifies a user supplied offset which is used when computing the radio "On Time." The Start
Offset Into Hour is one of the factors used to calculate the "On Time" (see START OFFSET
MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS).
POLL TIME PER NODE
Sets the duration of time (in seconds) allocated for communications per node. The Poll Time
Per Node time is one of the factors used to calculate the "On Time" (see START OFFSET
MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS).
POLL TIME PER GROUP
Sets the duration of time (in seconds) allocated for communications per group. The Poll Time
Per Group time is one of the factors used to calculate the "On Time" (see START OFFSET
MINUTES & START OFFSET SECONDS).
AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT DEFAULT
Determines if the TeleFlow'w Auxiliary Power Output is set ON or OFF when power is initially applied to the TeleFlow. This allows radios to be powered up initially and then turn-off after a 'no comm' interval.
RTS DELAY MODE (Network Port)
Select either TIMER or CTS.
RTS TRANSMIT DELAY (Network Port)
Set the Delay Time when time when the mode is TIMER.
RADIO SHUTDOWN
Is used to force a radio to turn-off. When the host issues this command, the remote will keep the radio on just long enough to reply back to the master. Issue this command to save battery power at a remote TeleFlow. This is the last command you can send to a remote unit.
RADIO SENSING
Radio sensing allows a user to activate the radio for very short time intervals (specified in milliseconds under LISTEN) every so many seconds (specified in seconds under INTERVAL) to 'sense' a valid BSAP message on the radio's carrier frequency. If a message is not detected, the radio is deactivated. If a message is detected, the radio is left activated until it responds after which it remains ON for another LISTEN time interval. If no more valid messages are detected, the radio returns to 'sense' mode. This mode allows the system to use as little energy as possible to detect traffic throughout the day. Energy usage depends on the activation time and activation rate (INTERVAL). Assuming a 1 watt radio then a 200 millisecond listening period every 5 seconds is equivalent to .04 watts. Users can configure the Interval and Rate
(Listening period) to suit their energy needs. Radio Sensing occurs between the START HOUR and END HOUR specified by the operator.
F.8.5.1 Modem Configuration
The menu of Figure F-35 provides for modem communications and dial-out setup. This menu is accessed from the Radio Communications Setup Menu (Figure F-34).
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-39
MODEM CONFIGURATION AND DIAL-OUT SETUP
DIAL ENABLE
MODEM INITIALIZATION
PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER
ALTERNATE PHONE NUMBER
MAX DIALS PER HOUR
______
_________________________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
______ (3 tries per attempt)
----------------------------------- DIAL-OUT CONDITIONS ----------------------------------------
LOW FLOW CUTOFF ALARM
TRANSMITTER FAILURE
FLOATING POINT ERROR
VOLUME REACHED ALARM
______
______ RAM BATTERY LOW ALARM ______
______ SELF-CHECK FAILURE ______
______ STATIC PRESSURE ALARM ______
TEMPERATURE ALARM
BATTERY VOLTAGE ALARM
______ FLOW RATE ALARM
BATTERY OVERCHARGE ALARM ______ NOMINATION ALARM
______
______ AUXILIARY INPUT ALARM ______
______
Figure F-35 - Modem Configuration & Dial-Out Setup Menu
If the internal 9600 bps modem is installed, this menu can be used to configure automatic dialout when an alarm occurs.
Enable the conditions at which dial-out should occur, enter the primary and alternate phone numbers (example: 860-945-2200), then set Dial Enable to Enable.
The equipment at the location being dialed MUST be able to recognize the call as coming from a remote and then must be able to poll for alarm information from the TeleFlow J .
DIAL ENABLE
After the rest of this menu has been set up, set this signal to ENABLE to activate automatic dial-out.
MODEM INITIALIZATION
This string has been set to a default value for the internal 9600 bps modem, but it can be revised if necessary.
PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER
This is the number that will be called first when automatic dial-out is triggered by an enabled alarm condition. If three tries are unsuccessful, the secondary number is called.
ALTERNATE PHONE NUMBER
This number is called if the primary number cannot be reached. If three tries are unsuccessful, calling stops.
MAX DIALS PER HOUR
Regardless of the number of enabled alarms that have occurred, the system will not attempt to call out each hour more than the number of times specified here. This number is thus used to manage the energy drain from a battery powered system by limiting the number of times per hour that the modem can be 'awakened' to its full-power mode.
F-40 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
Alarms not reported in one hour will be reported in the next hour.
F.8.6 Serial Port Information Menu
The Serial Port Information Menu is accessible from the On-Line Functions Menu for users at security level 5 or 6. The information on this display is Read/Write for both levels 5 and 6.
SERIAL PORT INFORMATION
Port Type BSAP
Local Baud Rate ______ ______
Network Baud Rate ______ ______
RTS Delay Mode ______
RTS Transmit Delay ______ ______
Figure F-36 - Serial Port Information Menu
PORT TYPE
Network Port communications protocol; BSAP.
LOCAL BAUD RATE
The baud rate of the Local Port.
NETWORK BAUD
The baud rate of the Network Port.
RTS DELAY MODE (Network Port)
The default mode is TIMER, meaning that the TeleFlow will assert RTS but ignor CTS and instead wait for a time interval before sending characters on the serial port. The wait-time interval is established by the value of the RTS TRANSMIT DELAY setting.
When the RTS DELAY MODE is changed to CTS, the TeleFlow asserts RTS and then waits for
CTS to be 'true' before sending characters. Always use the CTS mode when the 9600 bps internal modem is being used for automatic dial-out.
RTS TRANSMIT DELAY (Network Port)
Set the Delay Time when the mode is TIMER.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-41
F.8.7 Alarm Status Menu
The Alarm Status Display is accessed from the Main Menu for security levels 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. The information on this display is Read Only from any level.
PRESSURE Pf
Indicates the alarm state of the static pressure input (OKAY or ALARM).
TEMPERATURE Tf
Indicates the alarm state of the temperature input (OKAY or ALARM).
ALARM STATUS INFORMATION
PRESSURE Pf ALARM/ OKAY TEMPERATURE Tf ALARM/ OKAY
CORR FLOW RATE ALARM/ OKAY UNCORR FLOW RATE ALARM/ OKAY
SYSTEM VOLTAGE ALARM/ OKAY RAM BATTERY ALARM/ OKAY
AUXILIARY INPUT ALARM/ OKAY CORRECTOR VOLUME ALARM/OKAY
NOMINATION ALARM/ OKAY
Figure F-37 - Alarm Status Information Menu
CORR FLOW RATE
Indicates the status of the corrected flow rate per hour. If the corrected flow rate per hour is outside the limits for high alarm and low alarm, set on an Alarm Configuration Menu (see
Figures F-24, F-25 & F-26), this reading will indicate ALARM.
UNCORR FLOW RATE
Indicates the status of the uncorrected flow rate per hour. If the uncorrected flow rate per hour is outside the limits for high alarm and low alarm, set on an Alarm Configuration Menu
(see Figures F-24, F-25 & F-26), this reading will indicate ALARM.
SYSTEM VOLTAGE
The supply voltage (= Greater Power Source, PWR1 or PWR2) to the TeleFlow is monitored internally and this reading will indicate ALARM if the voltage falls below 6 volts (default) or
OKAY when the voltage rises above 6.5 volts (default). These limits are user configurable (see
Figure F-26 - Alarm Configuration Menu Page 3 of 4).
RAM BATTERY
The internal RAM backup battery on the CPU board is tested every 4 seconds or the calculation interval, whichever is slower. If the voltage is less than 3.0 volts then this reading will indicate ALARM, otherwise it reads OKAY.
F-42 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
AUXILIARY INPUT
Indicates the status of the Auxiliary Input. If the value of the auxiliary input falls outside the limits for high alarm and low alarm, set on the Alarm Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-24), this reading will indicate ALARM.
CORRECTOR VOLUME
Indicates the status of the Volume of Gas accumulated today. If the value of the corrector volume falls outside the limits for high alarm and low alarm, set on the Alarm Configuration
Menu (see Figure 3-25), this reading will indicate ALARM.
NOMINATION
Indicates if the corrected colume has exceeded its High-alarm Limit (the Nomination Volume).
F.8.8 Set Time Menu
The Set Time Menu (not shown) allows the user to set the time in the TeleFlow J . The time in the PC is sent to the TeleFlow J on command.
Note: Make sure that the current time in the PC is correct before invoking this function.
F.8.9 Special Functions Menu
The Special Functions Menu is accessed from the On-Line Functions Menu for users at security level 6.
The Special Functions Menu of Figure F-38 is used to perform certain configuration tasks which may be necessary, such as resetting the TeleFlow J Corrector hardware to its default conditions, or changing the local address of the unit. This menu provides the following selections:
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
Reset Hardware
Change Local Address
Change Group Number
Charge Regulator set-up
List Configuration
Change System Volume, Rate, or other unit
Archive Edit
Figure F-38 - Special Functions Menu
F.8.9.1 RESET HARDWARE
Select this poke point to call up the Reset Node Menu. This menu allows you to Reset the
TeleFlow to factory default conditions. When a Hardware Reset occurs all stored (archived) data
(input and setup) are lost.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-43
F.8.9.2 CHANGE LOCAL ADDRESS
Select this point to change the TeleFlow node address used for local (PC to TeleFlow) or
(TeleFlow to BSAP Network) communications. The factory default address is 1. There are no address switches in the TeleFlow; the address may only be changed by this poke point. Address changes are usually required when the TeleFlow is placed in a network as a slave node to other
Bristol Babcock devices, such as the DPC 3330.
F.8.9.3 CHANGE GROUP NUMBER
The group Number is used with the Expanded BSAP Communications option. The value of this number may be from 1 to 127. The Group Number is only supported on the Network Port.
F.8.9.4 CHARGE REGULATOR SET-UP
The menu of Figure F-39 (Charge Regulator Set-Up Menu) is used to configure the charging characteristics of the battery used in conjunction with the Solar Panel option. Factory default settings are shown in Figure F-39. Configuration of the battery charge parameters may be accomplished as follows:
To disable the battery charge regulator, place the cursor on Enable and press the Page Up key followed by pressing the Insert key. Select N from the following message: Do you wish to turn this signal to its Disable (FALSE) state? Y/N.
REGULATOR DELAY
Is the amount of time that the charge regulator dissipates power for after the battery voltage rises above the cutoff threshold.
CHARGE REGULATOR SET-UP
WARNING!! The following parameters are related to the battery charge
charge regulator system. Modification of these parameters
should only be performed by personnel knowledgeable of the
battery system installed.
CHARGE REGULATOR
REGULATOR DELAY
Enabl
30 Mins
NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE 12 Volts
CHARGE VOLTAGE 14.4 Volts
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT 20 mv/deg
Figure F-39 - Charge Regulator Set-Up Menu
F-44 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE
Should be set to 6 or 12 volts depending on the battery installed in the TeleFlow J . Changing this value from 12 to 6 volts will cause the charge voltage value to change from 14.4 to 7.2 volts and the Temp. Coefficient to change from 20 to 10 mv/deg.
CHARGE VOLTAGE
Is the battery voltage level which when exceeded causes the charge regulator to turn on
Auxiliary Power (or DTR when a modem is present) to dissipate excess energy from the solar panel. The charge voltage is specified for an ambient temperature of 77 F. This value will change as the value of the NOMINAL BATTERY VOLTAGE changes.
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT
Is the change in CHARGE VOLTAGE with ambient temperature. The value (negative) is expressed in mv/deg (F) and will be 20 mv/deg (default) for a 12 volt battery and 10 mv/deg
(default) for a 6 volt battery. These defaults will be set automatically when the NOMINAL
BATTERY VOLTAGE is set.
Note: These values affect the "Threshold Voltage," i.e., the battery voltage level at which the charge regulator becomes active (connects a load to dissipate excess energy produced by the solar panel). An increase in the "Threshold Voltage" occurs with a decrease in temperature, and vice-versa. The Threshold Voltage (V where:
THRESHOLD
) is cal-culated by the
TeleFlow firmware according to the following equation: V
THRESHOLD
= V
77
- (V
TC
. (T
BOARD
- 77)
V
V
THRESHOLD
77
V
TC
is the temperature compensated threshold voltage.
is the threshold voltage at 77 --- F (25 --- C) = 14.4V (12V Battery) or 7.2V (6V Battery).
is the temperature coefficient = 20mV (12V Battery) or 10mV (6V Battery). The temperature coefficient is always negative (when temperature increases, the threshold voltage descreases). The temperature coefficient is entered as a positive value; so it is subtracted in the formula.
T board
is the TeleFlow CPU board temperature in degrees F. 77 is subtracted from this number to normalize the equation to 0 degrees F.
Table F-3 - CHARGE REGULATOR SET-UP ASSIGNMENT
Term
Regulator enabled
Threshold Voltage (@ 77 F)
Hysteresis voltage
Delay period
Temperature coefficient
Floor voltage
Ceiling voltage
6V
Yes
7.2V
Threshold - (0.5V)
30 Min.
10mV/ F
6.5V
8.5V
Yes
12V
20mV/ F
13.0V
16V
User
Changed By
14.4V
User, 6/12 Switch
Threshold - (1V) Fixed
30 Min.
User
User, 6/12V Switch
Fixed
Fixed
If the calculated threshold voltage is greater than the ceiling voltage, the ceiling voltage is substituted. The ceiling voltage helps guard against overvoltage which might occur at cold temperaturs. Every second, the battery voltage is compared to the threshold voltage. If the
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-45
battery voltage exceeds the threshold voltage, the regulator becomes active. Under normal conditions, the threshold voltage is reached only when the battery is at or near full charge.
The regulator goes from active to inactive when any of the following conditions occur: a) The delay period elapses after the battery voltage has dropped below the hysteresis voltage.
b) The battery voltage drops below the floor voltage.
c) The user disables the charge regulator.
F.8.9.5 LIST CONFIGURATION
This menu displays the lists of signals that will scroll by when the LCD display is activated. The list can be edited (made smaller or larger) as required by the user's neeeds. Lists in the
TeleFlow which may be edited are lists #50 (LCD Display), 51, 52 and 53. Edit functions provided by the menu include READ/WRITE a list from the TeleFlow, INSERT an entry into the list,
DELETE an entry from the list, and MODIFY an existing item in the list.
Inserting an entry into a list is performed using the ENTER Key when the cursor is positioned on a list entry poke-point. Insertion occurs BEFORE the entry selected. Space must be available in the selected list or the insert request will be denied. The Signal name of the new entry must be entered; no blank entries are allowed in the list. Signal names are validated as they are entered.
Deleting an entry from a list is performed by positioning the cursor at the Signal Name field and then entering Edit Mode (via the ENTER or INS Key). Once in Edit Mode, clearing the field and depressing the ENTER Key causes the entry to be deleted.
Modifying an entry in a list is performed by positioning the cursor to the Signal Name field and then entering Edit Mode (via the ENTER or INS Key). Once in Edit Mode the Signal Name may be modified. Pressing the Enter Key causes the new Signal name to be validated.
F.8.9.6 CHANGE SYSTEM VOLUME, RATE OR OTHER UNITS
Select this poke point on the Special Functions Menu (Figure F-38) to evoke the System Units
Change Menu (Figure F-40).
This menu allows the user to select different sets of units for volume, rate, energy and other quantities used by the system. English or Metric units are selectable.
Default units (factory set) are:
Pressure (psig)
Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit)
Corrected volume (MSCF) (implies MSCFH rate)
Unc volume (ACF) (implies ACFH rate)
Energy (MMBtu) (implies MMBtuh rate)
Unit selections available are:
Pressure: psia, psig, Pascal (Pa), kiloPascal (kPa), mmHg, inH
Temperature: Fahrenheit, Celsius
2
O,kg-cm 2
F-46 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
Corr volume: SCF ,CSCF, MSCF, m 3 , hecto-cubic-meter (hm 3 ), mega-cubic-meter(Mm 3 )
Unc volume: ACF, CACF, MACF, m 3 , hm 3 , Mm 3
Energy: MMBtu, dekaTherm, MegaJoule, GigaJoule, kg-cal
Any combination of units is allowed.
To change the system units, change the System Mode signal from Run to Config, then select the new units, then set the Mode back to Run. Pressure (and other) units are selected by number, and the adjacent field will show the text for that unit.
SYSTEM UNITS CHANGE
----------------------------------------------- WARNING!!--------------------------------------------------------
POTENTIAL FOR TOTAL DATA LOSS ON THIS MENU !!!!!
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Once the SYSTEM MODE signal on this menu has been changed to CONFIG
then changing ANY OTHER signal on the menu and setting the MODE back to
RUN will indicate to the TeleCorr that the System Units are being changed.
All Audit, Archive, Alarm and other data will be destroyed, and the system will
start clean using the new units. Save the existing database BEFORE changing
units if it must be retained.
SYSTEM MODE ______
PRESSURE UNITS
UNCORR VOL UNIT
______ ______
______ ______
TEMPERATURE UNIT ______
ENERGY UNITS ______ ______
CORR VOL UNIT ______ ______
K FACTOR UNIT _____
-------------------------------CONVERSION FACTORS NOW IN USE-------------------------------
PRESSURE CONV
VOLUME CONV
HEATING CONV
________ ______
________ ______
________ ______
K FACTOR CONV ________ ______
ENERGY CONV ________ ______
Figure F-40 - System Units Change Menu
***** WARNING WARNING WARNING ********
This menu can cause complete and total loss of all existing archive and other accumulated data in the Teleflow - DO NOT change anything on the menu until all existing archives have been collected (if they are important). When the Mode is set to Config and new units are selected and the Mode is set back to Run, an entire new database is generated for the Teleflow just as if the unit had received a new set of firmware and cleared it's data base! This occurs so that the Teleflow begins all calculations and totalizations with the new units. DO NOT make frivolous changes on this menu - the penalty is loss of all data!
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-47
F.8.9.7 ARCHIVE EDIT
This menu allows a user to edit the content and size of the three Archive files in the TeleFlow
Corrector by editing their respective Archive File Definitions. When editing is completed, all three Archive file definitions can be saved to a PC file. A PC file can be written directly to the
TeleFlow Corrector. This allows a user to edit Archive file definitions once, save them in a file, then write the file contents to a different TeleFlow.
Note: When an edited Archive file is written to the TeleFlow Corrector, or if a PC file is written to the TeleFlow Corrector, all existing Archive files (containing the historical record to that time) are destroyed. Do not make changes without saving the existing Archive data!
Note: TMS is delivered with default templates (.UHL files) used for the conversion of collected
Archive files to ASCII files. When Archives are edited the user must create new templates using the UOI software and must be sure that all instructions and PCs are using the revised templates.
Overview
A TeleFlow Corrector has three Archive files - Daily, Hourly, and Trending (15 minutes). These archives cannot be removed but their content can be changed using the On-line Archive editing function. To do archive editing on the TeleFlow or TeleFlow Corrector, use the TeleFlow Menu
System (TMS), select the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS menu, then select the ARCHIVE EDIT function.
Archives contain a sequence of records, each being stored in the archive at the end of the archive's time interval (Daily, Hourly, 15 Min). Records can contain up to 20 data fields with a data field containing one of the following:
ACCOL Analog signal - 4 byte
ACCOL Logical signal - 1 byte
Local Sequence number - 2 byte
Global Sequence number - 2 byte
Julian time - 4 byte
Julian time - 5 byte
The Archive editor only allows selection of ACCOL Analog or Logical signals for data fields. Data fields containing ACCOL Analog signals can have the following characteristics:
Average of signal for the time interval flow time
Straight time average over the interval
Average square root of signal for the interval flow time
Square of the average square root
Instantaneous value of the signal at the start? end? of the interval
Minimum value recorded during the interval
Maximum value recorded during the interval
Accumulation over the interval with automatic reset at the end of the interval
Integral of signal over flow time in units of hours
TeleFlow archives are Historical archives and as such they always contain a minimum of three data items; Julian time, Local sequence number and Global sequence number.
F-48 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
Editing Archives In The Product
Archives are edited by changing their definition. The main ARCHIVE EDIT (ARCED) menu allows a choice of either File or Product input. File input is used when an Archive's definition has been saved on disk. Product input is used when the definition is being changed in the TeleFlow.
When Product is selected all the archives in the product will be listed on the screen.
To edit a single archive move the cursor to the EDIT FILE poke point and press ENTER; type the archive number in response to the prompt and the display will then show all the Field definitions for a record in that archive. Use the F5 (INSERT), F6 (DELETE), or F7 (CHANGE) keys to modify the Field definitions of the record. The number of the records in the archive can be changed using the poke point on the top line of the menu.
All editing to this point has been done on a copy of the archive in the PC. Select WRITE
DEFINITION, and the new archive will be written to the product.
Repeat the above for all archives that are to be changed.
When archive editing has been completed, all Archive definitions in the product can be saved in a PC file for later reference. To save the definitions move to the main ARCED menu and select
WRITE TO FILE. Type in a unique file base name in response to the prompt; all the archive definitions in the product will be read (whether they were edited or not) and saved in the file under the name given with an extension of .def.
Editing Archive Definitions In Files
One or more files containing Archive definitions may reside on the PC. These definitions can be displayed on the edit menus when File input is selected. Files can only be reviewed - file content cannot be edited. When FILE INPUT is selected the local directory is searched for files with the extension .def, and the file names are listed on the screen so that one can be selected.
Writing Files To A Product
Archive definitions saved in a file can be written to a product from the ARCED menu by selecting
WRITE FILE TO PRODUCT. The local directory is searched for files with the extension .def, and those file names are displayed so that one can be selected. When a file is selected all the archive definitions in the file are written to the product.
This function allows archives to be edited and checked on one product and then saved to a file which can written to other products when necessary.
Archive Memory Usage
The Archive editor can be used to change both the size of a record (number of data fields) and the number of records in an archive. When an archive that exceeds the available RAM is written back to a TeleFlow the firmware will examine it and adjust it to fit the available memory by decreasing the number of records. The record count can be checked on the Archive Editor Main menu after the archive has been written to the TeleFlow Corrector.
The number of records should be maintained at a reasonable number for the archive involved, i.e., a record in the Daily Archive is for a 24 hour interval and atypical record count is 35 which is a little more than 1 month of entries. Sometimes 70 is used to obtain in excess of two months total when a site is visited infrequently.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-49
The interval for the Hourly Archive is 1 hour, and for 35 days the required record count is typically 35 * 24 = 840 records, 1680 records for 70 days.
For the 15 minute Trending Archive, the count is typically 4 * 24 * 35 = 3360 records, 6720 for
70 days.
Effect On TMS Archive Conversion To ASCII
The TeleFlow Menu System (TMS) is delivered with a TeleFlow.UHL file containing templates that provide formatting information to the UCS conversion function when collected archive files are converted to ASCII text. This Teleflow.UHL file was created by Bristol Babcock to match the archive file in the TeleFlow when it was manufactured and as such it expects data to be in specific locations in the file. When archives are edited and their size and/or content changes, a new UHL must be created for the new archive so that conversion will be done correctly. New
UHL files are generated using the Bristol Babcock UHS Linker.
When the template definition is changed in a UHS file users must remember that the first three data fields in a collected archive contain Julian date, Local sequence number and Global sequence number. The Teleflow.UHS file does not use the sequence numbers so the first data item column statement references 'column' 4 of the file. to convert the sequences numbers for display, column statements must be added that reference columns 2 and 3.
Effect Of Different Archive Sizes On TMS Usage
When TeleFlow Archive file sizes are changed and new UHS files are created, the user has in effect accepted both a bookkeeping and a file management responsibility.
The bookkeeping part involves making sure that all TeleFlows purchased from Bristol Babcock receive the revised Archive sizes before being installed in the field. Users must also be aware that TeleFlows returned to Bristol Babcock from the field for repair may have been restored to factory defaults during the repair process and may need to have new Archive sizes set.
The file management part involves making sure that all TMS users have the correct UHL file to use for conversion to ASCII and that 'custom' files have a unique name other than 'Teleflow.'
When custom UHL files are created they should not retain the 'Teleflow' file base name as this has potential for causing confusion should a set of unrevised files with the same name be used mistakenly. It is much better to rename the Teleflow.UMS, UCS and UHS files and then use them by stating TMS using the 'specific file' command switch; this requires typing TMS - fFNAME instead of just TMS.
Foe example, assume that a custom UHS file has been created and the UHS, UCS and UMS files have been renamed TFFX.UHS, .UCS and .UMS respectively. All three have been linked using the UMS, UCS and UHS Linkers to produce TFFX.UML, .UCLand .UHL files. The command line used to start TMS will now be TMS-fTFFX; this tells TMS to look for files named TFFX instead of Teleflow.
F.8.10 Security Maintenance
The menu of Figure F-41 (Signal Passcode Management Menu) lists all the security codes which were read from the TeleFlow Corrector and provides poke point functions to:
F-50 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
* Transfer security codes from this display to the TeleFlow Corrector.
* Transfer security codes from this display to a PC file SECAMS.DAT.
* Read a PC security file SECAMS.DAT into this display.
* Read the security codes from the TeleFlow Corrector and display them.
The TeleFlow Corrector is shipped with a default security code of name=SYSTEM, password=666666, access=6. A security code consists of a name/password/access-level combination.
New security codes are entered on this display.
Entering Security Codes
Up to 16 security codes can be stored in the TeleFlow Corrector. The codes are typed into fields of this display as required. By selecting the "Write Node" poke point and pressing the [INS] key, the entire contents of the display will be transferred to the TeleFlow Corrector. To modify a user entry, move the cursor to a blank line under the USER NAME column, type in the user name, and press [INS]. Then, move the cursor over to the PASSCODE column, type in the desired password, and press [INS]. Move the cursor to the ACCESS column and enter the appropriate access level.
Repeat this procedure for each code entry.
Read Node
SIGNAL PASSCODE MANAGEMENT
Read File Write Node Write File
USER NAME PASSCODE ACCESS USER NAME
1 SYSTEM____ 666666
2 __________ ______
3 __________ ______
4 __________ ______
5 __________ ______
6 __________ ______
7 __________ ______
8 __________ ______
6
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
13
14
15
16
__________
__________
__________
__________
PASSCODE
9 __________ ______
10 __________ ______
11 __________ ______
12 __________ ______
______
______
______
______
ACCESS
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Figure F-41 - Signal Passcode Management Menu
Access Levels
Six levels are provided. Level 6 access is typically reserved for engineers or technicians who require full access to all TeleFlow Corrector functions and parameters including special functions and security maintenance. Level 5 access provides for read/write configuration constants, collect logs, read gas flow information, perform transmitter calibration, read alarm status information, read serial port information, and set date and time. Level 4 is intended for those who are required to adjust (read/write) configuration data, plot trend data, view alarm data, collect logs and perform transmitter calibration functions. Level 3 is reserved for those requiring read-only access to view configuration data, plot trend data, view alarm data, and collect logs.
Level 2 users are allowed read-only access to view configuration data and plot trend data. The access level used at sign-on time determines the size of the ENTRY MENU after sign-on is completed.
Security Code Storage
All security codes are stored in the TeleFlow Corrector, not the PC, so each TeleFlow Corrector can have a unique set of personnel who are permitted access. Use the Write Node point to write the codes from the display to the TeleFlow Corrector.
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-51
In cases where a number of TeleFlow Correctors will store the same name/password/access combinations, the created table can be saved in a PC file and recalled at the next site for storage in the TeleFlow Corrector, thus eliminating the need to retype. For example, one 'master' table can be created and saved on the PC at one site, and then called up at each individual TeleFlow
Corrector site, modified as needed and then stored in the TeleFlow Corrector. Use the Write File point to write the security codes to a PC file.
Security Code Maintenance
Security codes are read from the TeleFlow Corrector at sign-on time and then displayed. To retrieve codes from a PC file use the Read File poke point; the codes will be read from the PC file into the display. Codes can be read from the TeleFlow Corrector to the display using the Read
Node poke point.
Figure F-41 provides the following poke points:
READ NODE
Use this to read the security codes from the TeleFlow Corrector and display them.
READ FILE
Read the SECAMS.DAT file and display the security codes.
WRITE NODE
Write the present display contents to the TeleFlow Corrector to store them.
WRITE FILE
Write the present display contents to a SECAMS.DAT file in the PC.
F.8.11 Maintenance Operations
(Security Levels 3 & 4)
The Maintenance Operations Menu (Figure F-42) is accessible to users at security levels 3 and
4. This menu provides one poke point; Transmitter Calibration (see Section F.8.4).
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS MENU
Transmitter Calibration
Sign-off and Exit
Figure F-42 - Maintenance Operations Menu
F.9 OFF LINE FUNCTIONS
The Off-line Functions menu is accessed if the Teleflow Menu System is started in Off-line mode.
The Off-line functions are limited conversion, display and/or printing reports associated with the
Archive, Audit/Event and Configuration Log data. There is no security associated with the Offline functions. The Off-Line Functions Menu can be accessed by entering TMS OFF at the TMS prompt.
F-52 / Using TMS CI-3530-50B
OFF-LINE FUNCTIONS MENU
Enter log tag name View/Change Drive/Directory
CONVERT DISPLAY PRINT
Combo Log
(Daily, Hourly, Audit, Config)
Daily Log
Periodic Log
Alarm/Event Log
Configuration Log
Access Trend Data Plotting
Exit
Figure F-43 - Off-Line Functions Menu
CI-3530-50B Using TMS / F-53
BLANK PAGE
Addendum - Using the Windows™ UOI /TMS/SmartKit Shell
This addendum applies to the following manuals:
• UOI Configuration Manual (document# D5074)
• UOI Operator Manual (document# D5075)
• Selected TeleFlow/TeleCorrector manuals (CI-3530-10x, CI-3530-20x, CI-3530-50x)
• SmartKit Manual (document# CI-3508-99x)
What is the Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell?
The Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell is an Open BSI utility which allows textbased menus (including UOI, TMS and SmartKit menus) to be used in a window. This window supports the use of the mouse to navigate through the menus rather than the standard keyboard-based interface of UOI, TMS and SmartKit.
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
1 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
IMPORTANT
This addendum only describes how to use the shell to alter the appearance of your menus, and navigate between them. This document is a supplement to (not a replacement for) the manuals accompanying the UOI, TMS, and SmartKit software:
• For detailed information on how to create UOI menus using the UOI tools, see the
UOI Configuration Manual (document# D5074). Also see the UOI Operator Manual
(document# D5075).
• For information on how to use TMS and its associated menus, see the TeleFlow hardware manuals for those units which may be used with TMS menus (CI-3530-
10x, CI-3530-20x, CI-3530-50x).
• For information on how to use the SmartKit software, see the Smartkit Manual
(document# CI-3508-99-x).
Software Requirements / Installation
• Windows™ NT 4.0 or Windows™ 95/98
• Open BSI Utilities 3.21 or newer
The Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell (WIN UOI) is installed from a single diskette.
Before You Begin
Before attempting to run the Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell you must have a set of menus already defined. The menus can be either:
• a full set of menus already compiled and linked into a UML file. These could be menus you created and compiled and linked yourself using the standard UOI tools, or it could be a set of menus which were included with a Bristol Babcock product, such as the TeleFlow Menu System (TMS).
• simple menus you created yourself using an ASCII text editor, and saved in a UOI
Menu Source file (*.UMS). These menus must follow the syntax rules defined in the
UOI Configuration Manual (document# D5074). The UMS file can be compiled and linked within Windows™ UOI to generate a UML file.
• Standard pre-defined menus which are sent directly from the hardware device, such as SmartKit menus.
You must have already started NetView and established Open BSI communications with your network of controllers (RTUs). Alternatively, you could use LocalView for
Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept.. 2004
2 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
Open BSI communication with a single RTU. For information on configuring Open BSI communications see the Open BSI Utilities Manual (document# D5081).
To start Open BSI communications from the command line, the following command sequence may be entered:
drive\openbsi_install_path\BSAUTO -INSTALL drive\accol_dir\NDFname where drive is the drive letter, followed by a ’:’ openbsi_install_path is the Open BSI installation path on this PC accol_dir
NDFname is the path of the ACCOL directory on this PC is the complete Network Definition File name.
For example:
C:\>C:\openbsi\BSAUTO -INSTALL C:\ACCOL\CURRENT.NDF
Application Notes For Communication with a 3508 TeleTrans Transmitter Using the 1200 BAUD FSK Modem
In order to use the WIN UOI\TMS\Smartkit shell to communicate with the 3508
TeleTrans Transmitter using the 1200 BAUD FSK modem, you must do the following, first:
1.
Edit the file BSBSAP.INI (This file is located in the WINNT directory for NT users, or the WINDOWS directory on Windows™ 98 workstations.) In the file, set the DTR parameter in the [COMM] section of the file to 'DTR=1'.
2.
In NetView, call up the Line Properties dialog box for the communication line being used, and make sure that you have 1 "Back Pad" character, and that the "Modem" option is checked.
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
3 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
Starting the Shell
Double-click on the program WINUOI.EXE in Windows™ Explorer.
A screen, similar to that shown below, will appear:
Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept.. 2004
4 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
Choosing Which Application to Run in the Shell
Only one application program (UOI, TMS, or SmartKit) can run in the shell at any one time.
When you first start the shell, the Start Application dialog box will appear to allow you to select which application you want to run.
If you want to look at UOI menus, click on
“UOI Application”.
If you want to use the TeleFlow™ Menu
System (TMS), click on “TMS Application”.
If you want to run the SmartKit program for use with the 3508-series transmitter, click on
“SmartKit Application”.
When you have selected the desired application, click on the [Start] button. The selected application will be loaded within the shell, and the application’s name will be displayed in the title bar.
If you want to specify that the current application should always be loaded when starting the shell, thereby bypassing the Start Application dialog box, check the
“Application Name” check box in the Application Settings dialog box, and click on
[Save As Default Settings]. The current application will be loaded the next time you start the shell, allowing you to skip the Start Application dialog box.
Starting WINUOI from the DOS Command Line
WINUOI can also be started from the DOS command line. The syntax for this command is:
WINUOI –a application_name –n nodename where:
-a application specifies the WINUOI application to be started.
Choices for application are: ‘UOI’, ‘TMS’ or ‘SMARTKIT’.
NOTE: The –a and application must be separated by a space.
-n node specifies the target node name where node is the controller
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
5 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
name, as specified in NETTOP or NetView. NOTE: The –n and node must be separated by a space.
Example: C:\>WINUOI –a TMS –n RPC3
Shutting Down the Current Application / Choosing A New Application to Run
Sometimes, it may be convenient to shut down the current application, and call up a different one. (For example, you may decide you want to exit out of TMS, and call up SmartKit.) If you decide you want to stop the current application, and load a new one into the shell, you can click on the ‘New Application’ icon, shown at left, or click on the following menu sequence: Application
Å
New
You will be prompted to confirm that you want to shut down the current application. Click on the [Yes] button to shut it down; this will call up the Start
Application dialog box to allow you select a new application to run.
Alternatively, you can click on the [No] button to return to the current application.
Selecting the Node with Which You Want to Communicate
Once your selected application starts, the Select New Node dialog box will prompt you to select a particular node (RTU) from which data will be collected. (This dialog box is also accessible by clicking on the icon, at left.)
The selection box contains a list of all RTUs defined in your active Network Definition
Files. Choose the name of the RTU you would like to access, and click on the [OK] push button. Then use the security sign-on option of whichever application you chose, and sign on using the standard Open BSI Sign On dialog box.
Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept.. 2004
6 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
Adjusting the Appearance of the Menus
The Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell allows you to make various adjustments in the appearance of menus.
You can:
• Change the color of the menu background, the color of the text on the menu, and the color of other menu elements.
• Toggle between displaying poke points, or Windows™-style buttons for menu items.
• Change the appearance of a cursor from a line to a highlight block in menus which use poke points.
Setting Colors For Menu Elements
From the “View” item of the menu bar, you can call up the Color dialog box to alter the color of various elements of menus.
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
7 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
The table, below, shows the menu commands for accessing the Color dialog box depending upon the menu element for which you want to define colors.
To set the color of the item below:
Text on menus
Background of the menu
Lines used to define a trend plot grid (TMS only)
Fills used within a trend plot grid (TMS only)
Highlighted text in an editable field
Background underneath highlighted text in an editable field
Message text in the status fields at the bottom of the window
The background underneath message text at the bottom of the window
The cursor
Click according to the sequence below, then define the colors in the Color dialog box:
View
Å
Change Color
Å
Text
View
Å
Change Color
Å
Background
View
Å
Change Color
Å
Draw
View
Å
Change Color
Å
Draw Fill
View
Å
Change Color
Å
Highlight Text
View
Å
Change Color
Å
Highlight Background
View
Å
Change Color
Å
Message Text
View
Å
Change Color
Å
Message Back
View
Å
Change Color
Å
Cursor
Once the Color dialog box is visible, you can click on one of the ‘Basic Colors’ defined in the palette in the top of the dialog box. If you want to use a color which is not displayed in the ‘Basic Colors’ palette, you can click on the [Define Custom Color >>] button, and specify a custom color.
When you have chosen the desired color, click on the
[OK] button, and the desired menu element will be changed to the new color for the current session of the shell. For details on saving color defaults for use in all future sessions, see ‘Saving Color Configuration
Settings’ for details.
If you are unhappy with the color changes made, and want to restore the previously saved default colors, click on the ‘Read Default Settings’ icon.
To save the changes made as the new default colors, click on the ‘Save As Default
Settings’ icon.
Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept.. 2004
8 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
Saving Color Configuration Settings
If you have made changes to the color of menu elements, you can choose to save them so that they may be used in subsequent sessions.
Call up the Application Settings dialog box by clicking on the icon shown above, or use the following menu sequence: Configuration
Å
Application Settings
Select the types of color changes you want to save (background, text, etc.) then click on the [Save As Default Settings] button to save the settings.
The next time the shell is started, you can load the default colors by calling up this dialog box and clicking on [Read Default Settings] or you can click on the ‘Read
Default Settings’ icon. Furthermore, if you selected “Application Name”, the next time the shell is started, the Start Application dialog box will be skipped, and whatever application was last used (UOI, TMS, or SmartKit) will be loaded into the shell automatically.
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
9 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
Toggling Between Displaying Poke points or Buttons
The shell allows you to display selectable menu items either as poke points, or buttons.
If poke points are displayed, and you want to use buttons, instead, click on:
View
Å
Show Buttons
If buttons are displayed, and you want to use poke points, instead, click on:
View
Å
Show Poke Points
Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept.. 2004
10 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
Choosing the appearance of the poke point cursor
In a menu using poke points, the cursor can appear either as a line, or as a block.
If the cursor on the poke point is displayed as a line, and you want it displayed as a block, instead, click on:
View
Å
Show Block Cursor
If the cursor on the poke point is displayed as a block, and you want it displayed as a line, instead, click on:
View
Å
Show Line Cursor
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
11 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
Navigating between Menus
The DOS-based versions of UOI, TMS, and SmartKit allowed navigation between menus using keyboard commands [F3] for Next Display, [F4] for Back Display, [F6] for Back Page of the menu, and [F8] for Next Page of the menu.
These keyboard commands are also supported within the shell, however, it is also possible to click on menu commands available through the menu bar, or to click on icons to accomplish the same functions. The table, below, summarizes the navigation methods.
To perform the operation below:
Activate a menu after positioning the cursor on the icon or poke point for that menu
Click on the icon shown
below, or
@ Poke point or button (label of button varies)
Use the key shown
below, or
[Enter]
Click the following sequence of menu items:
Menu
Å
Go Into Selected
Menu
Go to the next menu
(Next Display)
Go to the previous menu
(Back Display)
[F3]
[F4]
Menu
Menu
Å
Å
Next Display
Back Display
Go to the previous page within a menu
(Back Page)
[F6] Menu
Å
Back Page
Go to the next page within a menu
(Next Page)
[F8] Menu
Å
Next Page
In addition to the options shown in the table, some menu commands are also available by right-clicking the mouse to bring up a pop-up menu.
Refreshing the Screen
If you want to refresh the screen, click as follows: View
Å
Refresh Screen
Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept.. 2004
12 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
Modifying UMS, UCS, ULS, UHS Files (UOI users ONLY)
Simple changes to the UOI source files (.UMS, .UHS, .ULS, .UCS) can be made with a text editor. All such changes must follow the syntax rules defined in the UOI
Configuration Manual (document# D5074). Once the file(s) have been modified, the files may be compiled and linked (see below).
Changing the Default UML Directory (UOI, TMS users ONLY)
To specify the location where UML files (sets of menus) will be stored, click on the icon, shown at left, or click on: Configuration
Å
Set UML Dir
NOTE: Changing the default UML directory will require the current application to be stopped and re-started.
Either of these methods will call up the Specify new UML Directory dialog box. Click on the [Browse] button to locate the desired folder, or if you know what its path is, just type it into the field. Select the “Save as default path” check box, and click on [Set
Path]. A warning will appear reminding you that the current application will be stopped and re-started. If you click on [Yes], the application will be stopped, and restarted with the newly specified UML directory active.
Compiling and Linking a UMS File to Generate a UML File (UOI users ONLY)
If you have modified a UMS file, and want to compile and link it to generate a new
UML file, you can do so by clicking on the icon, shown at left, or by clicking on
Configuration
Å
Generate UML File. The standard Windows™ Open file dialog box will appear. Select the UMS file from which you want to generate a UML file, then click on [OK]. A new UML file will be created in the specified UML directory.
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
13 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
Compiling and Linking a UHS File to Generate a UHL File (UOI users ONLY)
If you have modified a UHS file, and want to compile and link it to generate a new
UHL file, you can do so by clicking on the icon, shown at left. The standard Windows™
Open file dialog box will appear. Select the UHS file from which you want to generate a
UHL file, then click on [OK]. A new UHL file will be created in the specified directory.
Compiling and Linking a UCS File to Generate a UCL File (UOI users ONLY)
If you have modified a UCS file, and want to compile and link it to generate a new UCL file, you can do so by clicking on the icon, shown at left. The standard Windows™ Open file dialog box will appear. Select the UCS file from which you want to generate a UCL file, then click on [OK]. A new UCL file will be created in the specified directory.
Compiling and Linking a ULS File to Generate a ULL File (UOI users ONLY)
If you have modified a ULS file, and want to compile and link it to generate a new ULL file, you can do so by clicking on the icon, shown at left. The standard Windows™ Open file dialog box will appear. Select the ULS file from which you want to generate a ULL file, then click on [OK]. A new ULL file will be created in the specified directory.
Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept.. 2004
14 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
Changing Signal Values
If you have signed on at a specific security level, and a signal is NOT manually inhibited, you can change its value from an editable field. This is done by simply pressing the [Page Up] key to clear the field, and then typing in a new value and pressing [Enter].
Signal values can also be changed from the Detailed Signal Information page. See
‘Getting Detailed Information on a Particular Signal’.
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
15 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
Getting Detailed Information on a Particular Signal
If you have signed on at a sufficient security level, you can obtain more detailed information about a particular signal displayed in an editable field. To do this, position the cursor on the editable field, and do one of the following:
Either,
• Click as follows: Signal
Å
Detail Signal Information or
• Right click on the editable field and choose “Detail Signal Information” from the pop-up menu or
• Click on the icon shown above
Any of these methods will call up the Signal Detail Information page for the signal.
Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept.. 2004
16 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
The Signal Detail page shows various characteristics of the signal (units text, current value, read and write priorities, etc.)
It also allows you to:
• Change the signal value by clicking on the [Current State Value] button or poke point, and entering a new value when prompted.
• Change the inhibit/enable status bits and the questionable data bit.
Changing Signal Inhibit/Enable Status Bits
If you have signed on at a sufficient security level, you can toggle the manual inhibit/enable, control inhibit/enable, and or alarm inhibit/enable status bits for a signal, if it is displayed in an editable field.
To do so, click on the signal value, then click on the inhibit/enable icon which corresponds to the action you want to perform. A message box will appear asking you to confirm the change. Clicking on [Yes] will execute the change.
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
17 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
The table, below, shows the icons, keyboard shortcuts, and menu bar sequences for changing inhibit/enable bits. Menu selections for this purpose are also available by
right-clicking the mouse while positioned in the editable field; this activates a pop-up menu.
To Perform this Action Click on the Icon shown
below, or
Toggle the manual inhibit / enable status bit
Toggle the control inhibit / enable status bit
Toggle the alarm inhibit / enable status bit
Use the key(s) shown
below, or
[F5]
Click according to the following Menu Sequence:
[F7]
Signal
Å
Toggle Manual
State
Signal
Å
Toggle Control
State
[Alt]+[a] Signal
Å
Toggle Alarm State
Canceling the Current Request for Data
If your application is in the process of collecting data from an RTU, and you want to cancel that request, you can click on the icon shown at left.
Saving the Text of the Current Menu in a Microsoft® Word File
To save the text of the current menu in a Microsoft® Word file, click on the icon, shown at left, or click as follows: Application
Å
Save Current Menu
You will be asked to provide a file name in the standard Windows™ Save As dialog box.
Using the UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept.. 2004
18 Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
Printing A Menu
If desired, the textual portion of the current menu can be printed. NOTE: Graphics cannot be printed.
Setting Up the Printer
If your printer is not configured, you can access the standard Printer Setup dialog box by clicking on: Application
Å
Print Setup
Previewing the Printed Page Prior to Printing
To preview the appearance of the printed page, before actually printing it, click on
Application
Å
Print Preview. You can use the [Zoom In] and [Zoom Out] buttons, to view the printed page at different magnifications. If the menu is a multi-page menu, you can use the [Next Page] and [Prev Page] buttons to move between the pages. If you are satisfied with the appearance of the page, you can call up the standard Print dialog box, by clicking on the [Print] button. If you are not satisfied, click on [Close] to exit the Print Preview.
Printing the Page
You can call up the standard Print dialog box by clicking on the icon, at left, or by clicking on Application
Å
Print, or by clicking on the [Print] button on the
Print Preview page.
Once the standard Print dialog box is visible, click on [OK] and the page will be sent to the configured printer.
Shutting Down the Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit Shell
To shut down the Windows™ UOI/TMS/SmartKit shell (which also terminates the currently running application), click as follows: Application
Å
Exit
Addendum to D5074, D5075, CI-3508-99
CI-3530-xxx
19 Using the UOI / TMS / SmartKit Shell
Rev: Sept. 2004
BLANK PAGE
EXPANSION COMMUNICATIONS
PORT RS-232 BOARD
Part No. 392970-01-5
(For Models 3530-XXX)
For The Following BBI Instruction Manuals:
CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-15B, CI-3530-20B, CI-3530-25B,
CI-3530-35B, CI-3530-40B, CI-3530-45B & CI-3530-50B
Product Information Package
Bristol Babcock
PIP-EXP232TF – December, 2003
NOTICE
Copyright Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol Babcock assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Request for Additional Instructions
Additional copies of instruction manuals may be ordered from the address below per attention of the Sales Order Processing Department. List the instruction book numbers or give complete model number, serial or software version number. Furnish a return address that includes the name of the person who will receive the material. Billing for extra copies will be according to current pricing schedules.
TeleFlow TM , TeleRTU TM and TeleRecorder TM are trademarks of Bristol Babcock. Other trademarks or copy-righted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2003 Bristol Babcock, 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol Babcock.
IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!
Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.
These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol Babcock for further information.
EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING
The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons. It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, fail-safe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc.
If additional information is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol
Babcock.
RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING
When returning any equipment to Bristol Babcock for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol Babcock are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol Babcock and save Bristol Babcock harmless from any liability or damage which Bristol Babcock may incur or suffer due to such party’s failure to so act.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design
Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April
16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).
The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE
This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read BBI supplemental document S14006 for proper care and handling of ESD-sensitive components.
Bristol Babcock 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Telephone (860) 945-2200
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
A.
B.
WARRANTY
Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.
Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety (90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.
Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.
All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without Bristol’s consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.
THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE), AND NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY
REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES, OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY
BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE
NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE
FACE HEREOF.
No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.
REMEDIES
Buyer’s sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol’s Watertown office, unless Bristol’s Watertown office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstallation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person’s transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.
Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its employees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.
How to return material for Repair or Exchange
Before a product can be returned to Bristol Babcock for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA
(Return Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Babcock Repair Dept. to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.
You can easily obtain a RA number by:
A. FAX
Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A BBI Repair
Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
B. E-MAIL
Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Babcock Web site
(www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]
.
A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.
C. Mail
Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to
Bristol Babcock Inc.
Repair Dept.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
D. Phone
Calling the BBI Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A BBI Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.
A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.
&VMWXSP&EFGSGO-RG6ITEMV%YXLSVM^EXMSR*SVQ
(Providing this information will permit BBI to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)
Date___________________ RA #___________________SH_ Line No.____________
Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.
•
Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy
•
Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form
•
Return to Customer
Part I
Please be aware of the Non warranty standard charge:
•
There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable (
√
in “returned” B,C, or D of part III below)
Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns
Address No.
Bill to :
(office use only) Address No.
Ship to:
(office use only)
Purchase Order:
Phone: Fax:
Contact Name:____________________________________
E-Mail:
Part II Please complete Parts II & III for each unit returned
Model No./Part No.
Description
Range/Calibration
Reason for return : Failure Upgrade
S/N
Verify Operation Other
1.
Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,
Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)
(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)
2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________
3.
What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software &version?
Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available
A.
If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to BBI’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
B.
If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:
C.
If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product:
D.
If BBI is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
returned replaced scrapped?
returned replaced *see below?
* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: _______________________________ phone
If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone
Special Requests:
Ship prepaid to: Bristol Babcock Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-3875
Form GBU 13.01
Rev. A
Bristol Babcock
Training
GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL
BABCOCK INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM
● Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line
● Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.
● Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.
● Know your system.
As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Babcock offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at three locations: Houston, Orlando and our Watertown, CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol Babcock products and realize the full potential of your system.
For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at
(860) 945-2269. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-
6200.
BLANK PAGE
A Few Words About Bristol Babcock
For over 100 years, Bristol 7 has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey
SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.
On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Babcock instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.
Getting Additional Information
In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:
Contacting Bristol Babcock Directly
Bristol Babcock's world headquarters are located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,
Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.
Our main phone numbers are:
(860) 945-2200
(860) 945-2213 (FAX)
Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.
Telephone Support - Technical Questions
During regular business hours, Bristol Babcock's Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.
For technical questions about TeleFlow Ô products call (860) 945-8604.
For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2244 or (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-3865 or e-mail: [email protected]
For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, Open BSI Utilities , as well as
Bristol's Enterprise Server 7 / Enterprise Workstation 7 products, call (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.
You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]
The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/
For assistance in interfacing Bristol Babcock hardware to radios, contact Bristol Babcock’s
Communication Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-
9464 .
Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.
Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative.
Please call the main Bristol Babcock number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.
Visit our Site on the World Wide Web
For general information about Bristol Babcock and its products, please visit our site on the
World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com
Training Courses
Bristol Babcock’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2269 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.
PIP-EXP232TF
EXPANSION COMMUNICATIONS PORT
RS-232 BOARD
PT. Number 392970-01-5
Product Information Package
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
SECTION TITLE PAGE #
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................... 1
Function .............................................................................................................................. 1
Features............................................................................................................................... 2
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION................................................................................... 2
INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY................................................................................ 2
Restrictions ......................................................................................................................... 2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
2.1.1.2
2.1.1.3
2.2
Section 2 - INSTALLATION & SERVICE
EXPCOM232 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION................................. 3
Installation/Removal of the EXPCOM232 Board .............................................................. 3
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B & -50B ............................ 3
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B ........................................................ 10
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B ..................................................................... 11
RS-232 WIRING............................................................................................................... 12
3.1
3.2
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 15
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 15
SUPPLEMENTS
PIP-EXP232TF Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
BLANK PAGE
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 Function
The Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board (EXPCOM232) provides a single RS-
232 asynchronous serial communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s “local” and “network” RS-232 ports, any model 3530-XXX unit equipped with an EXPCOM232 Board can establish RS-232 communications with an external device. An EXPCOM232 Board plugs into the Expansion
Connector of the TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board and is stood-off by three 15/32” long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws. The CPU Board Expansion Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the EXPCOM232 Board.
EXPCOM232 Boards measure 4.0” by 3.75” and utilizes a 7-position Industrial 3.5mm pitch plugable connector to interface with an external RS-232 device. 16V bi-directional
Transient Absorption Zener Diodes are placed across all RS-232 outputs.
Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXPCOM232 Board. TXD,
RXD, RTS, CTS, DTR, CD and GND (RS-232) signals are available at TB1 of the
EXPCOM232 Board. CD (Carrier Detect) (supplied by a DCE attempting to communicate with a model 3530-XXX), will awaken the 3530-XXX CPU Board. If no activity is required, the EXPCOM232 Board‘s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-232 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX.
PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 1 - Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board
Page 1 EXPCOM232 Option
1.1.2 Features
· Low Power
+5V @ 20mA (Max) regulated power is supplied by the host/parent 3530-XXX via the
40-pin Expansion Interface Connector P1.
· ESD & Transient Susceptibility
The RS-232 I/O circuitry has been designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV and the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
· EMI Compatibility
EXPCOM232 Boards have been designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the TeleFlow ä electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.
· Mounting
The EXPCOM232 Board measures 3.75” (9.525cm) in width x 4.0” (10.160cm) in height and mounts piggy-back on a TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board.
· RS-232 Serial Port
EXPCOM232 Boards provide an additional RS-232 serial port that is programmable for rates up to 19.2Kbps. 3530-XXX units equipped with the EXPCOM232 Board can communicate with a local RS-232 device even though a radio or modem may be installed on the CPU Board’s network port.
1.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
EXPCOM232 Boards do not contain LEDs, switches or configuration jumpers. Two connectors are provided; 40-pin connector P1 mates with the host 3530-XX-X (connector J4 -
TeleFlow CPU or J18 - TeleRTU CPU) and accommodates the TTL interface between the two entities, while 7-pin connector TB1 mates with the RS-232 device that is being interfaced to the 3530-XXX. Additionally, the 3.5mm pitch plugable connector TB1 is removable from its mating EXPCOM232 Board socket.
1.3 INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY
An EXPCOM232 Board can be installed into any of the following 3530-XXX models:
3530-10B - TeleFlow
3530-15B - TeleRTU
3530-35B - TeleRTU Module
3530-40B - TeleFlow ECR
3530-20B - TeleFlow Plus 3530-45B - TeleRecorder
3530-25B - TeleRTU Plus 3530-50B - TeleFlow Corrector
1.3.1 Restrictions
The 3530-XXX in question must be equipped with ACCOL application software. 3530-XXX units support installation of only one optional piggyback mounted Expansion Board (I/O,
Comm. or TIB).
EXPCOM232 Option Page 2 PIP-EXP232TF
Section 2
INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 EXPCOM232 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION
2.1.1 Installation/Removal of the EXPCOM232 Board
In addition to hardware normally contained within the 3530-XXX in question, units with an installed EXPCOM232 Option will contain the following major parts.
1.
Expanded Communications Port RS-232 Board (EXPCOM232)
2.
Three #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs (Note: Models 3530-10B, - 15B, -40B, -45B & -50B will also contain Three (3) #4-40 x .188” Standoffs & Two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM Screws)
3.
Modified PC Shield Assembly (for models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B & -50B)
WARNING
Never attempt to service a TeleFlow, TeleRTU,
TeleRecorder or TeleFlow Corrector while it is powered and operating in a hazardous environment. Either the area must be made safe or the unit must be powered down, unwired, unmounted, and taken to a safe, nonhazardous area.
WARNING
Never attempt to install or remove any components
(PCBs, Field Wiring, Transducers, etc.) while the unit is powered and running. Doing so can cause sudden electrical transients or imbalances that are capable of causing damage to the module or component in question, as well as other associated circuit boards. Always turn off the external/internal power source, including any additional supply sources used for externally-powered
I/O circuits, before changing or adding any components.
CAUTION
Place any related critical processes under manual or auxiliary control prior to shutting down or performing any of the steps discussed herein.
2.1.1.1 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B & -50B
To install the optional EXPCOM232 Board into a model 3530-10B, -15B, -40B, -45B or -
50B, follow steps 1 through 14 below. To remove the optional EXPCOM232 Board, see step
15. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
PIP-EXP232TF Page 3 EXPCOM232 Option
Note:
The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the unit has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual - S14006).
2.
Remove the Power Plug(s), Solar Panel Power Plug, and the Auxiliary Power Plug as required, from the CPU Board in question.
3.
Remove the optional radio or modem if installed.
To remove an optional modem :
Disconnect the phone wires. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it and then disconnect the D-Type connector from the modem.
To remove an optional radio :
Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Unplug the 2-wire power connector associated with the 2-wire Radio Power Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with radio) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.
4.
Remove the Battery(s) (if present).
To remove the battery(s) from units without an optional modem or radio :
Hold the battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws. Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting Bracket
(Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Remove the Right Battery
Mounting Bracket.
To remove the battery(s) from units with an optional modem or radio :
Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.
While holding the Main
Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit. Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the 3530-10B, 15B, -45B or -50B.
5.
Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, and Field I/O wires from the CPU Bd.
connectors by unplugging their associated Term. Plugs on the front edge of the CPU.
6. Carefully remove the PC Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by 2
(#4-40 x 1/4”) screws and to the CPU Board by 2 (#4-40 x 1/4”) screws.
7. Remove the screw (location ‘A’ in Figures 2 & 3) and the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Standoffs
(location ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) which secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting
Bracket. Replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
8.
Align the EXPCOM232 Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-
10B, 40B or -50B) or J18 (for 3530-15B & -45B). Push the EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
EXPCOM232 Option Page 4 PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 2 - TeleFlow CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
9.
Secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x .188”
Standoffs at locations ‘A’ and ‘B’ (see Figures 2 & 3).
10. Carefully install the Modified PC Shield, securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket (at locations ‘C’) with two #4-40 x 1/4” screws and to the CPU Board (at locations ‘B’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM screws (see Figures 4, 5, 6 & 7).
11. Follow steps 2 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
PIP-EXP232TF Page 5 EXPCOM232 Option
12.
Connect wiring between the EXPCOM232 Board and the DTE/DCE device to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
13.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
Figure 3 - TeleRTU CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
14.
Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
15. To remove an optional EXPCOM232 Board, follow steps 1 through 6 (unplug the RS-
232 cable during step 5). Remove the PC Shield along with the three Standoffs that
EXPCOM232 Option Page 6 PIP-EXP232TF
secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board. Then unplug the EXPCOM232
Board from the CPU Board in question.
Figure 4 - TeleFlow CPU Board (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
PIP-EXP232TF Page 7 EXPCOM232 Option
Figure 5 - TeleRTU CPU Board (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
EXPCOM232 Option Page 8 PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 6 - 3530-10B, 3530-40B & 3530-50B (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
Figure 7 - 3530-15B & 3530-45B (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
PIP-EXP232TF Page 9 EXPCOM232 Option
2.1.1.2 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B
To install the optional EXPCOM232 Board into a model 3530-20B or 3530-25B, follow steps
1 through 11 below. To remove the optional EXPCOM232 Board, perform steps 1 and 2 and then follow steps 4 through 9 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
Open the Instrument Front Cover
2.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug (P8 for TeleFlow - P2 for
TeleRTU) from the CPU Board edge connector (J8 for TeleFlow – J2 for TeleRTU).
Figure 8 - 3530-20B CPU (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
3.
Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
4.
Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board’s Sliding Mounting Bracket to the
Fixed Bracket on the bottom of the Battery Bracket. Carefully slide the CPU Board
(and optional EXPCOM232 Board) toward the front of the unit. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J12 on the TeleFlow CPU - J14 on TeleRTU
CPU), the Display Module (J2 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), the Wakeup
Switch (J3 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), and for TeleFlow CPU Boards connector J1 (associated with the Multivariable Transducer).
5.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the Sliding Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
6.
Align the EXPCOM232 Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-
20B) or J18 (for 3530-25B). Push the EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until
Connector P1 is fully seated.
7.
Secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”
SEM screws as illustrated in Figures 8 & 9.
EXPCOM232 Option Page 10 PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 9 - 3530-25B CPU (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
8.
Route the RS-232 cable through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.
9.
Connect wiring between the EXPCOM232 Board and the DTE/DCE device to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
10.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
11. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B
To install the optional EXPCOM232 Board into a model 3530-35B, follow steps 1 through 8 below. To remove the optional EXPCOM232 Board, perform step 1 and then follow steps 5 through 7 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down.
1.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from the CPU Board edge connector J2.
2. Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
3. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J14), the Display Module
(J16) and the Wakeup Switch (J16).
4.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the RTU Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
5.
Align the EXPCOM232 Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J18. Push the
EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
PIP-EXP232TF Page 11 EXPCOM232 Option
6.
Secure the EXPCOM232 Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”
SEM screws as illustrated in Figure 10.
7.
Connect wiring between the EXPCOM232 Board and the DTE/DCE device to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
8.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
Figure 10 - 3530-35B (with EXPCOM232 Installed)
2.2 RS-232 WIRING
Table 2-1 and Figure 11 must be referenced to configure the RS-232 cable. Pin 2 of TB1 =
DCD (Data Carrier Detect - DCD). DCD can be used to awaken the 3530-XXX in question from power conservation (sleep) mode. This signal is not supplied by DTE equipment.
EXPCOM232 Option Page 12 PIP-EXP232TF
PIP-EXP232TF
Figure 11 - EXPCOM232 Wiring Diagrams
Page 13 EXPCOM232 Option
Either an RS-232 level control signal (high) can be supplied to TB1-2, or TB1-2 may be connected to the EXC signal on the CPU Board. It must be noted that as long as TB1-2
(DCD) remains HIGH, the 3530-XXX in question will remain awake. Therefore, if TB1-2 is connected to an EXC signal on the resident CPU Board, power conservation will be defeated, thus reducing the battery back-up time.
RS-232 cables are typically short (20’ or less in length). When significant distances are a factor (i.e., between an EXPCOM232 Board and the remote Data Terminal Device (DTE) to which it is desired to communicate), the RS-232 Port (TB1) cable can be connected to the
RS-232 Port of a modem or that of a BBI Isolated RS-485 Board (see Table 2-1).
Table 2-1
EXPCOM232 Board (DTE) & DCE/DTE - RS-232 Port Pin Assignments
EXPCOM232
RS-232 – TB1
DTE
2 - DCD (In)
6 - RXD (In)
7 - TXD (Out)
3 - DTR (Out)
1 - GND
-
5 - RTS (Out)
4 - CTS (In)
-
EXPCOM232
RS-232 TB1 or
3530 Network
Port J13/J8
DTE
-
7 - TXD (Out)
6 - RXD (In)
-
1 - GND
-
4 - CTS (In)
5 - RTS (Out)
-
Modem
9-Pin – J4
DCE
1 - DCD (Out)
2 - RXD (Out)
3 - TXD (In)
4 - DTR (In)
5 - GND
6 - DSR (Out)
7 - RTS (In)
8 - CTS (Out)
9 - N/A
PC
(RS-232)
3310/30/35
3305
3332
Notes 1 & 2
BBI
Isolated RS-485
Board Option
J1
DTE
-
DTE
-
DTE
-
3 - TXD (Out) 2 - TXD (Out) 7 - TXD (Out)
2 - RXD (In)
-
4 - RXD (In)
-
6 - RXD (In)
-
5 - GND
-
8 - CTS (In)
7 - RTS (Out)
-
9 - GND
-
6 - CTS (In)
5 - RTS (Out)
-
1 - GND
-
4 - CTS (In)
5 - RTS (Out)
-
Note 1: Ports BIP1 & BIP2
BIP1 and BIP2 are RS-562 Ports (RS-232 compatible.
Note 2: 3310 Ports A & C (MFIB Board)
A & C are RS-423 Ports (RS-232 compatible).
3330 Ports A, B, C, D, G, H, I & J (Enhanced Comm. Boards)
ECB’s 392587-01-7, 392587-02-5, 392587-03-3 & 392903-01-6
A, B, C, D, G, H, I & J are RS-562 Ports (RS-232 compatible).
3335 Ports A, B, C, D, I & J (Enhanced Comm. Boards)
ECB’s 392589-01-0 & 392589-02-8
A, B, C, D, I & J are RS-232 Ports
3335 Ports A, B, C & D (Comm. Engine Boards)
CEB’s 392043-01-7 & 392058-01-4
A, B, C & D are RS-423 Ports (RS-232 compatible)
The device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch Max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and then securing the screw. Insert the bared end fully to prevent short circuits.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the printed circuit boards and harnesses.
EXPCOM232 Option Page 14 PIP-EXP232TF
Section 3
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Baud Rate (Max.):
Power Requirements:
Transient Protection:
RS-232 Outputs:
RS-232 Inputs:
RS-232 Ground:
RS-232 Interface Connector:
19.2K Asynchronous
+5Vdc @ 20mA Max. (Regulated)
16V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across all
RS-232 outputs
TXD (TB1-7)
DTR (TB1-3)
RTS (TB1-5)
DCD (TB1-2)
RXD (TB1-6)
CTS (TB1-4)
GND (TB1-1)
7-Pin Industrial 3.5mm Pitch Plugable Connector
3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Humidity:
ESD Susceptibility:
EMI Compatibility:
Transient Susceptibility:
-40 ° to +60 ° (C) [-40 ° to 140 ° (F)]
-40 ° to +85 ° (C) [-40 ° to 185 ° (F)]
15% to 90% RH (Non-Condensing)
Meets the requirement of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand
Capability up to 10KV.
Designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the
TeleFlow electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and
Susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated
Electronics.
Designed to meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (Formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand
Capability.
PIP-EXP232TF Page 15 EXPCOM232 Option
BLANK PAGE
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1. The BBI Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is listed by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups
A, B, C and D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive BBI Expansion Communications Port RS-232
Board. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion Communications Port RS-232
Board User Manual (PIP-EXP232TF) and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2. Wiring must be performed in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods as defined in Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical
Code for installation in Canada.
3. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.
4. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - When situated in a hazardous location, turn off power before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.
5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless the power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
07/17/2000 Appendix A of PIP-EXP232TF - EXPCOM232 Board Page 1 of 1
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board for 3530-XXX
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
1.
A version of the Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is available that is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division
1, Groups C and D hazardous locations. Read this document carefully before installing an intrinsically safe Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board. Refer to the
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board User’s Manual (PIP-EXP232TF) for general information. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion Communications
Port RS-232 Board User’s Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2.
Unless the Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is used in conjunction with an IStran Communications Interface Assembly (see CI-3530-Istran) it may not be used in a Class I, Division 1 hazardous location.
3.
When a TeleFlow equipped with an Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board is used in a Class I, Division 1 location, it must be used in conjunction with a BBI IStran
Communications Interface and installed per instruction manual CI-3530-IStran and
PIP-EXP232TF.
4.
The IStran and Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board can be located in a nonhazardous or Division 2 rated area, while the TeleFlow can reside in a Division 1, 2 or nonhazardous area.
A suitable enclosure must be provided for the IStran. When the IStran is mounted in a
Division 2 area, the nonhazardous interface connections shall be made in accordance with Article 501-4(b) of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70.
CAUTION
When connecting the IStran and Expansion Communications
Port RS-232 Board to a TeleFlow that is mounted in a Division
1 area, wire all circuits using wiring methods specified in article 504 of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70. Contact your IStran supplier for assistance.
When installing an Expansion Communications Port RS-232
Board in a TeleFlow that is mounted in a Division 2 area, ensure that the area is nonhazardous before connecting or disconnecting the nonhazardous interface.
5.
Figures B1 through B4 show variations of approved connections to the Expansion
Communications Port RS-232 Board via a BBI IStran Communications Interface
Assembly.
12/12/03 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP232TF Page 1 of 3
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board for 3530-XXX
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B1 - Intrinsically Safe System with Radio and EXPCOM232 Board
(with Single Power Source)
Figure B2 - Intrinsically Safe System with Modem and EXPCOM232 Board
(with Single Power Source)
12/12/03 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP232TF Page 2 of 3
Expansion Communications Port RS-232 Board for 3530-XXX
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
Figure B3 - Intrinsically Safe System with Modem and EXPCOM232 Board
(with Independent Power Sources)
Figure B4 - Intrinsically Safe System with Radio and EXPCOM232 Board
(with Independent Power Sources)
12/12/03 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP232TF Page 3 of 3
READER RESPONSE FORM
Please help us make our documentation more useful to you! If you have a complaint, a suggestion, or a correction regarding this manual, please tell us by mailing this page with your comments. It's the only way we know we're doing our job by giving you correct, complete, and useful documentation.
DOCUMENT NUMBER: PIP-EXP232TF
TITLE: EXPANSION COMMUNICATIONS PORT RS-232 BOARD (for Models 3530-XXX)
Product Information Package
ISSUE DATE: DEC., 2003
COMMENT/COMPLAINT:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Mail this page to:
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Attn: Technical Publications Group, Dept. 315
Bristol Babcock
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2200
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213
Website: www.bristolbabcock.com
U.S.A. Locations:
Northern Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2381
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525
Gulf Coast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
2000 Governor's Circle
Suite F
Houston, TX 77092-8731
Phone: +1 (713) 685-6200
Fax: +1 (713) 681-7331
Western Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1609 South Grove Avenue
Suites 106 & 107
Ontario, CA 91761
Phone: +1 (909) 923-8488
Fax: +1 (909) 923-8988
Southeast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: +1 (407) 740-7084
Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106
Helicoid Instruments
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2218
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213 [email protected]
Central Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
777 South Central
Expressway
Suite 1-C
Richardson, TX 75080
Phone: +1 (972) 238-8197
Fax: +1 (972) 238-8198 [email protected]
International Affiliates:
Canada
Bristol Babcock, Canada
234 Attwell Drive
Toronto, Ont. M9W 5B3
Canada
PH: 416-675-3820
FAX: 416-674-5129 [email protected]
Mexico
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso
Col. Morales Polanco
11540 Mexico, D.F.
Mexico
PH: (52-55)-52-81-81-12
FAX: (52-55)-52-81-81-09
Rocky Mountain Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
906 San Juan Blvd., Suite A
Farmington, NM 87401
Phone: +1 (505) 320-5046
Fax: +1 (505) 327-3273
Communications
Technology Group
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: +1 (407) 629-9464
Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106 [email protected]
United Kingdom
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Blackpole Road
Worcester, WR3 8YB
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1905 856950
FAX: +44 (0) 1905 856969 [email protected]
Asia Pacific
Bristol Babcock, Inc.
PO Box 1987
Bunbury, Western Australia
6231
PH: +61 (0) 8 9791 3654
FAX: +61 (0) 8 9791 3173 [email protected]
Victoria, Australia
PH: +61 (0) 3 9384 2171
FAX: +61 (0) 3 8660 2501
Calgary Office
Bristol Babcock, Canada
3812 Edmonton Trail N.E.
Calgary, Alberta T2E 5T6
Canada
PH: 403-265-4808
FAX: 403-233-2914 [email protected]
Villahermosa Office
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Plomo No.2
Bodega No. 1 - Ciudad
Industrial
Villahermosa, Tabasco 86010
Mexico
PH: 52-993-353-3142
FAX: 52-993-353-3145 [email protected]
Middle East
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Blackpole Road
Worcester, WR3 8YB
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1905 856950
FAX: +44 (0) 1905 856969 [email protected]
RC Rev: 13-Jun-03
EXPANSION RS-485 and/or
ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD
Series No. 392971-XX-X
(For Models 3530-XXX)
For The Following BBI Instruction Manuals:
CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-15B, CI-3530-20B, CI-3530-25B,
CI-3530-35B, CI-3530-40B & CI-3530-50B
Product Information Package
Bristol Babcock
PIP-EXP485/AO - January 2003
NOTICE
Copyright Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol Babcock assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Request for Additional Instructions
Additional copies of instruction manuals may be ordered from the address below per attention of the Sales Order Processing Department. List the instruction book numbers or give complete model number, serial or software version number. Furnish a return address that includes the name of the person who will receive the material. Billing for extra copies will be according to current pricing schedules.
TeleFlow TM and TeleRTU TM are trademarks of Bristol Babcock. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2003 Bristol Babcock, 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol Babcock.
IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!
Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.
These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol Babcock for further information.
EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING
The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons. It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, fail-safe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc.
If additional in-formation is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol
Babcock.
RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING
When returning any equipment to Bristol Babcock for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol Babcock are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol Babcock and save Bristol
Babcock harmless from any liability or damage, which Bristol Babcock may incur or suffer due to such party's failure to so act.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design
Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April
16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).
The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE
This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read BBI document S14006 for proper care and handling of ESDsensitive components.
Bristol Babcock 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Telephone (860) 945-2200
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
A.
B.
WARRANTY
Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.
Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety (90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.
Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.
All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without Bristol's consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.
THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE), AND NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY
REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES, OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY
BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE
NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE
FACE HEREOF.
No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.
REMEDIES
Buyer's sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol's Watertown office, unless Bristol's Watertown office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstallation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person's transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.
Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its employees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.
How to return material for Repair or Exchange
Before a product can be returned to Bristol Babcock for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA
(Return Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Babcock Repair Dept.to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.
You can easily obtain a RA number by:
A. FAX
Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A BBI Repair
Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
B. E-MAIL
Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Babcock Web site
(www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]
.
A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.
C. Mail
Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to
Bristol Babcock Inc.
Repair Dept.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
A BBI Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
D. Phone
Calling the BBI Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A BBI Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.
A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.
Bristol Babcock Inc. Repair Authorization Form
(Providing this information will permit BBI to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)
Date___________________ RA #___________________SH_ Line No.____________
Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.
· Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy
· Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form
· Return to Customer
Part I
Please be aware of the
·
Non warranty standard charge:
There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable ( or D of part III below)
Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns
Ö in “returned” B,C,
Address No.
Bill to :
(office use only) Address No.
Ship to:
(office use only)
Purchase Order:
Phone: Fax:
Contact Name: ____________________________________
E-Mail:
Part II Please complete Parts II & III for each unit returned
Model No./Part No.
Description
Range/Calibration
Reason for return : Failure Upgrade
S/N
Verify Operation Other
1.
Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,
Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)
(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)
2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________
3. What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software &version?
Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available
A.
If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to BBI’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
B.
If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:
C.
If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product:
D.
If BBI is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
returned replaced scrapped?
returned replaced *see below?
* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: _______________________________ phone
If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone
Special Requests:
Ship prepaid to: Bristol Babcock Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-3875
Form GBU 13.01
Rev. A
Bristol Babcock
Training
GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL
BABCOCK INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM
● Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line
● Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.
● Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.
● Know your system.
As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Babcock offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at four locations: Houston, Birmingham, Orlando and our Watertown,
CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol Babcock products and realize the full potential of your system.
For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at
(860) 945-2269. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-
6200.
BLANK PAGE
A Few Words About Bristol Babcock
For over 100 years, Bristol 7 has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey
SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.
On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Babcock instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.
Getting Additional Information
In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:
Contacting Bristol Babcock Directly
Bristol Babcock's world headquarters are located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,
Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.
Our main phone numbers are:
(860) 945-2200
(860) 945-2213 (FAX)
Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.
Telephone Support - Technical Questions
During regular business hours, Bristol Babcock's Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.
For technical questions about TeleFlow Ô products call (860) 945-8604.
For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2244 or (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-2501 or e-mail: [email protected]
For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, Open BSI Utilities , as well as
Bristol's Enterprise Server 7 / Enterprise Workstation 7 products, call (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.
You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]
The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/
For assistance in interfacing Bristol Babcock hardware to radios, contact Bristol Babcock’s
Communication Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-
9464 .
Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.
Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative. A list of
Please call the main Bristol Babcock number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.
Visit our Site on the World Wide Web
For general information about Bristol Babcock and its products, please visit our site on the
World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com
Training Courses
Bristol Babcock’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2269 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.
PIP-EXP485/AO
EXPANSION RS-485 COMMUNICATIONS and/or ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD
PT. Number 392971-XX-X
Product Information Package
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
SECTION TITLE PAGE #
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................... 1
Function .............................................................................................................................. 1
Features............................................................................................................................... 2
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION................................................................................... 3
INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY................................................................................ 3
Restrictions ......................................................................................................................... 3
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
2.1.1.2
2.1.1.3
2.2
Section 2 – INSTALLATION & SERVICE
EXP485/AO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION ................................... 4
Installation/Removal of the EXP485/AO Board ................................................................ 4
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B ...................................... 4
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B ........................................................ 11
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B ..................................................................... 13
RS-485 and AO WIRING ................................................................................................. 14
3.1
3.2
3.3
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 16
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 16
ENTITY PARAMETERS (INTRINSICALLY SAFE EXPAO Bd.) ............................... 17
SUPPLEMENTS
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
BLANK PAGE
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 Function
The Expansion RS-485 Comm. Port with Analog Output Board (EXP485/AO) provides a single RS-485 communications port to ACCOL-based 3530-XXX models. In addition to assignments of the resident (host) CPU’s “local” and “network” RS-232 ports, any model
3530-XXX unit equipped with a fully populated EXP485/AO Board can establish RS-485 asynchronous communications with other 3530-XXX devices and/or can interface to an
Analog Output circuit. The EXP485/AO Board plugs into the Expansion Connector of the
TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board, is stood-off by three 15/32” long hex standoffs and is secured via three screws or standoffs depending on the model. The CPU Board Expansion
Connector supplies power and 3530-XXX communication to the EXP485/AO Board.
EXP485/AO Boards measure 4.25” by 3.75” and utilizes a 9-position Industrial 3.5mm pitch plugable connector to interface (RS-485) to a series of remote 3530-XXX devices and or a single 1-5Vdc or 4-20mA AO device.
Programmable baud rates up to 19.2Kbps are supported by the EXP485/AO Board.
Interface signals are available at TB1 of the EXP485/AO. When the SLEEP+ & SLEEPsignals (supplied by the Master 3530-XXX) are Low and High respectively, the remote
3530-XXX CPU Boards will be awakened. If no activity is required, the EXP485/AO Board‘s serial communications controller (SCC) chip and RS-485 drivers can be put to sleep (low power mode) along with the host/parent 3530-XXX and the SLEEP+ and SLEEP- signals will be set High and Low respectively.
Figure 1 - EXP485/AO Board (with RS-485 & Configurable AO)
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 1 EXP485/AO Option
Figure 2 - EXPAO Board (with 1-5Vdc AO and without RS-485)
1.1.2 Features
· Low Power
+5Vdc @ 20mA (Max) regulated power and 5.8Vdc to 16Vdc @ 50mA (Max) unregulated power are supplied by the host/parent 3530-XXX via the 40-pin
Expansion Interface Connector P1.
· ESD & Transient Susceptibility
The RS-485 I/O circuitry has been designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV and the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
· EMI Compatibility
EXP485/AO Boards have been designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the TeleFlow ä electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.
· Mounting
The EXP485/AO Board measures 3.75” (9.525cm) in width x 4.25” (10.795cm) in height and mounts piggy-back on a TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board.
· RS-485 Comm. Port
EXP485/AO Boards provide an RS-485 communications port that is programmable for asynchronous rates up to 19.2Kbps. 3530-XXX units equipped with the
EXP485/AO Board can communicate with a network of 3530-XXX units (equipped
EXP485/AO Option Page 2 PIP-EXP485/AO
with EXP485/AO Boards), even though a radio or modem may be installed on the
CPU Board’s network port.
1.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
EXP485/AO Boards do not contain LEDs or switches. Fully populated EXP485/AO Boards
(P/N 392971-01-0) are provided with seven (7) configuration jumpers (see Figures 1 & 11).
Depopulated EXPAO Boards (P/N 392971-02-0) are factory set for 1-5Vdc AO operation and don’t have configuration jumpers (see Figure 2). Two connectors are provided; 40-pin connector P1 mates with the host 3530-XX-X (connector J4 - TeleFlow CPU or J18 - TeleRTU
CPU) and accommodates the TTL interface between the two entities, while 9-pin connector
TB1 mates with the RS-485 device that is being interfaced to the 3530-XXX and/or an analog output device. Additionally, the 3.5mm pitch plugable connector TB1 is removable from its mating EXP485/AO Board socket.
1.3 INSTALLATION COMPATIBILITY
An EXP485/AO Board can be installed into any of the following 3530-XXX models:
3530-10B - TeleFlow
3530-15B - TeleRTU
3530-35B - TeleRTU Module
3530-40B - TeleFlow ECR
3530-20B - TeleFlow Plus 3530-50B - TeleFlow Corrector
3530-25B - TeleRTU Plus
1.3.1 Restrictions
The 3530-XXX in question must be equipped with ACCOL application software. The
TeleFlow Plus (3530-20B), TeleRTU Plus (3530-25B) and the TeleRTU Module (3530-35B) support installation of either a Low Power I/O Expansion Board (LPI/OEB), an
EXPCOM232 Board, or the EXP485/AO Board discussed herein, i.e., YOU CAN ONLY
INSTALL ONE (1) OF THESE ITEMS .
EXP485/AO Board (P/N 392971-01-0) is fully populated and supports RS-485 network communications and interface to either a 1-5Vdc or a 4-20mA analog output device.
P/N 392971-02-0 is a depopulated version of the EXP485/AO Board and only supports interface to a 1-5Vdc analog output device. Connector TB1 has two usable pins (08 = AO and 09 = AOGND). This version is designed for use in a Class I, Division 2, Groups C and D nonincendive environment or a Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D intrinsically safe environment.
Intrinsically safe EXPAO Boards can be installed in 3530-XXX units with 6V Lead Acid or
7.2V Lithium battery systems.
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 3 EXP485/AO Option
Section 2
INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 EXP485/AO REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION
2.1.1 Installation/Removal of the EXP485/AO Board
In addition to hardware normally contained within the 3530-XXX in question, units with an installed EXP485/AO Option will contain the following major parts.
1.
Expanded Comm. Port RS-485/AO Board (EXP485/AO)
2.
Three (3) #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs (Note: Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B will also contain Three (3) #4-40 x .188” Standoffs & Two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM Screws)
3.
Modified PC Shield Assembly (for models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B)
WARNING
Never attempt to service a TeleFlow, TeleFlow ECR, TeleRTU or
TeleFlow Corrector while it is powered and operating in a hazardous environment. Either the area must be made safe or the unit must be powered down, unwired, unmounted, and taken to a safe, nonhazardous area.
WARNING
Never attempt to install or remove any components (PCBs, Field
Wiring, Transducers, etc.) while the unit is powered and running.
Doing so can cause sudden electrical transients or imbalances that are capable of causing damage to the module or component in question, as well as other associated circuit boards. Always turn off the external/internal power source, including any additional supply sources used for externally-powered I/O circuits, before changing or adding any components.
CAUTION
Place any related critical processes under manual or auxiliary control prior to shutting down or performing any of the steps discussed herein.
2.1.1.1 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B, -40B & -50B
To install the optional EXP485/AO Board into a model 3530-10B, -15B, -40B or -50B, follow steps 1 through 14 below. To remove the optional EXP485/AO Board, see step 15. Note: The
Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
EXP485/AO Option Page 4 PIP-EXP485/AO
Note:
The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the unit has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual - S14006).
2.
Remove the Power Plug(s), Solar Panel Power Plug, and the Auxiliary Power Plug as required, from the CPU Board in question.
3.
Remove the optional radio or modem if installed.
To remove an optional modem :
Disconnect the phone wires. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it and then disconnect the D-Type connector from the modem.
To remove an optional radio :
Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Unplug the 2-wire power connector associated with the 2-wire Radio Power Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with radio) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.
4.
Remove the Battery(s) (if present).
To remove the battery(s) from units without an optional modem or radio :
Hold the battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws. Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting Bracket
(Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Remove the Right Battery
Mounting Bracket.
To remove the battery(s) from units with an optional modem or radio :
Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.
While holding the Main
Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit. Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the 3530-10B, 15B, -45B or -50B.
5.
Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, and Field I/O wires from the CPU
Board connectors by unplugging their associated Terminal Plugs on the front edge of the CPU.
6. Carefully remove the PC Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by 2
(#4-40 x 1/4”) screws and to the CPU Board by 2 (#4-40 x 1/4”) screws.
7. Remove the screw (location ‘A’ in Figures 3 & 4) and the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Standoffs
(location ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) which secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting
Bracket. Replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
8.
Align the EXP485/AO Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-
10B or -50B) or J18 (for 3530-15B). Push the EXP485/AO Board toward the CPU
Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 5 EXP485/AO Option
Figure 3 - TeleFlow CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
9.
Secure the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x .188”
Standoffs at locations ‘A’ and ‘B’ (see Figures 3 & 4).
10. Carefully install the Modified PC Shield, securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket (at locations ‘C’) with two #4-40 x 1/4” screws and to the CPU Board (at location ‘B’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM screws (see Figures 5, 6, 7 & 8).
11.
Follow steps 2 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
EXP485/AO Option Page 6 PIP-EXP485/AO
12.
Connect wiring between the EXP485/AO Board and the remote 3530-XXX units to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
13.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
Figure 4 - TeleRTU CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
14.
Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
15. To remove an optional EXP485/AO Board, follow steps 1 through 6 (unplug the RS-485 cable during step 5). Remove the PC Shield along with the three Standoffs that secure
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 7 EXP485/AO Option
the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board. Then unplug the EXP485/AO Board from the CPU Board in question.
Figure 5 - TeleFlow CPU Board (with EXP485/AO Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
EXP485/AO Option Page 8 PIP-EXP485/AO
Figure 6 - TeleRTU CPU Board (with EXP485/AO Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 9 EXP485/AO Option
Figure 7 - 3530-10B, 3530-40B & 3530-50B (with EXP485/AO Installed)
EXP485/AO Option
Figure 8 - 3530-15B (with EXP485/AO Installed)
Page 10 PIP-EXP485/AO
2.1.1.2 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B
To install the optional EXP485/AO Board into a model 3530-20B or 3530-25B, follow steps 1 through 11 below. To remove the optional EXP485/AO Board, perform steps 1 and 2 and then follow steps 4 through 9 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
Open the Instrument Front Cover
2.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug (P8 for TeleFlow - P2 for
TeleRTU) from the CPU Board edge connector (J8 for TeleFlow - J2 for TeleRTU).
PIP-EXP485/AO
Figure 9 - 3530-20B CPU (with EXP485/AO Installed)
Page 11 EXP485/AO Option
3.
Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
4.
Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board’s Sliding Mounting Bracket to the
Fixed Bracket on the bottom of the Battery Bracket. Carefully slide the CPU Board
(and optional EXP485/AO Board) toward the front of the unit. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J12 on the TeleFlow CPU - J14 on TeleRTU
CPU), the Display Module (J2 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), the Wakeup
Switch (J3 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), and for TeleFlow CPU Boards connector J1 (associated with the Multivariable Transducer).
Figure 10 - 3530-25B CPU (with EXP485/AO Installed)
5.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the Sliding Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 3 & 4) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
EXP485/AO Option Page 12 PIP-EXP485/AO
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
6.
Align the EXP485/AO Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-
20B) or J18 (for 3530-25B). Push the EXP485/AO Board toward the CPU Board until
Connector P1 is fully seated.
7.
Secure the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”
SEM screws as illustrated in Figures 9 & 10.
8.
Route the RS-485 and AO cables through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.
9.
Connect wiring between the EXP485/AO Board and the remote 3530-XXX units to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
10.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
11. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B
To install the optional EXP485/AO Board into a model 3530-35B, follow steps 1 through 8 below. To remove the optional EXP485/AO Board, perform step 1 and then follow steps 5 through 7 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down.
1.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from the CPU Board edge connector J2.
2. Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
3. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J14), the Display Module
(J16) and the Wakeup Switch (J16).
4.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the RTU Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
5.
Align the EXP485/AO Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J18. Push the
EXP485/AO Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
6.
Secure the EXP485/AO Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4”
SEM screws as illustrated in Figure 11.
7.
Connect wiring between the EXP485/AO Board and the remote 3530-XXX units to which it is to be interfaced (see Section 2.2).
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 13 EXP485/AO Option
8.
Configure the new network port in the ACCOL Load resident in the host 3530-XXX device.
Figure 11 - 3530-35B (with EXP485/AO Installed)
2.2 RS-485 and AO WIRING
Figure 12 must be referenced to configure the RS-485 cable. It is recommended that a low capacitance 24-gauge communications grade 2-twisted pair cable such as Belden 9842 be used for RS-485 networking.
EXP485/AO Option Page 14 PIP-EXP485/AO
Figure 12 - EXP485/AO Wiring Diagrams
The device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch Max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and then securing the screw. Insert the bared end fully to prevent short circuits.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the printed circuit boards and harnesses.
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 15 EXP485/AO Option
Section 3
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Baud Rate (Max.):
Power Requirements:
Transient Protection:
RS-485 Inputs/Outputs:
Analog Output Pins:
Interface Connector:
19.2K Asynchronous
+5Vdc @ 20mA Max. (Regulated)
+5.8Vdc to +16Vdc @ 50mA Max. (Unregulated)
5V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across all
RS-485 communication points
12V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across the
AO points (when configured for 1-5Vdc operation)
16V Bi-directional Transient Absorption Zeners across the
AO points (when configured for 4-20mA operation)
TXD/RDX+ (TB1-3)
TXD/RXD- (TB1-4)
SLEEP+ (TB1-5)
SLEEP(TB1-6)
AO (TB1-8) - 1-5Vdc @ 5mA Max. ONLY on
392971-02-0
(TB1-8) - 1-5Vdc @ 5mA Max. or 4-20mA on
392971-01-0
AOGND (TB1-9) - Analog Output Ground/Return
9-Pin Industrial 3.5mm Pitch Plugable Connector
3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Humidity:
Vibration:
RFI Susceptibility:
EMI Compatibility:
-40 ° to +60 ° (C) [-40 ° to 140 ° (F)]
-40 ° to +85 ° (C) [-40 ° to 185 ° (F)]
15% to 90% RH (Non-Condensing)
10 to 500 Hz at 1g on any axis per SAMA PMC-31-1 without damage or impairment.
Meets the requirement of IEC 1000-4-6 level 2 (3V/M) from 150kHz to 80MHz.
Designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the
TeleFlow electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and
Susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated
Electronics.
EXP485/AO Option Page 16 PIP-EXP485/AO
Surge Susceptibility:
EMI Radiated:
Designed to meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (Formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
Designed to meet the requirements of IEC 1004-4-3 for radiated emissions.
3.3 ENTITY PARAMETERS (INTRISICALLY SAFE EXPAO Bd.)
F1: .125A
R66:
D20/D21:
Voc:
Vmax:
Isc:
Imax:
Ca:
Ci:
La:
Li:
200 Ohms ±5%, .5W
6.2V ±5%
6.51V
15V
34.3mA
150mA
400µF
0µF
80mH
0mH
PIP-EXP485/AO Page 17 EXP485/AO Option
BLANK PAGE
Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1. The BBI Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output (EXP485/AO) Board is listed by
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I,
Division 2, Groups C and D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive BBI Expansion RS-485 and/or
Analog Output Board. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion RS-485 and/or
Analog Output Board User Manual (PIP-EXP485/AO) and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2. Wiring must be performed in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods as defined in Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical
Code for installation in Canada.
3. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.
4. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - When situated in a hazardous location, turn off power before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.
5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless the power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
12/14/2001 Appendix A of PIP-EXP485/AO - EXP485/AO Board Page 1 of 1
Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board for 3530-XXX
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations
1.
A version of the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output (EXP485/AO) Board is available that is listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as intrinsically safe for use in
Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous locations. Read this document carefully before installing an intrinsically safe Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board.
Refer to the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board User’s Manual (PIP-
EXP485/AO) for general information. In the event of a conflict between the Expansion
RS-485 and or Analog Output User’s Manual and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2.
Only the depopulated version of the Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output Board
(EXP485/AO) (P/N 392971-02-0) may be used in a Class I, Division 1 hazardous location.
3.
TeleFlow models 3530-10B, 3530-40B and 3530-50B approved for use in Class I,
Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous locations and equipped with the EXP485/AO
Board option may reside in a Division 1, 2 or nonhazardous area. 3530-XXX units not approved for use in a Class I, Division 1 environment may contain an EXP485/AO Board but can only reside in a Class I, Division 2 or nonhazardous area.
CAUTION
When connecting the Expansion Analog Output Board to a
TeleFlow that is mounted in a Division 1 area, wire all circuits using wiring methods specified in article 501-4(A) of the
National Electrical Code NFPA 70.
When installing an Expansion RS-485 and/or Analog Output
Board (EXP485/AO) into a TeleFlow that is mounted in a
Division 2 area, ensure that the area is nonhazardous before connecting or disconnecting the nonhazardous interface.
4.
Intrinsically safe TeleFlows equipped with an intrinsically safe EXPAO Board (P/N
392971-02-0) do not include any internal communications options.
01/11/02 Appendix B - Document PIP-EXP485/AO Page 1 of 1
READER RESPONSE FORM
Please help us make our documentation more useful to you! If you have a complaint, a suggestion, or a correction regarding this manual, please tell us by mailing this page with your comments. It's the only way we know we're doing our job by giving you correct, complete, and useful documentation.
DOCUMENT NUMBER: PIP-EXP485/AO
TITLE: EXPANSION RS-485 and/or ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD (for Models 3530-XXX)
Product Information Package
ISSUE DATE: JAN., 2003
COMMENT/COMPLAINT:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Mail this page to:
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Attn: Technical Publications Group, Dept. 315
Bristol Babcock
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: (860) 945-2200
Fax: (860) 945-2213
Website: www.bristolbabcock.com
U.S.A. Locations:
Northern Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: (860) 945-2381
Fax: (860) 945-2525
Southwest Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
2000 Governor's Circle
Suite F
Houston, TX 77092-8731
Phone: (713) 685-6200
Fax: (713) 681-7331
Western Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1609 South Grove Avenue
Suites 106 & 107
Ontario, CA 91761
Phone: (909) 923-8488
Fax: (909) 923-8988
Southeast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: (407) 740-7084
Fax: (407) 629-2106
Helicoid Instruments
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: (860) 945-2218
Fax: (860) 945-2213 [email protected]
Dallas District Office
Bristol Babcock Inc.
777 South Central
Expressway
Suite 1-C
Richardson, TX 75080
Phone: (972) 238-8197
Fax: (972) 238-8198 [email protected]
International Affiliates :
Canada
Bristol Babcock, Canada
234 Attwell Drive
Toronto, Ont. M9W 5B3
Canada
PH: 416-675-3820
FAX: 416-674-5129 [email protected]
Mexico
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Ejercito Nacional No. 718, 4
Piso
Colonia Polanco
Mexico, D.F. 11560
Mexico
PH: 52-555-254-5281
FAX: 52-555-254-3408
Sales Office New Mexico
Bristol Babcock Inc.
906 San Juan Blvd., Suite A
Farmington, NM 87401
Phone: (505) 320-5046
Fax: (505) 327-3273
Communications
Technology Group
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: (407) 629-9464
Fax: (407) 629-2106 [email protected]
United Kingdom
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Vale Industrial Estate
Stourport Road
Kidderminster
Worcestershire DY11 7QU
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001
FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]
Australia
Bristol Babcock, Inc.
22 Hastie St.
PO Box 1987
Banbury, Western Australia
6230
PH: 61 (0)8 9791 3654
FAX: 61 (0)8 9791 3173 [email protected]
Calgary Office
Bristol Babcock, Canada
3812 Edmonton Trail N.E.
Calgary, Alberta T2E 5T6
Canada
PH: 403-265-4808
FAX: 403-233-2914 [email protected]
Villahermosa Office
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Plomo No.2
Bodega No. 1 - Ciudad
Industrial
Villahermosa, Tabasco 86010
Mexico
PH: 52-993-353-3142
FAX: 52-993-353-3145 [email protected]
Middle East
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Vale Industrial Estate
Stourport Road
Kidderminster
Worcestershire DY11 7QU
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001
FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]
Product Information Package
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Mar., 2007 TeleFlow Series 3530-10B/15B/20B/25B/35B/50B
Expansion Transmitter Interface
Board Part No. 392960-01-0
For The Following Bristol Instruction Manuals:
CI-3530-10B, CI-3530-15B, CI-3530-20B,
CI-3530-25B, CI-3530-35B & CI-3530-50B
www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
IMPORTANT! READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE STARTING!
Be sure that these instructions are carefully read and understood before any operation is attempted. Improper use of this device in some applications may result in damage or injury. The user is urged to keep this book filed in a convenient location for future reference.
These instructions may not cover all details or variations in equipment or cover every possible situation to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should problems arise that are not covered sufficiently in the text, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol for further information.
EQUIPMENT APPLICATION WARNING
The customer should note that a failure of this instrument or system, for whatever reason, may leave an operating process without protection. Depending upon the application, this could result in possible damage to property or injury to persons.
It is suggested that the purchaser review the need for additional backup equipment or provide alternate means of protection such as alarm devices, output limiting, failsafe valves, relief valves, emergency shutoffs, emergency switches, etc. If additional in-formation is required, the purchaser is advised to contact Bristol .
RETURNED EQUIPMENT WARNING
When returning any equipment to Bristol for repairs or evaluation, please note the following: The party sending such materials is responsible to ensure that the materials returned to Bristol are clean to safe levels, as such levels are defined and/or determined by applicable federal, state and/or local law regulations or codes. Such party agrees to indemnify Bristol and save Bristol harmless from any liability or damage which Bristol may incur or suffer due to such party's failure to so act.
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
Metal enclosures and exposed metal parts of electrical instruments must be grounded in accordance with OSHA rules and regulations pertaining to "Design
Safety Standards for Electrical Systems," 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart S, dated: April
16, 1981 (OSHA rulings are in agreement with the National Electrical Code).
The grounding requirement is also applicable to mechanical or pneumatic instruments that include electrically-operated devices such as lights, switches, relays, alarms, or chart drives.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FROM ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE VOLTAGE
This product contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by exposure to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) voltage. Depending on the magnitude and duration of the ESD, this can result in erratic operation or complete failure of the equipment. Read supplemental document S14006 at the back of this manual for proper care and handling of ESD-sensitive components.
Bristol 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Telephone (860) 945-2200
WARRANTY
A. Bristol warrants that goods described herein and manufactured by Bristol are free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment unless otherwise agreed to by Bristol in writing.
B. Bristol warrants that goods repaired by it pursuant to the warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period to the end of the original warranty or ninety (90) days from the date of delivery of repaired goods, whichever is longer.
C. Warranties on goods sold by, but not manufactured by Bristol, are expressly limited to the terms of the warranties given by the manufacturer of such goods.
D. All warranties are terminated in the event that the goods or systems or any part thereof are (i) misused, abused or otherwise damaged, (ii) repaired, altered or modified without Bristol's consent, (iii) not installed, maintained and operated in strict compliance with instructions furnished by Bristol, or (iv) worn, injured or damaged from abnormal or abusive use in service time.
E. THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
WARRANTIES AS TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE), AND NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, NOR ANY
REPRESENTATIONS, PROMISES, OR STATEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE BY
BRISTOL UNLESS ENDORSED HEREIN IN WRITING. FURTHER, THERE ARE
NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION OF THE
FACE HEREOF.
F. No agent of Bristol is authorized to assume any liability for it or to make any written or oral warranties beyond those set forth herein.
REMEDIES
A. Buyer's sole remedy for breach of any warranty is limited exclusively to repair or replacement without cost to Buyer of any goods or parts found by Seller to be defective if Buyer notifies Bristol in writing of the alleged defect within ten (10) days of discovery of the alleged defect and within the warranty period stated above, and if the Buyer returns such goods to Bristol's Watertown office, unless Bristol's Watertown office designates a different location, transportation prepaid, within thirty (30) days of the sending of such notification and which upon examination by Bristol proves to be defective in material and workmanship. Bristol is not responsible for any costs of removal, dismantling or reinstallation of allegedly defective or defective goods. If a Buyer does not wish to ship the product back to Bristol, the Buyer can arrange to have a Bristol service person come to the site. The Service person's transportation time and expenses will be for the account of the Buyer. However, labor for warranty work during normal working hours is not chargeable.
B. Under no circumstances will Bristol be liable for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of any agreement relating to items included in this quotation, from use of the information herein or from the purchase or use by Buyer, its em-ployees or other parties of goods sold under said agreement.
How to return material for Repair or Exchange
Before a product can be returned to Bristol for repair, upgrade, exchange, or to verify proper operation, form (GBU 13.01) must be completed in order to obtain a RA (Return
Authorization) number and thus ensure an optimal lead time. Completing the form is very important since the information permits the Bristol Repair Dept. to effectively and efficiently process the repair order.
You can easily obtain a RA number by:
A. FAX
Completing the form (GBU 13.01) and faxing it to (860) 945-3875. A Bristol Repair
Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
B. E-MAIL
Accessing the form (GBU 13.01) via the Bristol Web site (www.bristolbabcock.com) and sending it via E-Mail to [email protected]
. A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return E-Mail (or other requested method) with a RA number.
C. Mail
Mail the form (GBU 13.01) to
Bristol Inc.
Repair
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
A Bristol Repair Dept. representative will return call (or other requested method) with a RA number.
D. Phone
Calling the Bristol Repair Department at (860) 945-2442. A Bristol Repair Department representative will record a RA number on the form and complete Part I, then send the form to the Customer via fax (or other requested method) for Customer completion of Parts II & III.
A copy of the completed Repair Authorization Form with issued RA number should be included with the product being returned. This will allow us to quickly track, repair, and return your product to you.
Bristol
Repair Authorization Form
(off-line completion)
(Providing this information will permit Bristol to effectively and efficiently process your return. Completion is required to receive optimal lead time. Lack of information may result in increased lead times.)
Date___________________ RA #___________________SH
Standard Repair Practice is as follows: Variations to this is practice may be requested in the “Special Requests” section.
•
Evaluate / Test / Verify Discrepancy
•
Repair / Replace / etc. in accordance with this form
•
Return to Customer
Line No.____________
Please be aware of the Non warranty standard charge:
•
There is a $100 minimum evaluation charge, which is applied to the repair if applicable (
√
in “returned”
B,C, or D of part III below)
Part I Please complete the following information for single unit or multiple unit returns
Address No.
Bill to :
Purchase Order:
Phone:
(office use only) Address No.
Ship to:
Fax:
(office use only)
Contact Name: ____________________________________
E-Mail:
Model No./Part No. Description
Range/Calibration S/N
Reason for return : Failure Upgrade Verify Operation Other
1.
Describe the conditions of the failure (Frequency/Intermittent, Physical Damage, Environmental Conditions,
Communication, CPU watchdog, etc.)
(Attach a separate sheet if necessary)
2. Comm. interface used: Standalone RS-485 Ethernet Modem (PLM (2W or 4W) or SNW) Other: ______________
3. What is the Firmware revision? _____________________ What is the Software & version?
Part III If checking “replaced” for any question below, check an alternate option if replacement is not available
A.
If product is within the warranty time period but is excluded due to Bristol’s warranty clause, would you like the product: repaired returned replaced scrapped?
B.
If product were found to exceed the warranty period, would you like the product:
C.
If product is deemed not repairable would you like your product: repaired returned replaced scrapped? returned replaced scrapped?
D.
If Bristol is unable to verify the discrepancy, would you like the product: returned replaced *see below?
* Continue investigating by contacting the customer to learn more about the problem experienced? The person to contact that has the most knowledge of the problem is: ______________________________ phone_____________________
If we are unable to contact this person the backup person is: _________________________ phone_____________________
Special Requests: ____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Ship prepaid to: Bristol Inc., Repair Dept., 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: 860-945-2442 Fax: 860-945-2220 Form GBU 13.01 Rev. C 04/27/06
Bristol
Training
GET THE MOST FROM YOUR BRISTOL
BABCOCK INSTRUMENT OR SYSTEM
• Avoid Delays and problems in getting your system on-line
• Minimize installation, start-up and maintenance costs.
• Make the most effective use of our hardware and software.
• Know your system.
As you know, a well-trained staff is essential to your operation. Bristol Inc. offers a full schedule of classes conducted by full-time, professional instructors. Classes are offered throughout the year at three locations: Houston, Orlando and our Watertown, CT headquarters. By participating in our training, your personnel can learn how to install, calibrate, configure, program and maintain any and all Bristol products and realize the full potential of your system.
For information or to enroll in any class, contact our training department in Watertown at
(860) 945-2343. For Houston classes, you can also contact our Houston office, at (713) 685-
6200.
A Few Words About Bristol Inc.
For over 100 years, Bristol ® has been providing innovative solutions for the measurement and control industry. Our product lines range from simple analog chart recorders, to sophisticated digital remote process controllers and flow computers, all the way to turnkey
SCADA systems. Over the years, we have become a leading supplier to the electronic gas measurement, water purification, and wastewater treatment industries.
On off-shore oil platforms, on natural gas pipelines, and maybe even at your local water company, there are Bristol Inc. instruments, controllers, and systems running year-in and year-out to provide accurate and timely data to our customers.
Getting Additional Information
In addition to the information contained in this manual, you may receive additional assistance in using this product from the following sources:
Help Files / Release Notes
Many Bristol software products incorporate help screens. In addition, the software typically includes a ‘read me’ release notes file detailing new features in the product, as well as other information which was available too late for inclusion in the manual.
Contacting Bristol Inc. Directly
Bristol's world headquarters is located at 1100 Buckingham Street, Watertown,
Connecticut 06795, U.S.A.
Our main phone numbers are:
(860) 945-2200
(860) 945-2213 (FAX)
Regular office hours are Monday through Friday, 8:00AM to 4:30PM Eastern Time, excluding holidays and scheduled factory shutdowns. During other hours, callers may leave messages using Bristol's voice mail system.
Telephone Support - Technical Questions
During regular business hours, Bristol's Application Support Group can provide telephone support for your technical questions.
For technical questions about TeleFlow products call (860) 945-8604.
For technical questions about Control Wave call (860) 945-2394 or (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions regarding Bristol’s OpenEnterprise product, call (860) 945-3865 or e-mail: [email protected]
For technical questions regarding ACCOL products, OpenBSI Utilities , UOI and all other software except for Control Wave and OpenEnterprise products, call (860) 945-2286.
For technical questions about Network 3000 hardware, call (860) 945-2502.
You can e-mail the Application Support Group at: [email protected]
The Application Support Group maintains an area on our web site for software updates and technical information. Go to: www.bristolbabcock.com/services/techsupport/
For assistance in interfacing Bristol hardware to radios, contact Bristol’s Communication
Technology Group in Orlando, FL at (407) 629-9463 or (407) 629-9464 .
You can e-mail the Communication Technology Group at: [email protected]
Telephone Support - Non-Technical Questions, Product Orders, etc.
Questions of a non-technical nature (product orders, literature requests, price and delivery information, etc.) should be directed to the nearest sales office (listed on the rear cover of this manual) or to your Bristol-authorized sales representative.
Please call the main Bristol Inc. number (860-945-2200) if you are unsure which office covers your particular area.
Visit our Site on the World Wide Web
For general information about Bristol Inc. and its products, please visit our site on the
World Wide Web at: www.bristolbabcock.com
Training Courses
Bristol’s Training Department offers a wide variety of courses in Bristol hardware and software at our Watertown, Connecticut headquarters, and at selected Bristol regional offices, throughout the year. Contact our Training Department at (860) 945-2343 for course information, enrollment, pricing, and scheduling.
PIP-EXPTIBTF
EXPANSION TRANSMITTER INTERFACE
BOARD
PT. Number 392960-01-0
Product Information Package
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
1.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................... 1
Operation ........................................................................................ 1
1.2 Features................................................................................................................ 2
1.3 JUMPER
Section 2 – INSTALLATION & SERVICE
REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION OF THE ETIB................... 3
Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Transmitter Interface Board ............ 3
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
2.1.1.2
Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B.................................. 3
Installation/Removal for Models 353-20B & -25B............................................ 10
2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Model 3530-35B........................................................ 12
2.2 FIELD
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.2
2.2.1.3
WIRING ................................................................................................. 13
2.2.1 Terminal
Terminal Connections for Model 3808 Transmitters....................................... 14
Terminal Connections for a single Model 3508 Transmitter........................... 14
Trminal Connections for two Model 3508 Transmitters.................................. 15
3.1 GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................... 17
SPECIFICATION ........................................................................... 17
3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL
SUPPLEMENTS
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
BLANK PAGE
Section 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
Expansion Transmitter Interface Boards (ETIBs) allow up to two (2) Bristol, Series 3508 or
Series 3808 Transmitters to communicate with an ACCOL loaded host TeleFlow or
TeleFlow Plus Electronic Gas Measurement Computer (EGMC) (3530-10B/20B), a
TeleRTU, TeleRTU Plus or TeleRTU Module (3530-15B/25B/35B) or a TeleFlow Corrector
(3530-50B). The TeleFlow EGMC/RTU/Corrector polls and stores data from each transmitter and communicates with the network.
The ETIB Board interfaced to a TeleFlow/TeleRTU CPU Board via the CPU Board’s
Expansion Connector. Power from and communication with the host CPU Board is supplied through the Expansion Connector. ETIB Boards contain one jumper (JP1) for configuration.
1.1.1 Transmitter Operation
3508 Series
Each Model 3508 Transmitter must be assigned a unique address via the SMARTKIT program as described in Section 4.2 PROGRAM LOADING AND STARTUP of the appropriate 3508 Transmitter manual. Additionally, all Model 3508 Transmitters wired to the TI Board must be operated in the minimum current mode (3.8 mA). This mode is selected via the SMARTKIT program as described in Section 4.7 TRANSMITTER
OPERATING MODES of the appropriate 3508 Transmitter manual, i.e., CI-3508-10C, CI-
3508-30C or CI-3508-99C.
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 1 - Transmitter Interface Board P/N 392960-01-0
Page 1 Expansion TIB Option
3808 MVT Series
Each Model 3808 MVT Transmitter must be assigned a unique address via the WebBSI
Sign On/Off Menu (see Section 3 of Customer Instruction Manual CI-3808). Additionally, only analog versions of the 3808 MVT can be interfaced to a Transmitter Interface Board.
1.1.2 Features
• ESD & Transient Susceptibility
Field connected circuitry has been designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV and the requirements of ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.1-1989 (formerly IEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
• EMI Compatibility
ETIB Boards have been designed to coexist inside a shielded enclosure with the
TeleFlow ™ electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.
• Mounting
The ETIB Board measures 3.75” (9.525cm) in width x 4.0” (10.160cm) in height and mounts piggy-back on a TeleFlow or TeleRTU CPU Board.
1.2 JUMPER JP1
Jumper JP1 is used to configure the ETIB for operation with one or two 3508/3808 Transmitters. If only one 3508/3808 Transmitter is to be connected to the ETIB, Jumper JP1 must be installed across JP1-1 and JP1-2. Additionally, when only one 3508/3808
Transmitter is to be connected to the ETIB, it must be connected to connector TB1. When two 3508/3808 Transmitters are connected to the ETIB, Jumper JP1 must be removed and stored in either JP1-1 or JP1-2.
Expansion TIB Option Page 2 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Section 2
INSTALLATION & SERVICE
2.1 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT & INSTALLATION OF THE ETIB
2.1.1 Removal/Replacement of the Expansion Transmitter Interface Bd.
An installed ETIB option will contain the following parts:
1. Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) (with removable Terminal Blocks)
2. Three #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs (Note: Models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B will also contain
Three (3) #4-40 x .188” Standoffs & Two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM Screws)
3. Modified PC Shield Assembly (for models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B)
WARNING
Never attempt to service a TeleFlow or TeleRTU while it is powered and operating in a hazardous environment.
Either the area must be made safe or the unit must be powered down, unwired, unmounted, and taken to a safe, non-hazardous area.
WARNING
Never attempt to install or remove any components
(PCBs, Field Wiring, Transducers, etc.) while the unit is powered and running. Doing so can cause sudden electrical transients or imbalances that are capable of causing damage to the module or component in question, as well as other associated circuit boards. Always turn off the external/internal power source, including any additional supply sources used for externally-powered
I/O circuits, before changing or adding any components.
CAUTION
Place any related critical processes under manual or auxiliary control prior to shutting down or performing any of the steps discussed herein.
2.1.1.1 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-10B, -15B & -50B
To install the optional ETIB option into a model 3530-10B, -15B or -50B, follow steps 1 through 13 below. To remove the optional ETIB Board, see step 14. Note: The Instrument
Front Cover must be open.
1.
To open the Instrument Front Cover, remove the lock if present and turn each of the three captive screws a quarter (1/4) turn counterclockwise.
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 3 Expansion TIB Option
Note:
The CPU Board is not to be removed under any circumstances unless the unit has been moved to an ESD safe area (see ESDS Manual - S14006).
2.
Remove the Power Plug(s), Solar Panel Power Plug, and the Auxiliary Power Plug as required, from the CPU Board in question.
3.
Remove the optional radio or modem if installed.
To remove an optional modem :
Disconnect the phone wires. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with modem) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the modem to the left and remove it and then disconnect the D-Type connector from the modem.
To remove an optional radio :
Disconnect the Radio/TeleFlow Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Unplug the 2-wire power connector associated with the 2-wire Radio Power Interface Cable from the bottom of the Radio. Loosen the four (4) screws that secure the Modem/Radio
Mounting Plate (with radio) to the Battery Mounting Bracket. Slide the radio to the left and remove it.
4.
Remove the Battery(s) (if present).
To remove the battery(s) from units without an optional modem or radio :
Hold the battery securely and remove the Left Battery Mounting Bracket (secured with 2 screws. Loosen the screws which secure the Right Battery Mounting Bracket
(Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Remove the Right Battery
Mounting Bracket.
To remove the battery(s) from units with an optional modem or radio :
Carefully remove the battery (with wiring harness). Note: You may have to loosen the two left 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws that secure the left side of the Battery Mounting Bracket and the Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit.
While holding the Main
Mounting Bracket, remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/8” screws and lock washers that secure the Battery Mounting Bracket and Main Mounting Bracket to the rear of the unit. Remove the Battery Mounting Bracket and temporarily reinstall the four screws to secure the Main Mounting Bracket to the 3530-10B or 3530-15B.
5.
Disconnect the Local Port, Network Port, RTD, and Field I/O wires from the CPU
Board connectors by unplugging their associated Terminal Plugs (front edge of CPU).
6. Carefully remove the PC Shield which is secured to the Main Mounting Bracket by 2
(#4-40 x 1/4”) screws and to the CPU Board by 2 (#4-40 x 1/4”) screws.
7. Remove the screw (location ‘A’ in Figures 2 & 3) and the two (2) #4-40 x 5/8” Standoffs
(location ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) which secure the CPU Board to the Main Mounting
Bracket. Replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
8.
Align the ETIB Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-10B) or
J18 (for 3530-15B). Push the EXPCOM232 Board toward the CPU Board until
Connector P1 is fully seated.
Expansion TIB Option Page 4 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 2 - TeleFlow CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
9.
Secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x .188”
Standoffs at Locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ (see Figures 2 & 3).
10. Carefully install the Modified PC Shield, securing it to the Main Mounting Bracket (at locations ‘C’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/4” screws and to the CPU Board (at locations ‘B’) with two (2) #4-40 x 1/8” SEM screws (see Figures 4, 5, 6 & 7).
11. Follow steps 2 through 6 in reverse order, replacing rather than removing the item in question.
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 5 Expansion TIB Option
12.
Install 3508/3808 Transmitter wiring to the ETIB Board (see Section 2.2.1). Wiring should be routed through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.
Figure 3 - TeleRTU CPU Board – Installation Drawing #1
13.
Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
14. To remove an optional ETIB Board, follow steps 1 through 6 (unplug the Field Wiring
Terminals during step 5). Remove the PC Shield along with the three Standoffs that
Expansion TIB Option Page 6 PIP-EXPTIBTF
secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board. Then unplug the ETIB Board from the CPU
Board in question.
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 4 - TeleFlow CPU Board (with ETIB Installed)
Installation Drawing #2
Page 7 Expansion TIB Option
Figure 5 - TeleRTU CPU Board (with ETIB Installed)
Expansion TIB Option
Installation Drawing #2
Page 8 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 6 - 3530-10B & 3530-50B (with ETIB Installed)
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 7 - 3530-15B (with ETIB Installed)
Page 9 Expansion TIB Option
2.1.1.2 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-20B & -25B
To install the optional ETIB Board into a model 3530-20B or 3530-25B, follow steps 1 through 10 below. To remove the optional ETIB Board, perform steps 1 and 2 and then follow steps 4 through 9 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down. Note: The Instrument Front Cover must be open.
1.
Open the Instrument Front Cover
2.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug (P8 for TeleFlow - P2 for
TeleRTU) from the CPU Board edge connector (J8 for TeleFlow - J2 for TeleRTU).
Expansion TIB Option
Figure 8 - 3530-20B CPU (with ETIB Installed)
Page 10 PIP-EXPTIBTF
3.
Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
4.
Remove the two screws that secure the CPU Board’s Sliding Mounting Bracket to the
Fixed Bracket on the bottom of the Battery Bracket. Carefully slide the CPU Board
(and optional ETIB Board) toward the front of the unit. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J12 on the TeleFlow CPU - J14 on TeleRTU CPU), the
Display Module (J2 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), the Wakeup Switch (J3 on TeleFlow CPU - J16 on TeleRTU CPU), and for TeleFlow CPU Boards connector J1
(associated with the Multivariable Transducer).
Figure 9 - 3530-25B CPU (with ETIB Installed)
5.
Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the Sliding Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 11 Expansion TIB Option
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
6.
Align the ETIB Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J4 (for 3530-20B) or
J18 (for 3530-25B). Push the ETIB Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
7.
Secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4” SEM screws as illustrated in Figures 8 & 9.
8.
Install 3508/3808 Transmitter wiring to the ETIB Board (see Section 2.2.1). Wiring should be routed through a ¾” conduit fitting (user installed) on the bottom of the enclosure.
9. Close and secure the Instrument Front Cover.
2.1.1.3 Installation/Removal for Models 3530-35B
To install the optional ETIB Board into a model 3530-35B, follow steps 1 through 7 below.
To remove the optional ETIB Board, perform step 1 and then follow steps 5 through 7 in reverse order, removing rather than installing the item in question after the system has been shut down.
1.
Disconnect power by removing harness connector plug P2 from the CPU Board edge connector J2.
2. Unplug the remaining removable Terminal Blocks (with wiring harnesses installed) from the CPU Board’s front edge connectors.
3. Remove harness connections from the Front Panel Switch (J14), the Display Module
(J16) and the Wakeup Switch (J16).
4. Remove the three screws (of five) that secure the CPU Board to the RTU Mounting
Bracket (locations ‘A’ & ‘B’ in Figures 2 & 3) and replace these items with the three new #4-40 x 15/32” Standoffs.
Note:
This operation should only be performed in an ESD safe area.
5. Align the ETIB Board Connector P1 with CPU Board Connector J18. Push the ETIB
Board toward the CPU Board until Connector P1 is fully seated.
6.
Secure the ETIB Board to the CPU Board by installing three (3) #4-40 x 1/4” SEM screws as illustrated in Figure 10.
7.
Install 3508/3808 Transmitter wiring to the ETIB Board (see Section 2.2.1).
Expansion TIB Option Page 12 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Figure 10 - 3530-35B (with ETIB Installed)
2.2 FIELD WIRING
The device uses compression-type terminals that accommodate up to #14 AWG wire. A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch Max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and then securing the screw. Insert the bared end fully to prevent short circuits.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. The slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the printed circuit boards and harnesses.
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 13 Expansion TIB Option
2.2.1 Terminal Connections
2.2.1.1 Terminal Connections for Model 3808 Transmitters
ETIB Boards contain two terminal blocks that are used to provide field wiring connections to up to two Model 3808 Transmitters. TB1 & TB2 are two-position Terminal Blocks which connect to the signal/power inputs of the Transmitters.
JP1 Note:
If only one Transmitter is connected to the ETIB,
Jumper JP1 must be INSTALLED across JP1-1 & JP1-2.
When two Transmitters are connected to the ETIB,
Jumper JP1 must be REMOVED. Store the Jumper on
Jumper Post JP1-1 or JP1-2.
Note:
When only one Transmitter is connected to the ETIB, it
MUST BE connected to TB1.
Figure 11 - Internally Powered Model 3808 Transmitters - Field Wiring Diagram
ETIB Boards may be connected to up to two internally powered Model 3808 Transmitters.
Connection to internally powered Model 3808 Transmitters (powered from ETIB’s on-board
+12V Supply/Regulator) is illustrated in Figure 11.
2.2.1.2 Terminal Connections for a single Model 3508 Transmitter
The two-position Terminal Block TB1 is utilized to provide field wiring connections to an internally powered Model 3508 Transmitter.
Expansion TIB Option Page 14 PIP-EXPTIBTF
JP1 Note:
Jumper JP1 must be INSTALLED across JP1-1 & JP1-2.
Figure 12 - Internally Powered Model 3508 Transmitter - Field Wiring Diagram
Connection to an internally powered Model 3508 Transmitter (powered from the ETIB’s onboard Supply/Regulator) is illustrated in Figure 12.
2.2.1.3 Terminal Connections for two Model 3508 Transmitters
ETIB Boards contain two terminal blocks that are used to provide field wiring connections for up to two Model 3508 Transmitters. TB1 & TB2 are two-position Terminal Blocks which connect to the signal/power inputs of the Transmitters. When using two Model 3508
Transmitters, an external 21 Volt (dc) power supply must be utilized (see Figure 13).
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 15 Expansion TIB Option
JP1 Note:
Jumper JP1 must be REMOVED. Store the Jumper on
Jumper Post JP1-1 or JP1-2.
TeleFlow CPU Connector J5-5
TeleRTU CPU Connector J6-2
GND
External 21V
Power Supply
Figure 13 - Externally Powered Model 3508 Transmitters - Field Wiring Diagram
Expansion TIB Option Page 16 PIP-EXPTIBTF
Section 3
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Communication Interface:
3508/3808 Interface:
ESD Susceptibility:
EMI Compatibility:
RS-232 ( ± 3V minimum)
FSK Modem - Bell 202 Compatible
(1200 Hz/2200 Hz modulation)
Baud rate is 1200
Field connected circuits are designed to meet the requirements of IEC 801-2 for ESD withstand capability up to 10KV.
Designed to coexist within a shielded enclosure with the TeleFlow (3530-10/20B) or the TeleRTU (3530-15B/25B) electronics. EMI radiation is insignificant and susceptibility is comparable or superior to associated electronics.
Transient Susceptibility: Field connected circuits are designed to meet the requirements of ANSI/-
IEEEC37.90-1998 (Formerly IEEE 472) for surge withstand capability.
3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Vibration:
-40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)
-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°C)
15% - 90% Non-condensing
1G for 10Hz to 500Hz per SAMA PMC-31-1
(without damage or impairment)
PIP-EXPTIBTF Page 17 Expansion TIB Option
BLANK PAGE
Expansion Transmitter Interface Board
Special Instructions for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1. The Bristol Expansion Transmitter Interface Board (ETIB) is listed by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) as nonincendive and is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups
A, B, C and D hazardous locations or non-hazardous locations only. Read this document carefully before installing a nonincendive Britol ETIB Board. In the event of a conflict between the ETIB Board User Manual (PIP-EXPTIBTF) and this document, always follow the instructions in this document.
2. Wiring must be performed in accordance with Class I, Division 2 wiring methods as defined in Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 for installations within the United States, or as specified in Section 18-152 of the Canadian Electrical
Code for installation in Canada.
3. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Substitution of components may impair suitability for use in Class I, Division 2 environments.
4. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - When situated in a hazardous location, turn off power before servicing/replacing the unit and before installing or removing I/O wiring.
5. WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD - Do Not disconnect equipment unless the power has been switched off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
03/14/2007 Appendix A of PIP-EXPTIBTF - ETIB Board Page 1 of 1
Product Information Package
Expansion Transmitter Interface Board Part No. 392960-01-0
PIP-EXPTIBTF
Mar., 2007
Emerson Process Management
Bristol, Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2262
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Electric Canada, Ltd.
Bristol Canada
6338 Viscount Rd.
Mississauga, Ont. L4V 1H3
Canada
Phone: 905-362-0880
Fax: 905-362-0882 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso
Col. Morales Polanco
11540 Mexico, D.F.
Mexico
Phone: (52-55)-52-81-81-12
Fax: (52-55)-52-81-81-09 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
Bristol Babcock, Ltd.
Blackpole Road
Worcester, WR3 8YB
United Kingdom
Phone: +44 1905 856950
Fax: +44 1905 856969 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
Bristol, Inc.
22 Portofino Crescent,
Grand Canals Bunbury, Western Australia 6230
Mail to: PO Box 1987 (zip 6231)
Phone: +61 (8) 9725-2355
Fax: +61 (8) 8 9725-2955 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
If you have comments or questions regarding this manual, please direct them to your local Bristol sales representative, or direct them to one of the addresses listed at left.
Bristol, Inc. does not guarantee the accuracy, sufficiency or suitability of the software delivered herewith. The Customer shall inspect and test such software and other materials to his/her satisfaction before using them with important data.
There are no warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, concerning the software and other materials delivered herewith.
TeleFlow
™
is a trademark of Bristol, Inc. The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2007, Bristol, Inc., 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol, Inc.
Supplement Guide - S1400A
Issue: 04/03
TeleFlow
TM
SITE CONSIDERATIONS
For
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION,
GROUNDING
&
WIRING
A Guide for the Protection of
Site Equipment & Personnel
In the Installation of
Series 3530-XX-X Instrumentation
Bristol Babcock
NOTICE
Copyright Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol Babcock assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Request for Additional Instructions
Additional copies of instruction manuals may be ordered from the address below per attention of the Sales Order Processing Department. List the instruction book numbers or give complete model number, serial or software version number. Furnish a return address that includes the name of the person who will receive the material. Billing for extra copies will be according to current pricing schedules.
TeleFlow TM and TeleRTU TM are trademarks of Bristol Babcock. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2003 Bristol Babcock, 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol Babcock.
Supplement Guide S1400A
SITE CONSIDERATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION, GROUNDING & WIRING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.2
3.1
3.1.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.1.1
3.3.1.2
3.3.1.3
3.3.2
3.3.2.1
3.3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
SECTION TITLE
1.1
1.2
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
PAGE #
GENERAL INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................1-1
MAJOR TOPICS.............................................................................................................1-1
PROTECTING INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS...................................................................2-1
Quality Is Conformance To Requirements....................................................................2-1
PROTECTING EQUIPMENT & PERSONNEL ...........................................................2-1
Considerations For The Protection of Personnel.......................................................... 2-2
Considerations For The Protection of Equipment........................................................2-2
OTHER SITE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS...............................................................2-3
Section 3 - GROUNDING & ISOLATION
POWER & GROUND SYSTEMS...................................................................................3-1
Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8. ............................................................................. 3-1
IMPORTANCE OF GOOD GROUNDS.........................................................................3-2
EARTH GROUND CONNECTIONS.............................................................................3-2
Establishing a Good Earth Ground. ..............................................................................3-2
Soil Conditions................................................................................................................3-3
Soil Types ........................................................................................................................3-3
Dry, Sandy or Rocky Soil................................................................................................3-5
Ground Wire Considerations. ........................................................................................3-6
Modem Ground Wiring Diagrams .................................................................................3-7
Other Grounding Considerations. ...............................................................................3-20
ISOLATING EQUIPMENT FROM THE PIPELINE .................................................3-21
Meter Runs Without Cathodic Protection...................................................................3-21
Meter Runs With Cathodic Protection ........................................................................3-22
Section 4 - LIGHTNING ARRESTERS & SURGE PROTECTORS
STROKES & STRIKES ..................................................................................................4-1
Chance of Being Struck by Lightning. ..........................................................................4-1
Antenna Caution ............................................................................................................4-3
Ground Propagation .......................................................................................................4-5
Tying it all Together.......................................................................................................4-5
Impulse Protection Summary ........................................................................................4-5
USE OF LIGHTNING ARRESTERS & SURGE PROTECTORS................................4-6
Supplement S1400A Page 0-1 Table Of Contents
Supplement Guide S1400A
SITE CONSIDERATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION, GROUNDING & WIRING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
SECTION TITLE PAGE #
OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................5-1
INSTRUMENT WIRING. ..............................................................................................5-1
Common Returns............................................................................................................5-1
Use of Twisted Shielded Pair Wiring (with Overall Insulation)..................................5-2
Grounding of Cable Shields. ..........................................................................................5-3
Use of Known Good Earth Grounds ..............................................................................5-3
Earth Ground Wires .......................................................................................................5-3
Working Neatly & Professionally ..................................................................................5-3
High Power Conductors and Signal Wiring ..................................................................5-4
Use of Proper Wire Size ................................................................................................. 5-4
Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors .......................................................................5-4
Secure Wiring Connections............................................................................................5-5
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
1. IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - ANSI/IEEE Std
142-1982
2. IEEE Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment to Minimize Electrical Noise inputs to Controllers from External Sources - IEE Std 518-1982
3.
Lightning Strike Protect; Roy B. Carpenter, Jr. & Mark N. Drabkin, Ph.D.; Lightning Eliminators &
Consultant, Inc., 6687 Arapahoe Road, Boulder Colorado
4.
Lightning Protection Manual for Rural Electric Systems, NRECA Research Project 82-5, Washington DC,
1983
5.
Grounding for the Control of EMI; Hugh W. Denny; Don White Consultants, Inc., 1983, 1 st Edition
6.
Fundamentals of EGM - Electrical Installations; Michael D. Price; NorAm Gas Transmission, 525 Milam
Street, Shreveport, Louisiana 71151
7.
TeleFlow Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8 Installation Instructions - PIP-3530MGKI; Bristol Babcock,
Watertown, CT 06795
Supplement S1400A Page 0-2 Table Of Contents
Section 1 - Overview
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This document provides information pertaining to the installation of TeleFlow systems; more specifically, information covering reasons, theory and techniques for protecting your personnel and equipment from electrical damage. Your instrument system affects the quality of service provided by your company and many aspects of its operational safety.
Loss of instruments means lost production and profits as well as increased expenses.
Information contained in this document is for educational purposes. Bristol Babcock makes no warranties or guarantees on the effectiveness or the safety of techniques described herein.
Where the safety of installations and personnel is concerned, refer to the National Electrical
Code Rules and rules of local regulatory agencies.
1.2
MAJOR TOPICS
Topics are covered in seven sections designed to pinpoint major areas of concern for the protection of site equipment and personnel. The following overview is provided for each of the major sections.
· Section 2 - Protection
This section provides the reasons for protecting instrument systems. An overview of the definition of quality and what we are trying to accomplish in the protection of site installations and how to satisfy the defined requirements is presented. Additionally, this section provides considerations for the protection of personnel and equipment.
· Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Construction of the TeleFlow with respect to grounds, isolation and electrical considerations is discussed. Information pertaining to what constitutes a good earth ground, how to test and establish such grounds, as well as when and how to connect equipment to earth grounds is provided
· Section 4 - Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors
Some interesting information dealing with Lightning strikes and strokes is presented in technical and statistical form along with a discussion of how to determine the likelyhood of a lightning strike.
Protecting equipment and personnel during the installation of radios and antenna is discussed in a review of the dangers to equipment and personnel when working with antennas. Reasons for the use of lightning arresters and surge protectors are presented along with overviews of how each device protects site equipment.
· Section 5 - Wiring Techniques
Installation of Power and “Measurement & Control” wiring is discussed. Information on obscure problems, circulating ground and power loops, bad relays, etc. is presented.
Good wire preparation and connection techniques along with problems to avoid are discussed. This sections list the ten rules of instrument wiring.”
Section 1 - Overview Page 1-1 S1400A
Section 2 - Protection
2.1 PROTECTING INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS
Electrical instrumentation is susceptible to damage from a variety of natural and man made phenomena. In addition to wind, rain and fire, the most common types of system and equipment damaging phenomena are lightning, power faults, communication surges & noise and other electrical interference’s caused by devices such as radios, welders, switching gear, automobiles, etc. Additionally there are problems induced by geophysical electrical potential & noise plus things that are often beyond our wildest imagination.
2.1.1 Quality Is Conformance To Requirements
A quality instrumentation system is one that works reliably, safely and as purported by the equipment manufacturer (and in some cases by the system integrator) as a result of good equipment design and well defined and followed installation practices. If we except the general definition of quality to be, “quality is conformance to requirements,” we must also except the premise that a condition of “quality” can’t exist where requirements for such an end have not been evolved. In other words, you can’t have quality unless you have requirements that have been followed. By understanding the requirements for a safe, sound and reliable instrumentation system, and by following good installation practices (as associated with the personnel and equipment in question), the operational integrity of the equipment and system will be enhanced.
Understanding what is required to properly install BBI equipment in various environments, safely, and in accordance with good grounding, isolating and equipment protection practices goes a long way toward maintaining a system which is healthy to the owner and customer alike. Properly installed equipment is easier to maintain and operate, and is more efficient and as such more profitable to our customers. Following good installation practices will minimize injury, equipment failure and the customer frustrations that accompany failing and poorly operating equipment (of even the finest design). Additionally, personnel involved in the installation of a piece of equipment add to or subtract from the reliability of a system by a degree which is commensurate with their technical prowess, i.e., their understanding of the equipment, site conditions and the requirements for a quality installation.
2.2
PROTECTING EQUIPMENT & PERSONNEL
TeleFlow installations must be performed in accordance with National Electrical Code
Rules, electrical rules set by local regulatory agencies, and depending on the customer environment (gas, water, etc), other national, state and local agencies such as the American
Water Works Association (AWWA). Additionally, installation at various customer sites may be performed in conjunction with a “safety manager” or utility personnel with HAZMAT
(hazardous material) training on materials present (or potentially present) as required by
OSHA, the customer, etc.
Section 2 - Protection Page 2-1 S1400A
2.2.1
Considerations For The Protection of Personnel
Always evaluate the site environment as if your life depended on it. Make sure that you understand the physical nature of the location where you will be working. Table 2-1 provides a general guideline for evaluating an installation site.
Table 2-1 - Installation Site Safety Evaluation Guide
#
1 Indoor or outdoor – Dress Appropriately
Guide
2 If outdoor, what kind of environment, terrain, etc. Watch out for local varmint (bees, spiders, snakes, etc.)
3 If indoor or outdoor – determine if there are any pieces of dangerous equipment or any processes which might be a risk to your safety
4 If in a tunnel, bunker, etc. watch out for a build up of toxic or flammable gases. Make sure the air is good. Watch out for local varmint (bees, spiders, snakes, etc.)
5 Hazardous or Non-Hazardous Environment – Wear appropriate safety equipment and perform all necessary safety measures.
6 Before installing any equipment or power or ground wiring, make sure that there are no lethal (life threatening) voltages between the site where the instrument will be installed and other equipment, pipes, cabinets, etc. or to earth itself.
7 Never assume that adjacent or peripheral equipment has been properly installed and grounded. Determine if this equipment and a TeleFlow can be touched simultaneously without hazard to personnel and/or equipment?
8 Before embarking to remote locations where there are few or no human inhabitants ask a few simple questions like, should I bring water, food, hygienic materials, first aid kit, etc?
Be Prepared!
9 Observe the work habits of those around you – for your own safety!
Some of the items that a service person should consider before ever going on site can be ascertained by simply asking questions of the appropriate individual. Obviously other safety considerations can only be established at the installation site.
2.2.2
Considerations For The Protection of Equipment
Always evaluate the site installation/service environment and equipment. Understand the various physical interfaces you will be dealing with such as TeleFlow mounting and supporting, transducer mechanical and electrical connections, TeleFlow analog and digital circuits, power circuits, communication circuits and various electrical grounds. Table 2-2 provides a general guideline for evaluating the equipment protection requirements of an installation site.
Table 2-2 – Equipment Protection Site Safety Evaluation Guide
# Guide
1 Environment - Class I, Division 2 - Nonincendive
Environment - Class I, Division 1 - Intrinsically Safe
Other – Safe or unrated area
2 Earth Ground - Established by mechanical/electrical or
(both) or not at all.
3 Is the area prone to lightning strikes?
4 Are there surge suppressors installed or to be installed?
5 Are there overhead or underground power or communication cables in the immediate area?
Reference Section
See Appendix A of CI-3530-XX-X
See Appendix B of CI-3530-XX-X
See Section 3
See Section 4
See Section 4
See Section 2.3
S1400A Page 2-2 Section 2 - Protection
Table 2-2 –Equipment Protection Site Safety Evaluation Guide (Continued)
# Guide
6 Is there an antenna in the immediate area?
7 If pipe mounted, is a cathodic charge present on the pipe? Should the
TeleFlow be isolated?
8 How close is other equipment? Can someone safely touch this equipment and a TeleFlow simultaneously?
9 Determine equipment ground requirements. How will the TeleFlow and its related wiring be grounded? Consider Earth Ground, Circuit
Ground, Conduit Ground, Site Grounds, Manifold grounded or not?
10 Are there any obviously faulty or questionable power or ground circuits?
Reference Section
See Section 4.1.2
See Section 3.4
See Section 2.3
See Section 3
See Section 2.3
2.3
OTHER SITE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Overhead or underground power or communication cables must be identified prior to installing a new unit. Accidentally cutting, shorting or simply just contacting power, ground, communication or process control I/O wiring can have potentially devastating effects on site equipment, the process system and or personnel.
Don’t assume that it is safe to touch adjacent equipment, machinery, pipes, cabinets or even the earth itself. Adjacent equipment may not have been properly wired or grounded, may be defective or may have one or more loose system grounds. Measure between the case of a questionable piece of equipment and its earth ground for voltage. If a voltage is present, something is wrong.
AC powered equipment with a conductive case should have the case grounded. If you don’t see a chassis ground wire, don’t assume that it is safe to touch this equipment. If you notice that equipment has been grounded to pipes, conduit, structural steel, etc., you should be leery. Note: AWWA’s policy on grounding of electric circuits on water pipes states,
“The American Water Works Association (AWWA) opposes the grounding of electrical systems to pipe systems conveying water to the customer’s premises….”
Be sure that the voltage between any two points in the instrument system is less than the stand-off voltage. Exceeding the stand-off voltage will cause damage to the instrument and will cause the instrument to fail.
Section 2 - Protection Page 2-3 S1400A
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
3.1 POWER & GROUND SYSTEMS
TeleFlow GFCs, TeleFlow ECRs, TeleFlow Correctors, TeleRTUs and TeleRecorders are similar in that they all have basically two system grounds, i.e., Chassis Gnd and
CPU/Circuit Ground. Chassis Ground is galvanically isolated from CPU/Circuit Ground by
500V (ac/dc). A jumper on the CPU Board would (if installed) place these two ground systems at the same potential and thus eliminate the 500V galvanic isolation. Installation of this jumper is not recommended. CPU/Circuit Ground consists of Power, Analog, Digital, and Comm. Grounds (all common).
Teleflows are DC (+6V or +12V) systems. AC power supplies are not provided with
TeleFlows. The TeleFlow’s Electronics are galvanically isolated from the case and should not be affected by cathodic protection or other EMF on the pipeline. Grounding to the pipeline, i.e., completing a connection between the 3530-XXX Ground Lug and the mounting media (valve, manifold, pipeline, etc.) is not recommended even if the media in question is earth grounded. When grounding a TeleFlow, always connect directly to a known good Earth Ground.
NOTE
Never connect the CPU Board’s Ground Lug to Earth Ground. The
CPU Board’s CPU/Circuit Ground must always be isolated from the case. The TeleFlow/TeleRTU/TeleRecorder case is to be connected to
Earth Ground.
NOTE
Some 3530-20Bs and 3530-25Bs have been factory shipped with the
Cabinet Ground Cable connected to the CPU Board’s Ground Ring.
Remove this ground connection from the CPU Board. This cable should be removed (or electrically isolated) if a modem is not present. If a modem is present, the Cabinet Ground Cable should be connected to the modem.
3.1.1 Modem Grounding Kit 621495-01-8
Some TeleFlows (3530-10B), TeleRTUs (3530-15B), TeleRecorders (3530-45B) and TeleFlow
Correctors (3530-50B) have been shipped without a system Ground Lug. These units must be modified before they can be properly connected to earth ground. Product Information
Package PIP-3530-MGKI provides the information required to properly install the TeleFlow
Modem Grounding Kit (621495-01-8). This kit may also be used to support a TeleRTU
Module (3530-35B).
The TeleFlow Modem Grounding Kit consists of the following items: i Hex Nut - #10-32 i Cabinet Ground Cable i Self-Locking Nut - #10-32 UNF i Flat Washer - #10 i Ground Lug
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-1 S1400A
i Pan Head Screw - #10-32 x 3/4”) i Pan Head Screw - - #4-40 x 3/8” i Self-Locking Nut - #4-40 UNC i Hex Nut - #4-40
3.2 IMPORTANCE OF GOOD GROUNDS
Model 3530-XXXs are utilized in instrument and control systems that must operate continually and within their stated accuracy over long periods of time with minimum attention. Since many system sites are unmanned and located in remote areas, failures resulting from an improperly grounded system can become costly in terms of lost time and disrupted processes. A properly grounded system will help prevent electrical shock hazards resulting from contact with live metal surfaces, provide additional protection of equipment from lightning strikes and power surges, minimize the effects of electrical noise and power transients, and reduce signal errors caused by ground wiring loops. Conversely, an improperly grounded system may exhibit a host of problems that appear to have no relationship to grounding. It is essential that the reader (service technician) have a good understanding of this subject to prevent needless troubleshooting procedures.
WARNING
This device must be installed in accordance with the National
Electrical Code (NEC) ANSI/NEPA-70. Installation in hazardous locations must also comply with Article 500 of the code. For information on the usage of Model 3530-XXX units in Class I, Division
2, Groups C & D Hazardous and Nonhazardous locations, see appendix A of the applicable CI-3530-XXX manual. For information on the usage of Models 3530-10B, 3530-40B & 3530-50B in Class I,
Division 1, Groups C & D Hazardous locations, see appendix B of CI-
3530-10B, CI-3530-40B or CI-3530-50B.
3.3
EARTH GROUND CONNECTIONS
To properly ground a TeleFlow (3530-10B/20B/40B), TeleRTU (3530-15B/25B),
TeleRecorder (3530-45B/55B) or TeleFlow Corrector (3530-50B), connect the Earth Ground wire between the Ground Lug on the bottom of the case and a known good Earth Ground.
Observe recommendations provided in topics Establishing a Good Earth Ground and
Ground Wire Considerations. Note: In the case of the TeleRecorder (3530-55B), connection to a known good Earth Ground is only required when a BBI 9600 PSTN modem is installed.
3.3.1 Establishing a Good Earth Ground
A common misconception of a ground is that it consists of nothing more than a metal pipe driven into the soil. While such a ground may function for some applications, it will often not be suitable for a complex system of sophisticated electronic equipment. Conditions such as soil type, composition and moisture will all have a bearing on ground reliability.
A basic ground consists of a 3/4-inch diameter rod with a minimum 8-foot length driven into conductive earth to a depth of about 7-feet as shown in Figure 3-1. Number 3 or 4 AWG solid copper wire should be used for the ground wire. The end of the wire should be clean,
S1400A Page 3-2 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
free of any coating and fastened to the rod with a clamp. This ground connection should be covered or coated to protect it from the weather and the environment.
Figure 3-1 - Basic Ground Rod Installation
3.3.1.1 Soil Conditions
Before installing a ground rod, the soil type and moisture content should be analyzed.
Ideally, the soil should be moist and moderately packed throughout to the depth of the ground rod. However, some soils will exhibit less than ideal conditions and will require extra attention.
Soil types can be placed into two general categories with respect to establishing and maintaining a good earth ground, i.e., ‘Good Soil’ and ‘Poor Soil.’
To be a good conductor, soil must contain some moisture and free ions (from salts in the soil). In very rainy areas, the salts may be washed out of the soil. In very sandy or arid area the soil may be to dry and/or salt free to a good conductor. If salt is lacking add rock salt
(NaCl); if the soil is dry add calcium chloride (CaCl
2
).
3.3.1.2 Soil Types: Good
Damp Loam
Salty Soil or Sand
Farm Land
Poor
Back Fill
Dry Soil
Sand Washed by a Lot of Rain
Dry Sand (Desert)
Rocky Soil
Ground Beds must always be tested for conductivity prior to being placed into service. A brief description of ground bed testing in ‘Good Soil’ and ‘Poor Soil’ is provided herein.
Details on this test are described in the National Electrical Code Handbook. Once a reliable
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-3 S1400A
ground has been established, it should be tested on a regular basis to preserve system integrity.
Figure 3-2 - Basic Ground Bed Soil Test Setup
Figure 3-3 - Basic Ground Bed Soil Test Setup with Additional Ground Rods
Figure 3-2 shows the test setup for ‘Good Soil’ conditions. If the Megger* reads less than 5 ohms, the ground is good. The lower the resistance, the better the earth ground. If the
S1400A Page 3-4 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Megger reads more than 10 ohms, the ground is considered ‘poor.’ If a poor ground is indicated, one or more additional ground rods connected 10 feet from the main ground rod should be driven into the soil and interconnected via bare AWG 0000 copper wire and 1” x
¼-20 cable clamps as illustrated in Figure 3-3). * Note: Megger is a Trademark of the
Biddle Instrument Co. (now owned by AVO International). Other devices that may be used to test ground resistance are “Viboground”; Associated Research,
Inc., “Groundmeter”; Industrial Instruments, Inc., and “Ground-ohmer”; Herman
H. Sticht Co., Inc.
If the Megger still reads more than 10 ohms, mix a generous amount of cooking salt, ice cream salt or rock salt with water and then pour about 2.5 to 5 gallons of this solution around each rod (including the test rods). Wait 15 minutes and re-test the soil. If the test fails, the soil is poor and a ‘Poor Soil Ground Bed’ will have to be constructed.
Figure 3-4 shows a typical Poor Soil Ground Bed Electrode. A Poor Soil Ground Bed will typically consists of four or more 10-foot long electrodes stacked vertically and separated by earth. Figure 3-5 shows the construction of a Poor Soil Ground Bed. For some poor soil sites, the ground bed will be constructed of many layers of ‘Capacitive Couplings’ as illustrated. In extremely poor soil sites one or more 3’ by 3’ copper plates (12 gauge or 1/16” thick) will have to be buried in place of the electrodes.
Figure 3-4 - Ground Electrode Construction for Poor Soil Conditions
3.3.1.3 Dry, Sandy or Rocky Soil
Very dry soil will not provide enough free ions for good conductance and a single ground rod will not be effective. A buried counterpoise or copper screen is recommended for these situations. It will be necessary to keep the soil moist through regular applications of water.
Sandy soil, either wet or dry, may have had its soluble salts leached out by rain water, thereby reducing conductivity of the ground. High currents from lightning strikes could also melt sand and cause glass to form around the ground rod, rendering it ineffective. A buried counterpoise or copper screen is preferred for these installations along with regular applications of salt water.
Rocky soil can pose many grounding problems. A counterpoise or copper plate will probably be required. Constructing a trench at the grounding site and mixing the fill with a hygroscopic salt such as calcium chloride may help for a time. Soaking the trench with water on a regular basis will maintain conductivity.
Any TeleFlow, TeleRTU, TeleRecorder or TeleFlow Corrector, may be connected to Earth
Ground via its Ground Lug; however, units equipped with a BBI 9600 bps PSTN modem must be connected to Earth Ground. Units with phone modems require the use of a
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-5 S1400A
lightning arrestor. The lightning arrestor must be situated at the point where the communication line enters the building.
Figure 3-5 - Poor Soil Ground Bed Construction Diagram
3.3.2 Ground Wire Considerations i Ground wire size should be AWG 4. It is recommended that stranded copper wire is used for this application and that the length should be as short as possible.
i This ground wire should be clamped or brazed to the Ground Bed Conductor (that is typically a stranded copper AWG 0000 cable installed vertically or horizontally).
i The wire ends should be tinned with solder prior to insertion into the TeleFlow
Ground Lug.
i The ground wire should be run such that any routing bend in the cable has a minimum radius of 12-inches below ground and 8-inches above ground.
S1400A Page 3-6 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
3.3.2.1 Modem Ground Wiring Diagrams
Figure 3-6A/B - TeleFlow Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-10B, -15B, 45B & -50B
Figure 3-7A/B - TeleFlow/TeleRTU Plus Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-20B & -25B
Figure 3-8A/B - TeleFlow Plus Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-20B
Figure 3-9A/B - TeleRTU Plus Modem Ground Wiring - for 3530-25B
Figure 3-10A/B - TeleFlow/Corrector/TeleRTU Modem Ground Wiring (Side View)
Figure 3-11A/B - TeleRecorder (3530-45B) Modem Ground Wiring (Front View)
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
- TeleRecorder (3530-55B) Modem Ground Wiring (Front View)
- Earth Grounding Of TeleFlow Modem & Case
Figure 3-6A - TeleFlow Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-7 S1400A
S1400A
Figure 3-6B - TeleFlow Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring
Page 3-8 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-7A - TeleFlow/TeleRTU Plus Modem (396039-02-2)
Ground Wiring
(Side View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-9 S1400A
S1400A
Figure 3-7B - TeleFlow/TeleRTU Plus Modem (400000-01-6)
Ground Wiring
(Side View)
Page 3-10 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-8A - TeleFlow Plus Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-11 S1400A
S1400A
Figure 3-8B - TeleFlow Plus Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Page 3-12 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-9A - TeleRTU Plus Modem (396039-02-2)
Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-13 S1400A
S1400A
Figure 3-9B - TeleRTU Plus Modem (400000-01-6)
Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Page 3-14 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-10A - 3530-10B/15B/50B Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring (Side View)
Figure 3-10B - 3530-10B/15B/50B Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring (Side View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-15 S1400A
Figure 3-11A - 3530-45B Modem (396039-02-2) Ground Wiring (Front View)
S1400A Page 3-16 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Figure 3-11B - 3530-45B Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-17 S1400A
Figure 3-12 - 3530-55B Modem (400000-01-6) Ground Wiring
(Front View)
Figure 3-13 shows a model 3530-10B (TeleFlow) installation. An AWG 4 solid copper ground wire has been connected to the Ground Lug on the bottom of the enclosure and to
Earth Ground. The units Earth Ground Cable should be clamped to an exposed Ground Rod or to an AWG 0000 stranded copper Ground Cable that in turn should be connected to either an Earth Ground Rod or Earth Ground Bed. Both ends of the units Earth Ground
Cable must be free of any coating such as paint or insulated covering as well as any oxidation. The connecting point of the Ground Rod or AWG 0000 Ground Cable must also be free of any coating and free of oxidation. Once the ground connection has been established (at either the Ground Rod or Ground Cable) it should be covered or coated to protect it from the environment.
S1400A Page 3-18 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Note:
3530-40B not shown but similar to 3530-10B/15B/50B without modem.
3530-55B not shown (see Figure 3-12). Connect AWG 4 Earth Ground
Cable to Ground Lug when a BBI 9600 bps PSTN Modem is installed.
Figure 3-13 - Earth Grounding Of TeleFlow Modem & Case
Note that the recommended grounding convention for a model 3530-XXX is to install the specified AWG 4 Earth Ground Cable between the Ground Lug (on the bottom of the unit in
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-19 S1400A
question) and a known good Earth Ground. Some models may be equipped with an optional radio. Units equipped with the radio option (not shown) may have an optional polyphaser
(lightning arrester) installed. Regardless of the 3530-XXX configuration, an Earth Ground
Cable should always be installed between the units Ground Lug and a known good Earth
Ground.
3.3.3 Other Grounding Considerations
For applications employing equipment that communicates over telephone lines, a lightning arrester Must Be provided. For indoor equipment the lightning arrester must be installed at the point where the communication line enters the building as shown in Figure 3-14. The ground terminal of this arrester must connect to a ground rod and/or a buried ground bed.
For units that are installed outdoors, it is recommended that the lightning arrester be installed to an Earth Ground (Bed) that is not common to the one used by the associated
3530-XXX.
Figure 3-14 - Grounding of Phone Line
Gas lines also require special grounding considerations. If a gas meter run includes a thermocouple or RTD sensor installed in a thermowell, the well (not the sensor) must be connected to a gas discharge-type lightning arrestor as shown in Figure 3-15. A copper braid, brazed to the thermal well, is dressed into a smooth curve and connected to the
S1400A Page 3-20 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
arrestor as shown. The curve is necessary to minimize arcing caused by lightning strikes or high static surges. The path from the lightning arrestor to the ground bed should also be smooth and free from sharp bends for the same reason.
Figure 3-15 - Grounding of Thermometer Well in Gas Line
Remove this ground connection from the CPU Board. This cable should be removed (or electrically isolated) if a modem is not present. If a modem is present, the Cabinet Ground Cable should be connected to the modem.
3.4 ISOLATING EQUIPMENT FROM THE PIPELINE
3.4.1 Meter Runs Without Cathodic Protection
TeleFlows (3530-10B, 3530-20B & 3530-40B) may be mounted directly on the pipeline or remotely on a vertical stand-alone two-inch stand-pipe (see Figure 3-16). The Earth Ground
Cable is to run between the TeleFlow’s Ground Lug and Earth Ground (Rod or Bed) even though the TeleFlow'’s Multivariable Transducer may be grounded to the pipeline.
TeleFlow Correctors (3530-50B) are typically mounted directly to a Turbine Meter. The
Earth Ground Cable is to run between the TeleFlow Corrector’s Ground Lug and Earth
Ground (Rod or Bed). If any pressure transmitters or pulse transducers are remotely mounted, connect their chassis grounds to the pipeline or earth ground.
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-21 S1400A
Figure 3-16 - 3530-10B/20B/40B Remote Installation without Cathodic Protection
3.4.2 Meter Runs With Cathodic Protection
Dielectric isolators are available from Bristol Babcock and are always recommended as an added measure in isolating the TeleFlow (3530-10B or 3530-20B) from the pipeline even though the TeleFlow does provide 500V galvanic isolation from the pipeline and should not be affected by cathodic protection or other EMF on the pipeline. TeleFlows (3530-10B, 3530-
20B & 3530-40B) may be mounted directly on the pipeline (see Figure 3-17) or remotely on a vertical stand-alone two-inch stand-pipe (see Figure 3-18). It is recommended that isolation fitting always be used in remotely mounted meter systems. An isolation fittings or gasket should be installed between the following connections: i all conductive tubing that runs between the pipeline and mounting valve manifold and/or the units miltivariable pressure transducer i all conductive connections or tubing runs between the GFC and turbine meter, pulse transducer, or any input other device that is mounted on the pipeline i any Temperature Transducer, Pressure Transmitter, etc. and their mount/interface to the pipeline.
S1400A Page 3-22 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Mount the GFC (3530-10B/20B) or ECR (3530-40B) on a stand-alone vertical 2-inch pipe.
The ground conductor connects between the GFC/ECR’s Ground Lug and a known good earth ground. Connect the cases of Temperature Transducers, Pressure Transmitters, etc., to the known good earth ground. If the mounting 2-inch pipe is in continuity with the pipeline it will have to be electrically isolated from the GFC/ECR. Use a strong heat-shrink material such as RAYCHEM WCSM 68/22 EU 3140. This black tubing will easily slip over the 2-inch pipe and then after uniform heating (e.g., with a rose-bud torch) it electrically insulates and increases the strength of the pipe stand.
See BBI Specification Summary F1670SS-0a for information on PGI Direct Mount Systems and Manifolds.
Figure 3-17 - 3530-10B/20B/40B Direct Mount Installation
(with Cathodic Protection)
Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation Page 3-23 S1400A
Figure 3-18 - 3530-10B/20B/40B Remote Installation
(with Cathodic Protection)
S1400A Page 3-24 Section 3 - Grounding & Isolation
Section 4 - Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors
4.1 STROKES & STRIKES
Lightning takes the form of a pulse that typically has a 2 µS rise and a 10 µS to 40 µS decay to a 50% level. The IEEE standard is an 8 µS by 20 µS waveform. The peak current will average 18 KA for the first impulse and about half of that for the second and third impulses. Three strokes (impulses) is the average per lightning strike. The number of visible flashes that may be seen is not necessarily the number of electrical strokes.
A lightning strike acts like a constant current source. Once ionization occurs, the air becomes a luminous conductive plasma reaching up to 60,000° F. The resistance of a struck object is of little consequence except for the power dissipation on the object (I 2 x R). Fifty percent of all lightning strikes will have a first impulse of at least 18 KA, ten percent will exceed the 60 KA level, and only about one percent will exceed 120 KA.
4.1.1 Chance of Being Struck by Lightning
The map of Figure 4-1 shows the average annual number of thunderstorm days
(Isokeraunic level) for the various regions within the continental U.S.A. This map is not representative of the severity of the storm or the number of lightning strikes since it does not take into account more than one lightning strike in a thunderstorm day. The
Isokeraunic or Isoceraunic number provides a meteorological indication of the frequency of thunderstorm activity; the higher the Isokeraunic number the greater the lightning strike activity for a given area. These levels vary across the world from a low of 1 to a high of 300.
Within the United States the Isokeraunic level various from a low of 1 to a high of 100.
Figure 4-1 - Average Thunderstorm Days of the Year (for Continental USA)
Section 4 - Lightning & Surge Page 4-1 S1400A
Thunderstorms are cloud formations that produce lightning strikes (or strokes). Across the
United States there is an average of 30 thunderstorm days per year. Any given storm may produce from one to several strokes. Data on the subject indicates that for an average area within the United States there can be eight to eleven strokes to each square mile per year.
The risk of stroke activity is increased for various areas such central Florida where up to 38 strokes to each square mile per year are likely to occur.
To determine the probability of a given structure (tower, building, etc.) (within your location) being struck, perform the following computation:
1.
Using the map of Figure 4-1 (or a comparable meteorological map for your local), find the Isokeraunic level (I) for your area. Then using Chart 1, find “ A ” for your area.
2.
Refer to Figure 4-1 to find the latitude. Then using Chart 2, find “ B ” for your latitude
(Lat.°).
3.
Multiply “ A ” x “ B ” to get “ C ” .
4.
To calculate the number of lightning strikes per year that are likely to strike a given object (tower, mast, etc.), use the equation that follows (where “ C ” was calculated in step 3 and “ H ” is equal to the height of the object.
Strikes Per Year = ( “ C ” x H 2 ) ÷ (.57 x 10 6 )
Chart 1
I “ A ”
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
26
8
85
169
275
402
548
712
893
1069
1306
25
30
35
40
45
Chart 2
LAT.° “ B ”
.170
.200
.236
.280
.325
Note for these charts:
I = Thunderstorm Days Per Year (Isokeraunic Number)
A= Stroke activity for associated Isokeraunic Area
B= Height/Stroke coefficient for associated latitude
For Example: On Long Island, New York (Isokeraunic number 20), Chart 1 gives “A” to equal 85. The latitude is approximately 40°. Referring to Chart 2, “B” is found to be equal to
.28. “C” for this example is equal to 23.80. Using the equation for strikes per year, it is determined that a 100-foot tower has .4 chances per year of being struck by lightning.
Assuming that no other structures are nearby, the tower will more than likely be struck by lightning at least once in three years.
Note: The Isokeraunic activity numbers connoted as I, “A” and “B” in Charts 1 and 2 above are provided for the continental United States. Isokeraunic data for various countries is available from various federal or state Civil Engineering or Meterorelogical organizations. This information is typically available from manufacturers of lightning strike protection equipment (such as Lightning Arresters).
Since TeleFlow (3530-XXX) units are battery operated systems that are isolated from AC grids (as they don’t draw power from them), they are typically immune to lightning strikes to power lines or power equipment (except for inductive flashover due to close installation proximity). However, once a radio or modem has been installed into a model 3530-XXX, the
S1400A Page 4-2 Section 4 - Lightning & Surge
possibility of damage due to a lightning strike on power or telephone lines or to a radio antenna or the antenna’s tower must be considered. Model 3530-XXX’s equipped with a radio may have an optional BBI supplied lightning arrester installed. Units equipped with modems have built in Surge Protection circuitry. It is recommended that the additional lightning protection considerations listed below be followed for units installed in areas with a high possibility or history of stroke activity.
Units equipped with a modem : In series with the phone line (as far away as possible from the equipment) – for indoor installations the lightning arrester should typically be located at the point where the line enters the structure.
Units equipped with a radio : Mount antenna discharge unit (lightning arrester) as close as possible to where the lead in wire enters the structure. For an exposed (outdoor)
3530-XXX, in the proximity of the unit. See Antenna Caution below.
4.1.2 Antenna Caution
Each year hundreds of people are killed, mutilated, or receive severe permanent injuries when attempting to install or remove an antenna or antenna lead. In many cases, the victim was aware of the danger of electrocution but failed to take adequate steps to avoid the hazard. For your safety, and for proper installation maintenance, please read and follow the safety precautions that follow - they may save your life .
i When installing or servicing an antenna:
DO NOT use a metal ladder. DO NOT step onto or touch an antenna mast while power is applied to an associated radio unless the radio is a low power (low current) type.
DO NOT work on a wet or windy day, especially during a thunderstorm or when there is lightning or thunder in your area. Dress properly; shoes with rubber soles and heels, rubber gloves, long sleeve shirt or jacket.
i The safe distance from power lines should be at least twice the height of the antenna and mast combination.
i Antenna Grounding per National Electrical Code Instructions:
A.
Use AWG 10 or 8 aluminum or AWG 1 copper-clad steel or bronze wire, or larger as ground wires for both the mast and lead-in. Securely clamp the wire to the bottom of the mast.
B.
Secure lead-in wire from antenna to antenna discharge (lightning arrester) unit and the mast ground wire to the structure (building, shed, etc.) with stand-off insulators spaced from 4 feet (1.22 meters) to 6 feet (1.83 meters) apart.
C.
Mount antenna discharge unit as close as possible to where the lead-in wire enters the structure.
D.
The hole drilled through the wall for the lead-in wire should be just large enough to accommodate the cable. Before drilling this hole, make sure there are no wires or pipes, etc. in the wall.
E.
Push the cable through the hole and form a rain drip loop close to where the wire enters the exterior of the structure.
F.
Caulk around the lead-in wire (where it enters the structure) to keep out drafts.
G.
Install lightning arresters (antenna discharge units). The grounding conductor should be run in as straight a line as practicable from the antenna mast and/or the antenna discharge units to grounding electrode(s).
H.
Only connect the antenna cable to the radio after the mast has been properly grounded and the lead-in cable has been properly connected to lightning arresters which in turn have each been properly connected to a known good earth ground.
Section 4 - Lightning & Surge Page 4-3 S1400A
Figure 4-2 - Radio Antenna Field Installation Site Grounding Diagram
For all systems it is best to have all communication equipment input/output grounds tied together. In the case of TeleFlow (3530-XXX) this is accomplished via the unit’s Ground
Lug. However additional communication equipment lightning arresters and surge suppres-
S1400A Page 4-4 Section 4 - Lightning & Surge
sors should be tied to the same system ground. System ground consists of the tower leg grounds utility ground and bulkhead-equipment ground-stakes that are tied together via bare copper wire.
4.1.3 Ground Propagation
As in any medium, a dynamic pulse, like R.F., will take time to propagate. This propagation time will cause a differential step voltage to exist in time between any two ground rods that are of different radial distances from the strike. With a ground rod tied to a struck tower, the impulse will propagate its step voltage outwardly from this rod in ever-expanding circles, like a pebble thrown into a pond. If the equipment house has a separate ground rod and the power company and/or telephone company grounds are also separate, the dynamic step voltage will cause currents to flow to equalize these separate ground voltages. Then if the coax cable (associated with a radio) is the only path linking the equipment chassis with the tower ground, the surge can destroy circuitry.
4.1.4 Tying it all Together
To prevent this disaster from occurring, a grounding system must be formed which interconnects all grounds together. This will equalize and distribute the surge charge to all grounds, and at the same time, it will make for a lower surge impedance ground system.
This interconnection can be done as a grid, where each ground has a separate line to each other ground, or by using a “rat Race” ring which forms a closed loop (not necessarily a perfect circle) which surrounds the equipment house completely.
By making this interconnection, it will be necessary to use proper I/O protectors for the equipment. Of course, these should be a requirement regardless of whether this grounding technique is used. I/O protectors are used for power lines (even those these don’t feed into a
TeleFlow unit), telephone lines, and also to minimize EMI pick-up from a strike. Ideally it is best to place all I/O protectors on a common panel that has a low inductance path to the ground system. The Teleflow (3530-XXX) would then have a single ground point from its
Ground Lug to this panel. In lieu of this, the 3530-XXX in question should be tied to a ground rod that in turn is connected to the Earth/System Ground created for the site.
Your protected equipment connected to a common single ground system will now be just like a bird sitting on a high tension wire. When lightning strikes, even with a 50 ohm surge impedance ground system, the entire system consisting of equipment, ground system, building, etc., will all rise together to the one million volt peak level (for example) and will all decay back down together. So long as there is no voltage differential (taken care of by protectors and ground interconnections, there will be no current flow through the equipment and therefore no resulting equipment damage.
4.1.5 Impulse Protection Summary i Use more than one ground rod.
i Place multi-ground stakes more than their length apart.
i Tie Power, Telco, Tower, Bulkhead and equipment ground together.
i Make all ground interconnect runs that are above ground with minimum radius bends of eight inches and run them away from other conductors and use large solid wire or a solid strap.
i Watch out for dissimilar metals connections and coat accordingly.
Section 4 - Lightning & Surge Page 4-5 S1400A
i Use bare wire radials together where possible with ground stakes to reduce ground system impedance.
i Use I/O protectors (Phone line, Radio) with a low inductance path to the ground system.
i Ground the Coaxial Cable Shield (or use an impulse suppressor) at the bottom of the tower just above the tower leg ground connection.
4.2 USE OF LIGHTNING ARRESTERS & SURGE PROTECTORS
Units equipped with radios or modems use lightning arresters and surge protectors to protect equipment from lightning strikes, power surges and from damaging currents that have been induced onto communication lines.
The first line of defense is the Lightning Arrester. These devices typically use gas discharge bulbs that can shunt high currents and voltages to earth ground when they fire. The high current, high voltage gas discharge bulb has a relatively slow response time and only fire when their gas has been ionized by high voltage.
The second line of defense is the Surge Protector, which is made of solid state devices, fires very quickly and conducts low voltages and currents to ground. Surge protectors are built into BBI 9600 bps modems.
Lightning Arresters are applied to circuits as follows: i Equipment or circuits that can be exposed to lightning strikes, falling power lines, high ground currents caused by power system faults, by operational problems on electric railways, etc.
i Equipment installed in dry, windy areas, such as the Great Plains and the
Southwaset Desert in the United States. Wind and wind blown dust can cause high voltages (static) to appear on overhead wires, fences, and metal buildings.
Note: Lightning Arresters may explode if lightning strike is very close. Mount lightning arresters where flying parts won't cause injury to equipment or personnel.
S1400A Page 4-6 Section 4 - Lightning & Surge
Section 5 - Wiring Techniques
5.1 OVERVIEW
This section provides information pertaining to good wiring practices. Installation of Power and “Measurement & Control” wiring is discussed. Information on obscure problems, circulating ground and power loops, bad relays, etc. is presented. Good wire preparation and connection techniques along with problems to avoid are discussed.
5.2 INSTRUMENT WIRING
Each of the rules listed below is briefly discussed; the emphasis herein is placed on the avoidance of problems as well as equipment safety.
Rule 1 - Never utilize common returns.
Rule 2 - Use twisted shielded pairs (with overall insulation) on all Signal/Control circuits.
Rule 3 - Ground cable shields at one end only.
Rule 4 - Use known good earth grounds (Rod, Bed, System) and test them periodically,
Rule 5 - Earth connections must utilize smoothly dressed large wire.
Rule 6 - Perform all work neatly and professionally.
Rule 7 - Route high power conductors away from signal wiring according to NEC Rules.
Rule 8 - Use appropriately sized wires as required by the load.
Rule 9 - Use lightning arresters and surge protectors.
Rule 10 - Make sure all wiring connections are secure.
5.2.1 Common Returns
Use of common returns on I/O wiring is one of the most common causes of obscure and difficult to troubleshoot control signal problems. Since all wires and connections have distributed resistance, inductance and capacitance, the chances of a achieving a balanced system when common returns are present is very remote. Balanced systems (or circuits) are only achieved when all currents and voltages developed in association with each of the common returns are equal. In a balanced system (or circuit) there are no noise or measurment errors introduced due to by “sneak circuits.”
The illustration of Figure 5-1 shows the difference between testing an I/O circuit that is discrete and has no sneak circuits and one that utilizes common returns. Common sense tells us that it is tough to mix up connections to a twisted shielded pair (with overall vinyl covering) to every end device. Do yourself a favor; to make start up easier, DON’T USE
COMMON RETURNS!
Section 5 - Wiring Techniques Page 5-1 S1400A
Figure 5-1 - Field Wired Circuits With & Without A Common Return
5.2.2 Use of Twisted Shielded Pair Wiring (with Overall Insulation)
For all field I/O wiring the use of twisted shielded pairs with overall insulation is highly recommended. This type of cable provides discrete insulation for each of the wires and an additional overall insulated covering that provides greater E.M.I. immunity and protection to the shield as well.
S1400A Page 5-2 Section 5 - Wiring Techniques
5.2.3 Grounding of Cable Shields
DO NOT connect the cable shield to more than one ground point; it should only be grounded at one end. Cable shields that are grounded at more than one point or at both ends may have a tendency to induce circulating currents or sneak circuits that raise havoc with I/O signals. This will occur when the ground systems associated with multipoint connections to a cable shield have a high resistance or impedance between them and a ground induced voltage is developed (for what ever reason, i.e., man made error or nature produced phenomena).
5.2.4 Use of Known Good Earth Grounds
TeleFlow (models 3530-XXX) should only have one connection to earth ground. This connection is provided via the Ground Lug that is situated on the bottom of the unit. Some older units will require the installation of this ground lug when a connection to earth ground becomes absolutely necessary, i.e., when a radio or modem is added to the unit.
Since model 3530-XXX’s are DC-based systems, grounding does not take into account AC power grounding considerations. Earth grounding the 3530-XXX unit (case) is absolutely necessary when the unit is equipped with a radio or modem. Additionally these units should be connected to earth ground when they are installed in areas that have frequent lightning strikes or are located near or used in conjunction with equipment that is likely to be struck by lightning or if struck by lightning may cause equipment or associated system failure. Earth Grounds must be tested and must be known to be good before connecting the
TeleFlow. Earth grounds must be periodically tested and maintained (see Section 4).
5.2.5 Earth Ground Wires
Earth connections must utilize smoothly dressed large wire. Use AWG 3 or 4 stranded copper wire with as short a length as possible. Exercise care when trimming the insulation from the wire ends. Twists the strands tightly, trim off any frizzes and tin the ends with solder. The earth ground wire should be clamped or brazed to the Ground Bed Conductor
(that is typically a standard AWG 0000 copper cable. The earth ground wire should be run such that any routing bend in the cable is a minimum 8-inch radius above ground or a minimum 12-inch radius below ground. The only earth ground connection permitted to the
TeleFlow must be made via the unit’s Ground Lug. Make sure that the connection at the
TeleFlow’s Ground Lug is secure.
5.2.6 Working Neatly & Professionally
Take pride in your work and observe all site and maintenance safety precautions. After properly trimming the stranded pair wire ends, twist them in the same direction as their manufacturer did and then tin them with solder. Install the tinned wire end into it’s connector and then secure the associated connector’s clamping screw. Remember to check these connections for tightness from time to time. If solid copper wire is used (in conjunction with the DC Power System or for Earth Ground) make sure that the conductor is not nicked when trimming off the insulation. Nicked conductors are potential disasters waiting to happen. Neatly trim shields and whenever possible, coat them to protect them and prevent shorts and water entry.
Section 5 - Wiring Techniques Page 5-3 S1400A
Remember loose connections, bad connections, intermittent connections, corroded connections, etc., are hard to find, waste time, create system problems and confusion in addition to being costly.
5.2.7 High Power Conductors and Signal Wiring
When routing wires, keep high power conductors away from signal conductors. Space wires appropriately to vent high voltage inductance. Refer to the National Electrical Code
Handbook for regulatory and technical requirements.
5.2.8 Use of Proper Wire Size
TeleFlows utilize compression-type terminals that accommodate up to AWG 14 gauge wire.
A connection is made by inserting the bared end (1/4 inch max.) into the clamp beneath the screw and securing the screw.
Allow some slack in the wires when making terminal connections. Slack makes the connections more manageable and minimizes mechanical strain on the PCB connectors.
Provide external strain relief (utilizing Tie Wrap, etc.) to prevent the loose of slack at the
TeleFlow.
Be careful to use wire that is appropriately sized for the load. Refer to equipment manufacturer’s Specs. and the National Electrical Code Handbook for information on wire size and wire resistance. After installing the field wiring, test each load to determine if the correct voltage or current is present at the load. If you know the resistance of the field wires
(Circular Mills x Length) you should be able to calculate the load voltage. Conversely, if you know the minimum load voltage and current, you should be able to derive the maximum voltage loss that is allowable due to line resistance and then the correct wire size.
Referring to Figure 5-2, a relay that is picked by 100 mA, with a loop supply voltage of 24V and a total line resistance of 20 ohms, the load voltage (voltage across the relay) should be:
V
L
= V
S
- (V
22 = 24 - 2
C
+ V
C
)
where
V
C where 2V
+ V
C
= (R
C
+ R
= (20 Ω
C
) I
) x 0.1 A
Figure 5-2 - Calculating Load Voltage due to Line Resistance
5.2.9 Lightning Arresters & Surge Protectors
Use lightning arresters in association with any radio or modem equipped unit. BBI 9600 bps modems are equipped with surge protection circuitry. Lightning arresters or Antenna
S1400A Page 5-4 Section 5 - Wiring Techniques
Discharge Units should be placed on the base of the antenna and at the point where the antenna lead (typically coax) enters the site equipment building. When a modem is used, a lightning arrester should be placed at the point where the phone line enters the site equipment building. If you use a modem (manufactured by other than BBI) it is recommended that you also install a surge suppressors or lightning arrester on the phone line as close to the modem as possible. Any unit equipped with a radio or modem must be connected to a known good earth ground via the units Ground Lug.
5.2.10 Secure Wiring Connections
Make sure that all wiring connections are secure. In time wires that were once round will become flattened due to the pressure applied by screw compression type terminals and site vibrations. After a while these compression screws have a tendency to become loose. Part of a good maintenance routine should be to check and tighten all screws associated with wiring terminal connections. Avoid nicking the wire(s) when stripping insulation.
Remember, nicked conductors will lead to future problems. Also remember to provide some cabling slack and strain relief.
If installing stranded or braided wiring that has not been tinned, be sure to tightly twist the end (in the same direction as manufactured) and then trim off any frizzed wires.
Section 5 - Wiring Techniques Page 5-5 S1400A
BLANK PAGE
READER RESPONSE FORM
Please help us make our documentation more useful to you! If you have a complaint, a suggestion, or a correction regarding this manual, please tell us by mailing this page with your comments. It's the only way we know we're doing our job by giving you correct, complete, and useful documentation.
DOCUMENT NUMBER: S1400A
TITLE: TeleFlow TM SITE CONSIDERATIONS For EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION,
GROUNDING & WIRING
ISSUE DATE: APRIL, 2003
COMMENT/COMPLAINT:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Mail this page to:
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Attn: Technical Publications Group, Dept. 315
Bristol Babcock
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2200
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213
Website: www.bristolbabcock.com
U.S.A. Locations:
Northern Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2381
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525
Gulf Coast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
2000 Governor's Circle
Suite F
Houston, TX 77092-8731
Phone: +1 (713) 685-6200
Fax: +1 (713) 681-7331
Western Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
1609 South Grove Avenue
Suites 106 & 107
Ontario, CA 91761
Phone: +1 (909) 923-8488
Fax: +1 (909) 923-8988
Southeast Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: +1 (407) 740-7084
Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106
Helicoid Instruments
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2218
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2213 [email protected]
Central Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
777 South Central
Expressway
Suite 1-C
Richardson, TX 75080
Phone: +1 (972) 238-8197
Fax: +1 (972) 238-8198 [email protected]
International Affiliates:
Canada
Bristol Babcock, Canada
234 Attwell Drive
Toronto, Ont. M9W 5B3
Canada
PH: 416-675-3820
FAX: 416-674-5129 [email protected]
Mexico
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso
Col. Morales Polanco
11540 Mexico, D.F.
Mexico
PH: (52-55)-52-81-81-12
FAX: (52-55)-52-81-81-09
Rocky Mountain Region
Bristol Babcock Inc.
906 San Juan Blvd., Suite A
Farmington, NM 87401
Phone: +1 (505) 320-5046
Fax: +1 (505) 327-3273
Communications
Technology Group
Bristol Babcock Inc.
317 S. North Lake Blvd.
Suite 1016
Altamonte Springs, FL 32701
Phone: +1 (407) 629-9464
Fax: +1 (407) 629-2106 [email protected]
United Kingdom
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Vale Industrial Estate
Stourport Road
Kidderminster
Worcestershire DY11 7QU
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001
FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]
Asia Pacific
Bristol Babcock, Inc.
PO Box 1987
Bunbury, Western Australia
6231
PH: +61 (0) 8 9791 3654
FAX: +61 (0) 8 9791 3173 [email protected]
Victoria, Australia
PH: +61 (0) 3 9384 2171
FAX: +61 (0) 3 8660 2501
Calgary Office
Bristol Babcock, Canada
3812 Edmonton Trail N.E.
Calgary, Alberta T2E 5T6
Canada
PH: 403-265-4808
FAX: 403-233-2914 [email protected]
Villahermosa Office
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Plomo No.2
Bodega No. 1 - Ciudad
Industrial
Villahermosa, Tabasco 86010
Mexico
PH: 52-993-353-3142
FAX: 52-993-353-3145 [email protected]
Middle East
Bristol Babcock Ltd.
Vale Industrial Estate
Stourport Road
Kidderminster
Worcestershire DY11 7QU
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0) 1562 820001
FAX: +44 (0) 1562 746721 [email protected]
RC Rev: 27-Mar-03
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
CARE AND HANDLING
OF
PC BOARDS
AND
E SD-SENSITIVE
COMPONENTS
BRISTOL BABCOCK
BLANK PAGE
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED 1
ESD-SENSITIVE COMPONENT HANDLING PROCEDURE 2
3. Protecting ESD-Sensitive Components 5
4. Static-Safe Field Procedure 6
TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED
1. Tools
Anti-Static Field kit. It is recommended that an anti-static field kit be kept on any site where solid-state printed circuit boards and other ESD-sensitive components are handled. These kits are designed to remove any existing static charge and to prevent the build-up of a static charge that could damage a PC board or
ESD-sensitive components. The typical anti-static field kit consists of the following components:
1. A work surface (10mm conductive plastic sheet with a female snap fastener in one corner for ground cord attachment).
2. A 15-foot long ground cord for grounding the work surface.
3. Wrist strap (available in two sizes, large and small, for proper fit and comfort) with a female snap fastener for ground cord attachment.
4. A coiled ground cord with a practical extension length of 10 feet for attachment to the wrist strap.
Toothbrush (any standard one will do)
1
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92
2.
Materials
Inhibitor (Texwipe Gold Mist ; Chemtronics Gold Guard, or equivalent)
Cleaner (Chemtronics Electro-Wash; Freon TF, or equivalent)
Wiping cloth (Kimberly-Clark Kim Wipes, or equivalent)
1.
ESD-SENSITIVE COMPONENT HANDLING PROCEDURE
Introduction
Microelectronic devices such as PC boards, chips and other components are electrostatic-sensitive. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) of as few as 110 volts can damage or disrupt the functioning of such devices. Imagine the damage possible from the 35,000 volts (or more) that you can generate on a dry winter day by simply walking across a carpet. In fact, you can generate as much as 6,000 volts just working at a bench.
There are two kinds of damage that can be caused by the static charge. The more severe kind results in complete failure of the PC board or component. This kind of damage is relatively simple, although often expensive, to remedy by replacing the affected item(s). The second kind of damage results in a degradation or weakening which does not result in an outright failure of the component. This kind of damage is difficult to detect and often results in faulty performance, intermittent failures, and service calls.
Minimize the risk of ESD-sensitive component damage by preventing static build-up and by promptly removing any existing charge. Grounding is effective, if the carrier of the static charge is conductive such as a human body. To protect components from
nonconductive carriers of static charges such as plastic boxes, place the component in static-shielding bags.
This manual contains general rules to be followed while handling ESD-sensitive components. Use of the anti-static field kit to properly ground the human body as well as the work surface is also discussed.
2
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
Table 1
Typical Electrostatic Voltages
Electrostatic Voltages
10-20 Percent
Relative Humidity
65-90 Percent
Relative Humidity
Means of Static
Generation
Walking across carpet
Walking over vinyl floor
Worker at bench
Vinyl envelopes for work instructions
Poly bag picked up from bench
Work chair padded with poly foam
35,000
12,000
6,000
7,000
20,000
18,000
1,500
250
100
600
1,200
1,500
2.
General Rules
(1) ESD-sensitive components shall only be removed from their static-shielding bags by a person who is properly grounded.
(2) When taken out of their static-shielding bags, ESD-sensitive components shall
never be placed over, or on, a surface which has not been properly grounded.
(3) ESD-sensitive components shall be handled in such a way that the body does not come in contact with the conductor paths and board components. Handle
ESD-sensitive components in such a way that they will not suffer damage from physical abuse or from electric shock.
(4) EPROMS/PROMS shall be kept in anti-static tubes until they are ready to use and shall be removed only by a person who is properly grounded.
(5) When inserting and removing EPROMS/PROMS from PC boards, use a chip removal tool similar to the one shown in the figure following. Remember, all work should be performed on a properly grounded surface by a properly-grounded person.
3
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92
4
Typical Chip Removal Tool
(6) It is important to note when inserting EPROMS/PROMS, that the index notch on the PROM must be matched with the index notch on the socket. Before pushing the chip into the socket, make sure all the pins are aligned with the respective socket-holes. Take special care not to crush any of the pins as this could destroy the chip.
(7) Power the system down before removing or inserting comb connectors/plugs or removing and reinstalling PC boards or ESD-sensitive components from card files or mounting hardware. Follow the power-down procedure applicable to the system being serviced.
(8) Handle all defective boards or components with the same care as new components. This helps eliminate damage caused by mishandling. Do not strip used PC boards for parts. Ship defective boards promptly to Bristol Babcock in a staticshielding bag placed inside static-shielding foam and a box to avoid damage during shipment.
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
CAUTION
Don't place ESD-sensitive components and paperwork in the same bag.
The static caused by sliding the paper into the bag could develop a charge and damage the component(s).
(9) Include a note, which describes the malfunction, in a separate bag along with each component being shipped. The repair facility will service the component and promptly return it to the field.
3.
Protecting ESD-Sensitive Components
(1) As stated previously, it is recommended that an electrically-conductive anti-static field kit be kept on any site where ESD-sensitive components are handled. A recommended ESD-protective workplace arrangement is shown on page 7. The anti-static safety kit serves to protect the equipment as well as the worker. As a safety feature, a resistor (usually of the one-megohm, 1/2-watt, current-limiting type) has been installed in the molded caps of the wrist strap cord and the ground cord. This resistor limits current should a worker accidently come in contact with a power source. Do not remove the molded caps from grounded cords. If a cord is damaged, replace it immediately.
(2) Be sure to position the work surface so that it does not touch grounded conductive objects. The protective resistor is there to limit the current which can flow through the strap. When the work surface touches a grounded conductive object, a short is created which draws the current flow and defeats the purpose of the current-limiting resistor.
(3) Check resistivity of wrist strap periodically using a commercially-available system tester similar to the one shown in the figure below:
5
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92
Note: If a system checker is not available, use an ohmmeter connected to the cable ends to measure its resistance. The ohmmeter reading should be 1 megohm +/-
15%. Be sure that the calibration date of the ohmmeter has not expired. If the ohmmeter reading exceeds 1 megohm by +/- 15%, replace the ground cord with a new one.
4.
Static-safe Field Procedure
(1) On reaching the work location, unfold and lay out the work surface on a convenient surface (table or floor). Omit this step if the table or floor has a built-in ESD-safe work surface.
(2) Attach the ground cord to the work surface via the snap fasteners and attach the other end of the ground cord to a reliable ground using an alligator clip.
(3) Note which boards or components are to be inserted or replaced.
(4) Power-down the system following the recommended power-down procedure.
(5) Slip on a known-good wristband, which should fit snugly; an extremely loose fit is not desirable.
(6) Snap the ground cord to the wristband. Attach the other end of the ground cord to a reliable ground using the alligator clip.
6
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
(7) The components can now be handled following the general rules as described in the instruction manual for the component.
(8) Place the component in a static-shielding bag before the ground cord is disconnected. This assures protection from electrostatic charge in case the work surface is located beyond the reach of the extended ground cord.
A
C
✰
R
R
D
E F
R
R
EARTH GROUND
B
G
FLOOR OF BUILDING
LEGEND
A - Chair with ground (optional)
B - ESD protective floor mat (optional)
C - Wrist strap
D - ESD protective trays, etc.
E - Ionizer
F - Other electrical equipment
G - Workbench with ESD protective table top
✰
NOTE: ALL RESISTORS 1M
Ω
+/-10% 1/2W
7
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92
(9) If a component is to undergo on-site testing, it may be safely placed on the grounded work surface for that purpose.
(10) After all component work is accomplished, remove the wrist straps and ground wire and place in the pouch of the work surface for future use.
5.
Cleaning And Lubricating
The following procedure should be performed periodically for all PC boards and when a PC board is being replaced.
CAUTION
Many PC board connectors are covered with a very fine gold-plate.
Do not use any abrasive cleaning substance or object such as a pencil eraser to clean connectors.
Use only the approved cleaner/lubricants specified in the procedure following.
WARNING
Aerosol cans and products are extremely combustible.
Contact with a live circuit, or extreme heat can cause an explosion.
Turn OFF all power and find an isolated, and ventilated area to use any aerosol products specified in this procedure.
(1) Turn the main line power OFF. Blow or vacuum out the component. This should remove potential sources of dust or dirt contamination during the remainder of this procedure.
8
ESDS Manual
S14006
4/15/92
(2) Clean PC board connectors as follows: a.
Review the static-safe field procedure detailed earlier.
b.
c.
Following the ESD-sensitive component handling procedures, remove the connectors from the boards and remove the PC boards from their holders.
Use cleaner to remove excessive dust build-up from comb connectors and other connectors. This cleaner is especially useful for removing dust.
d.
Liberally spray all PC board contacts with Inhibitor. The inhibitor:
Provides a long lasting lubricant and leaves a protective film to guard against corrosion e.
f.
Improves performance and reliability
Extends the life of the contacts
Is nonconductive, and is safe for use on most plastics
Clean the comb contacts using a lint-free wiping cloth.
Lightly mist all comb contacts again with Inhibitor.
NOTE: Do not use so much Inhibitor that it drips.
g.
Repeat the above procedure for the other PC boards from the device.
(3) Cleaning PC edge connectors a.
Use cleaner to remove excessive dust build-up from connectors. This cleaner is especially useful for removing dust.
b.
c.
Liberally spray the outboard connector with Inhibitor.
Lightly brush the outboard connector with a soft, non-metallic, bristle brush such as a toothbrush.
9
ESDS Manual
#S14006
4/15/92 d.
e.
Spray the connector liberally to flush out any contaminants.
Remove any excess spray by shaking the connector or wiping with either a toothbrush, or a lint-free wiping cloth.
6.
Completion
(1) Replace any parts that were removed.
(2) Make sure that the component cover is secure.
(3) Return the system to normal operation.
(4) Check that the component operates normally.
10
TeleFlow Corrector
Material Safety Data Sheets
Material Safety Data Sheets are provided herein to comply with OSHA’s Hazard
Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200. This standard must be consulted for specific requirements.
Material Safety Data Sheets are provided in the order listed in Table Z-1 below.
TABLE Z-1 MSDS for TeleFlow Corrector Instruction Manual CI-3530-50B
Manufacturer General Description
Bristol Babcock Part Number or Media Notes
396024-01-7 (6V) Intrinsically Safe
396024-02-5 (12V) Intrinsically Safe
Eagle Pitcher Sealed Lead-Acid Batteries
395413-01-0 (7.2V) Intrinsically Safe
395413-02-8 (7.2V) Intrinsically Safe
Rayovac Corp. Reusable Alkaline Battery* 395412-02-1 (1.5V) No MSDS (*)
Pressure Transducer Media Fill
* Note: According to Rayovac Corporation, these batteries don’t require an
MSDS and are suitable for disposal in ordinary landfills.
12/17/98 Appendix Z - CI-3530-50B MSDS
BLANK PAGE
Gillette
Environment
Health and Safety
37 A Street
Needham, MA 02492
781.292.8151
NAME:
CAS NO:
Page 1 of 4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
DURACELL ALKALINE BATTERIES
Not applicable Effective Date: 06/25/2004 Rev: 8
A. — IDENTIFICATION
Composition* (1% or greater)
Manganese Dioxide (1313-13-9)
Zinc (7440-66-6)
Potassium Hydroxide (35%) (1310-58-3)
Graphite, natural (7782-42-5) or synthetic
(7440-44-0)
%
35-40
10-25
5-10
1-5
Formula: Mixture
Molecular Weight:
Synonyms:
NA
Alkaline Manganese Dioxide Batteries
MN1300 (D); MN1400 (C); MN1500 (AA) MN2400
(AAA); MX1300 (D); MX1400 (C); MX1500 (AA);
MX2400 (AAA); MX2500 (AAAA); MX1604 (9V);
MN908 (Lantern 6V); MN918
( Lantern 4.5V);
MN1604 (9V); MN9100 (N), MN1203 (4.5V); 5K69
(Flatpack); 7K67 (Flatpack) (J) and batteries comprised of these cells.
B. — PHYSICAL DATA
Boiling Point
NA °
F
NA °
C
(
Specific Gravity (H
2
O=1)
NA
Evaporation
Ether
NA
% Volatiles
NA
=1)
NA
Melting Point
°
F
NA °
C
Vapor Density (air=1)
NA
Saturation in Air
(by volume @
NA
Solubility in Water
NA
°
F)
NA
Freezing Point
°
F
NA °
C
Vapor Pressure @
NA mm Hg
Autoignition Temperature
°
F
NA
°
°
F
C pH NA
Appearance/Color Copper top battery. Contents dark in color.
Flash Point and
Test Method(s)
Flammable Limits in Air
(% by volume)
NA
Lower NA % Upper NA %
C. — REACTIVITY
Stability X Stable Unstable Polymerization may occur X will not occur
Conditions to Avoid
Do not heat, crush, disassemble, short circuit or recharge.
Incompatible Materials
Not applicable
Conditions to Avoid
Hazardous Decomposition Products
Contents incompatible with strong oxidizing agents.
Thermal degradation may produce hazardous fumes of zinc and manganese; hydrogen gas; caustic vapors of potassium hydroxide and other toxic by-products.
Footnotes
NA=Not Available
Please note: Some Duracell alkaline batteries contain the Duracell Power Check™ battery energy gauge which is a small conductive strip located underneath the PVC battery label that indicates the amount of charge in the battery. It is composed of minute quantities of conductive materials. Due to the small quantity of materials and their solid form, a health or environmental risk is unlikely.
GMEL# 2002.8
Page 2 of 4
D. — HEALTH HAZARD DATA
Occupational Exposure Limits (PELs, TLVs, etc.)
8-Hour TWAs: Manganese Dioxide (as Mn) - 5 mg/m 3 (Ceiling) (OSHA); 0.2 mg/m 3 (ACGIH/Duracell)
Potassium Hydroxide - 2 mg/m 3 (Ceiling) (ACGIH)
Graphite (all kinds except fibrous)-2 mg/ m 3 (ACGIH); (synthetic)-15 mg/m 3 (total, OSHA );
5 mg/m 3 (respirable, OSHA)
These levels are not anticipated under normal consumer use conditions.
Warning Signals
Not applicable
Routes/Effects of Exposure
These chemicals and metals are contained in a sealed can. For consumer use, adequate hazard warnings are included on both the package and on the battery. Potential for exposure should not exist unless the battery leaks, is exposed to high temperatures or is mechanically, physically, or electrically abused. Contains concentrated (35%) potassium hydroxide, which is caustic. Anticipated potential leakage of potassium hydroxide is 2 to 20 ml, depending on battery size. A similar amount of zinc/zinc oxide may also leak.
1. Inhalation
2. Ingestion
3. Skin
Respiratory (and eye) irritation may occur if fumes are released due to heat or an abundance of leaking batteries.
Not anticipated due to size of batteries; choking may occur with the smaller AAA and AAAA batteries. Irritation, including caustic burns/injury, may occur following exposure to a leaking battery.
a. Contact
Irritation, including caustic burns/injury, may occur following exposure to a leaking battery.
4. Eye Contact b. Absorption
Not anticipated
Irritation, including caustic burns/injury, may occur following exposure to a leaking battery.
5. Other Not applicable
E. — ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
1. Applicable Regulations All ingredients listed in TSCA inventory.
2. DOT Hazard Class -
3. DOT Shipping Name -
Not applicable
Not applicable
Please note: These batteries are not regulated by U. S. DOT or international agencies as hazardous materials or dangerous goods when shipped. Duracell uses the article name 'Alkaline Batteries - Non-hazardous' on all domestic and international bills of lading.
Environmental Effects
These batteries pass the U. S. EPA’s Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure and therefore, may be disposed of with normal waste.
GMEL# 2002.8
Page 3 of 4
F. — EXPOSURE CONTROL METHODS
Engineering Controls
General ventilation under normal use conditions.
Eye Protection
None under normal use conditions. Wear safety glasses when handling leaking batteries.
Skin Protection
None under normal use conditions. Use neoprene, rubber or latex gloves when handling leaking batteries.
Respiratory Protection
None under normal use conditions.
Other
Keep batteries away from small children.
G. — WORK PRACTICES
Handling and Storage
Store at room temperature. Avoid mechanical or electrical abuse. DO NOT short or install incorrectly.
Batteries may explode, pyrolize or vent if disassembled, crushed, recharged or exposed to high temperatures.
Install batteries in accordance with equipment instructions. Do not mix battery systems, such as alkaline and zinc carbon, in the same equipment. Replace all batteries in equipment at the same time. Do not carry batteries loose in pocket or bag. Do not remove battery tester or battery label.
Normal Clean Up
Not applicable
Waste Disposal Methods
Individual consumers may dispose of spent (used) batteries with household trash. Duracell does not recommend that spent batteries be accumulated (quantities of five gallons or more should be disposed of in a secure landfill), in accordance with appropriate federal, state and local regulations. Do not incinerate, since batteries may explode at excessive temperatures.
GMEL# 2002.8
Page 4 of 4
H. — EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Steps to be taken if material is released to the environment or spilled in the work area
Notify safety personnel of large spills. Caustic potassium hydroxide may be released from leaking or ruptured batteries. Avoid eye or skin contact and inhalation of vapors. Increase ventilation. Clean-up personnel should wear appropriate protective gear.
Fire and Explosion Hazard
Batteries may burst and release hazardous decomposition products when exposed to a fire situation. See Sec. C.
Extinguishing Media
As appropriate for surrounding area.
Firefighting Procedures
Use self-contained breathing apparatus and full protective gear.
I. — FIRST AID AND MEDICAL EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Eyes
Not anticipated. If battery is leaking and material contacts eyes, flush with copious amounts of clear, tepid water for 30 minutes. Contact physician at once.
Skin
Not anticipated. If battery is leaking, irrigate exposed skin with copious amounts of clear, tepid water for at least 15 minutes. If irritation, injury or pain persists, consult a physician.
Inhalation
Not anticipated. If battery is leaking, contents may be irritating to respiratory passages. Remove to fresh air.
Contact physician if irritation persists.
Ingestion
Not anticipated. Rinse the mouth and surrounding area with clear, tepid water for at least 15 minutes. Consult a physician immediately for treatment and to rule out involvement of the esophagus and other tissues.
Notes to Physician
1) The primary acutely toxic ingredient is concentrated (35%) potassium hydroxide.
2) Anticipated potential leakage of potassium hydroxide is 2-20 ml, depending on battery size.
3) This MSDS does not include or address the small button cell batteries, which can be ingested.
This MSDS covers the following discontinued product numbers:
DAC100, 105,110,116-118,123-124, 130, 200,
610,810,820,918
The information contained in the Material Safety Data Sheet is based on data considered to be accurate, however, no warranty is expressed or implied regarding the accuracy of the data or the results to be obtained from the use thereof.
MSDS-5 (2/00) GMEL# 2002.8
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Product Name: Sealed Maintenance Free Lead-Acid Batteries
DATE:
COMPONENTS
Lead (Pb, Pb0
2
, PBSO
4
)
Sulfuric Acid
Fiberglass Separator
ABS Plastic
COMPONENTS
Lead
Lead Sulfate
Lead Dioxide
Sulfuric Acid
Fiberglass Separator
ABS Plastic
COMPONENTS
Lead
Sulfuric Acid
Hydrogen
Fiberglass Separator
ABS Plastic
Skin Contact:
Eye Contact:
Ingestion:
10/1/2003
WEIGHT %
6.2
9.4
about 1.3
N/A
ISSUED BY ENGINEERING
HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS
LD50
TLV
N/A
1mg/m 3
ORAL
(500) mg/kg
(2,140) mg/kg about 70% about 20% about 5% about 5%
DENSITY
11.34
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
PHYSICAL DATA
MELTING POINTS
SOLLUBILITY
(H
2
O)
327.4º C (Boiling)
1070º C (Boiling)
None
40 mg/l(15 0 C)
290º C (Boiling) about 114º C (Boiling)
N/A
None
100%
Slight
N/A N/A None
FLAMMABILITY DATA
FLASHPOINT EXPLOSIVE LIMIT
None
None
None
None
N/A
None
4% - 72.4%
N/A
N/A
TELEPHONE NO.
LC50
INHALATION
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ODOR
None
None
None
Acidic
Toxic
No Odor
COMMENTS
(619) 661-2030
LC50
CONTACT
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
APPEARANCE
Silver-Gray Metal
White Powder
Brown Powder
Clear Colorless Liquid
White Fibrous Glass
Solid
Sealed batteries can emit hydrogen if over charged
(float voltage > 2.40 VPC).
Toxic vapors may be released. In case of fire, wear self-contained breathing apparatus.
Temp. over 300º C (572º F) may release combustible gases. In case of fire: wear positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus.
FIRST AID
SULFURIC ACID PRECAUTIONS
Flush with water, see physician if contact area is large or if blisters form.
Call physician immediately and flush with water until physician arrives.
Call physician. If patient is conscious, flush mouth with water, have patient drink milk or sodium bicarbonate solution.
Continued on Page 2
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
(PAGE 2 OF 2)
C O M P O N E N T
S T A B I L I T Y
C O L Y M E R I Z A T I O N
I N C O M P A T I B I L I T Y
D E C O M P O S I T I O N P R O D U C T S
C O N D I T I O N S T O A V O I D
R E A C T I V I T Y D A T A
S u l f u r i c A cid
S t a b l e a t a l l t e m p e r a t u r es
W i l l n o t p o l y m e r i ze
R e a c t i v e m e t a l s , s t r o n g b a s e s , m o s t o r g a n i c c o m p o u n d s
S u l f u r i c d i o x i d e , t r i o x i d e , h y d r o g e n s u l f i d e , h y d r o g e n
P r o h i b i t s m o k i n g , s p a r k s , e t c .
f r o m b a t t e r y c h a r g i n g a r e a .
A v o i d m i x i n g a c i d w i t h o t h e r c h e m i c a l s
S t
W e a p s t s e t o t d i s a k e p o s a i l n c a m e t s e h o o f d : l e a k o r s p i l l :
S P I L L O R L E A K P R O C E D U R E S
I f s u l f u r i c a c i d i s s p i l l e d f r o m a b a t t e r y , n e u t c a r b o n s y s t e m .
( s o
D o d a n o a s h ) , t o a l l o w r c a l c i u m u n n e u t r a l o x i d e i z e d
( l i m e ) .
a c i d i n t o r i l i z e a c i d
F l u s h a r e a s e w a g e s w i t h b i c a r b o n a t e w y s i t h t e m .
w a t e r a n d d
( b a k i n g i s c a r d t s o o d a t h e
) , s o d i u m s e w a g e
N e u w a s t t r i l e i z e d a n d a c i d d i s p o m a y s e d b o f e f l u s h a c c o r e d d i d o n g t w o n t h e l o c a ,l s e w e r .
s t a t e ,
S p a n d e f n t e d b a t t e r i e s e r a l g u i d e m l i u s t n e s .
b e
A t r e a t e d c o p y o f a s h t h i s a z a r
M S d o u s
D S m u s t b e s u p p l i e d t o a n y s c r a p d e a l e r o r s e c o n d a r y l e a d s m e l t e r w i t h b a t t e r y .
P R O T E C T I O N
S
R
E
K
E
Y
I
S P
E
N
S
I R
E
A T
X P
O R
O S
Y
U R E S I T E P R O T E C T I ON C O M M E N TS
R u b b e r g l o v e s , A p r on
R e s p i r a t o r ( f o r l e a d)
P r o t e c t i v e e q u i p m e n t o t h e r w i s e d a m a g e d .
A m u r e s t b s p i r e a t w o o r r n i f t h s h o u l d e b b a t t e r y i s e c r a c k e d o r w o r n d u r i n g r e c l a i m o p e r a t i o n s i f t h e T L V i s e x c e e d e d .
S a f e t y g o g g l e s , F a c e S h i e ld
E L E C T R I C A L S A F E T Y
D u e t o t h e b a t t e r y ' s l o w i n t e r n a l r e s i s t a n c e a n d h i g h p o w e r d e n s i t y , h i g h l e v e l s o f s h o r t c i r c u i t c u r r e n t c a n b e d e v e l o p e d a c r o s s t h e b a t t e r y t e r m i n a l s .
D o n o t r e s t t o o l s m a i n t a i n i n g b a t t e r y s y s t e m s .
o r c a b l e s o n t h e b a t t e r y .
U s e i n s u l a t e d t o o l s o n l y .
F o l l o w a l l i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d d i a g r a m s w h e n i n s t a l l i n g o r
H E A L T H H A Z A R D D A T A
L E A D : T h e t o x i c e f f e c t s o f l e a d a r e a c c u m u l a t i v e a n d s l o w t o a p p e a r .
I t a f f e c t s t h e k i d n e y s , r e p r o d u c t i v e , a n d c e n t r a l n e r v o u s s y s t e m s .
T h e s y m p p a i n .
t o m s
E x p o o f s u r l e e a d t o o v e r l e a d e x p o f r o m s u a r e a b a t r e t e r a n e m i a , y m o s t v o m o f t e r n i t i n g o c
, c h u r e a s d a c h e d u r i n g
, l s t o m a c h e a d r e c l a i p a i n ( l e a d m o p e r a t i c o l o n s i c ) , t h r o d i z z i n e s s , u g h t h e l o s s b r e a t h o f i n g a p p o r e t i t e , a n d m u s c l e a n d i n g e s t i o n o f l e a d d u s t j o i n t o r f u m e s .
S U L a c i d
F U w i l l
R c
I C a u s
A e
C I D : S u l f u r i c
G I t r a c t b u r n s .
a c i d
A c i d i s a c a n s t r o n g b e r e l c o e a r r o s s e d i v i f e t
.
h
C o n t a c t w i t h a c i d e b a t t e r y c a s e i s d c a n a m a c g a s e d u e s e v e r e o r i f v e n t s b u r n s a r e o n t h e s t a m p e r e d k i n w i t a n d h .
i n e y e s .
I n g e s t i o n o f s u l f u r i c
F I B E R G L A S S S E P A R A T O R :
C o m f o l l w i t h t y p e H f i l t e r .
A b o v e
N T P o r O S H A .
F i b r o u r g l a s s
1 0 F / C C u p t o i s a n i r r i t a
5 0 F / C C n t u s o f t h e e U l t r u a p p e r
T w i n r e p i r a t o r y w i t h t y p e t r a c t ,
H f i l s t e r .
k i n
T h a n d i s p e r o y e s .
d u c t
F o r e x p o s u r e i s n o t c o n s i d u p e r e d t o 1 0 F / C C u c a r c i n o g e n i c s e M b y
S A
A L L D A T A M U S T B E P A S S E D T O A N Y S C R A P D E A L E R O R S M E L T E R W H E N B A T T E R Y I S R E S O L D .
Power-Sonic Corporation
9163 Siempre Viva Road, San Diego, CA 92154 Tel (619) 661-2020 Fax (619) 661-3650
Website: www.power-sonic.com E-Mail: [email protected]
Material Safety Data Sheet
May be used to comply with
OSHA's Hazard Communication Standard.
29 CFR 1910.1200 Standard must be consulted for specific requirements.
Identity (As Used on Label and List)
KEEPER II/Lithium/Thionyl Chloride Battery
Section I
Manufacturer's Name
Eagle-Picher Technologies, LLC
Address (Number, Street, City State, and Zip Code)
P.O. Box 130
14212 Bethel Road
Seneca, MO 64865
U.S. Department of Labor
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(Non-Mandatory Form)
Form Approved
OMB No. 1218-0072
Note: Blank spaces are not permitted. If any item is not applicable, or no information is available, the space must be marked to indicate that
Emergency Telephone Number
417-776-2256 800-424-9300 (CHEMTREC)
Telephone Number for Information
417-776-2256
Date Prepared
1-Jul-98
Signature of Preparer (optional)
Section II - Hazardous Ingredients/Identity Information
Hazardous Components (Specific Chemical Identity, Common Name(s))
Lithium metal Cas #7439-93-2
Thionyl chloride (SOC1
2
) Cas #007719-09-7
OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV
N/A-reactive alkali metal
1/0 ppm 5/0 ppm
Other Limits Recommended % (optional)
Section III - Physical/Chemical Characteristics
Boiling Point
N/A
Vapor Pressure (mm Hg.)
N/A
Vapor Density (Air=1)
N/A
Specific Gravity (H
2
O=1)
Melting Point
N/A
N/A
Evaporation Rate (Butyl Acetate=1)
N/A
Solubility in Water
N/A
Appearance in Odor
N/A
Section IV - Fire and Explosion Hazard Data
Flash Point (Method Used)
N/A
Flammable Limits
Extinguishing Media
Do not use water. Use dry chemical, soda ash, sand.
Special Fire Fighting Procedures
Use self contained breathing apparatus and full protective equipment.
LEL UEL
Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazards
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 125°C (257°F), incinerate or expose contents to water.
Vent, rupture or explosion may result and cause severe burns.
(Reproduce Locally) OSHA 174, Sept. 1985
Section V - Reactivity Data
Stability Unstable
Stable XX
Conditions to Avoid:
Vent rupture or explosion will release thionyl chloride
Incompatibility (Materials to Avoid)
SOC1
2
Water, humid air, alkalies, and temperature above 140°C (284°F)
Hazardous Decomposition or Byproducts
SOC1
2
In presence of water or humid air, hydrochloric acid & sulfur oxide.
Hazardous
May Occur
Polymerization Will Not Occur
Section VI - Health Hazard Data
XX
Conditions to Avoid
Routes(s) of Entry
Eyes
Inhalation?
Health Hazards (Acute and Chronic)
Yes
Skin?
Yes
Ingestion?
Yes
SOC1
2
- Will burn and irritate eyes & skin. Upper respiratory irritant. Continuous inhalation of fumes may cause lung damage.
Carcinogenicity
N/A
NTP?
IARC Monographs?
OSHA Regulated?
Signs and Symptoms of Exposure
SOC1
2
- Eye and skin irritation, pungent odor and respiratory irritation.
Medical Conditions Generally Aggravated by Exposure
N/A
Emergency and First Aid Procedures
If free(S0C1
2
) is present, evacuate areas and provide ventilation, wash exposed area with soda ash or sodium bicarbonate solution. Seek medical attention.
Section VII - Precautions for Safe Handling and Use
Steps to Be Taken in Case Material is Released or Spilled
Avoid contact if vent rupture or explosion has occurred. Other wise protect from heat, short circuit of terminals, an accumulation of shorted batteries, which may cause dangerous elevated temperatures
Waste Disposal Method
Dispose of waste according to federal EPA, state and local regulations.
Precautions to be taken in Handling and Storing
Do not short circuit, heat above 125°C (257°F), recharge, disassemble, incinerate or expose to water.
Other Precautions
Section VIII - Control Measures
Self-contained breathing apparatus
Ventilation Local Exhaust
Mechanical (General)
N/A
Protective Gloves
Neoprene
Other Protective Clothing or Equipment
N/A
Work/Hygienic Practices
N/A
Specific
Other
Eye Protection
Recommended
B
MSDS No.- T-36-01 (Revision. -G)
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
SECTION 1- CHEMICAL PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
Manufacturer Name- Tadiran Batteries Ltd., P. O. Box 1, Kiryat Ekron, Israel 70500.
US office address- 2 Seaview Blvd. Port Washington NY 11050
Emergency Telephone No. – CHEMTREC: 1-800-424-9300
Tel. for information: 1-516-621-4980
Tel. for information 972-8-944-4503
Products Name: Primary Lithium Thionyl Chloride (Li/SOCl
2
) cells and batteries, Nonrechargeable. Cells include the models of TL, TLH, and TLL, 3.6V series.
SECTION 2- COMPOSITION, INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Ingredient Name
Lithium Metal (Li)
CAS # % ACGIH (TLV) OHSA
(PEL)
7439-93-2 <5% Not Established None
CHIP
Classification
F: R14/15
C: R34
Thionyl Chloride (SOCl
Lithium Chloride (LiCl)
2
) 7719-09-7 <47
7447-41-8
%
1 ppm
(5 mg/M 3 )
<2% Not Established
R: 14/15, 34
S: (1/2), 8,43,45
5 mg/m 3 R: 14,20/22,29,
35.
S: (1/2),26,36/
37/39, 45
Carbon (C)
Aluminum Chloride (AlCl
3
1333-86-4 <6% 3.5 mg/m
) 7446-70-0 <5% 2 mg/m 3
3 3.5
(Al salt, soluble)
R:
S:
45
34
(1/2),7/8,28,
SECTION 3 - HAZARD IDENTIFICATION
The lithium Thionyl chloride batteries described in this MSDS are hermetically sealed units, which are not hazardous when used according to the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Under normal condition of use of the batteries, the electrode materials and the liquid electrolyte they contained are non-reactive provided the battery integrity is maintained. Risk of exposure exists only in case of mechanical, electrical or thermal abuse. Thus the batteries should not short circuit, recharge, puncture, incinerate, crush, immerse in water, force discharge, or expose to temperatures above the temperature range of the cell or battery. In these cases there is risk of fire or explosion
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
1/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
SECTION 4- FIRST AID MEASURES
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
In case of battery rupture, explosion, or major leakage, evacuate personnel from contaminated area and provide good ventilation to clear out corrosive fumes, gases or the pungent odor. Seek immediate medical attention.
Eyes First rinse with plenty of water for 15 minutes (remove contact lenses if easily possible), and then seek medical attention.
Skin Remove contaminated clothes and rinse skin with plenty of water or shower for
15 min. Refer to medical attention.
Inhalation Remove to fresh air, rest, and half-upright position, use artificial respiration if needed, and refer to medical attention.
Ingestion rinse mouth, DO NOT induce vomiting, give plenty of water to drink, and refer to medical attention.
SECTION 5- FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
FLAMMABLE LIMIT IN AIR: NA
EXTINGUISHING MEDIA:
1. Lith- X (Class D extinguishing media) is the only effective on fires involving a few lithium batteries. If the cells are directly involved in a fire DO NOT USE: WATER,
SAND, CO
2
, HALON, and DRY POWDER OR SODA ASH EXTINGUISHERS.
2. If the fire is in adjacent area and the cells that are either packed in their original containers or unpacked, the fire can be fought based on fueling material, e.g., paper and plastic products. In these cases the use of copious amounts of cold water is effective extinguishing media. Storage area may employ sprinkler system with cold water.
AUTO-IGNITION: NA
SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES: Wear self-contained breathing apparatus to avoid breathing of irritant fumes (NIOSH approved SCBA & full protective equipment). Wear protective clothing and equipment to prevent body contact with electrolyte solution.
Fire may be fought, but only from safe fire-fighting distance. Evacuate all persons from immediate area of fire.
UNUSUAL EXPLOSION AND FIRE EXPLOSION: Battery may explode when subject to: excessive heat (above 150ºC), recharged, over-discharged (discharge below 0V), punctured and crushed. During thermal decomposition generation of chlorine (Cl
2
), hydrogen chloride (HCl), and sulfur dioxide (SO
2
) can be formed.
SECTION 6- SPILL OR LEAKAGE PROCEDURES
PROCEDURES TO CONTAIN AND CLEAN UP LEAKS OR SPILLS: The material contained within the battery would only be released under abusive conditions.
In the event of battery rapture and leakage: contain the spill while wearing proper protective clothing and ventilate the area. Than, cover with sodium carbonate
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
2/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
(Na
2
CO
3
) or 1:1 mixture of soda ash and slaked slime. Keep away from water, rain, and snow. Placed in approved container (after cooling if necessary) and disposed according to the local regulations.
NEUTRALIZING AGENT: Sodium carbonate (Na
2 and slaked slime.
CO
3
) or 1:1 mixture of soda ash
WASTE DISPOSAL METHOD: Product decomposed by water must be neutralized.
May be added to waste water in sufficiently diluted form.
PRECAUTIONS IN HANDLING AND STORING; Avoid short-circuiting, overcharging and heating to high temperatures. Store the batteries in dry and cool area and keep container dry and tightly closed in well-ventilated area. Store away from food and drink.
OTHER PRECAUTIONS; Never attempt to disassemble, machine, or otherwise modify batteries or injury may result.
SECTION 7- HANDLING AND STORAGE
The batteries should not be opened, destroyed or incinerate, since they may leak or rupture and release to the environment the ingredients that they normally contained in the hermetically sealed container.
HANDLING Do not short circuit terminals, or expose to temperatures above the temperature rating of the battery, over charge the battery, forced over-discharge
(voltage below 0.0V), throw to fire.
Do not crush or puncture the battery, or immerse in liquids.
STORAGE Storage preferably in cool (below 30ºC), dry and ventilated area, which is subject to little temperature change.
Do not place the battery near heating equipment, nor expose to direct sunlight for long periods. Elevated temperatures can result in shortened battery life and degrade performance.
Keep batteries in original packaging until use and do not jumble them.
Do not store batteries in high humidity environment for long periods.
OTHER the cells and the batteries are not rechargeable batteries and should not be charged.
Applying pressure and deforming the battery may lead to disassembly followed by eye skin and throat irritation.
Follow manufacturers recommendations regarding maximum recommended current and operating temperature range.
SECTION 8 - EXPOSURE CONTROLS & PERSONAL PROTECTION
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: None necessary under normal use. In case of abuse and leak of liquid or fumes, use NIOSH approved Acid Gas Filter Mask or Self-
Contained Breathing Apparatus.
VENTILATION: Not necessary under normal use. In case of abuse, use adequate mechanical ventilation (local exhaust) for battery that vent gas or fumes.
PROTECTIVE GLOVES: None under normal use. In case of spill use PVC or Nitrile gloves of 15 mils (0.015 inch) or thicker.
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
3/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
EYE PROTECTION: Use ANSI approved chemical worker safety goggles or face shield.
OTHER PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Chemical resistance clothing is recommended along with eye wash station and safety shower should be available meeting ANSI design criteria.
WORK HYGIENIC PRACTICES: Use good chemical hygiene practice. Wash hands after use and before drinking, eating or smoking. Launder contaminated cloth before reuse.
SUPPLEMENTARY SAFETY AND HEALTH DATA: If the battery is broken or leaked the main hazard is the electrolyte. The electrolyte is mainly solution of Lithium chloride (LiCl), and aluminum chloride (AlCl
3
) in Thionyl chloride (SOCl
2
).
Fires may be fought but only from safe fire fighting distance, evacuate all persons from immediate area of fire.
Prevent heating of the battery, charging the battery, discharge to predetermined limit, do not crush, disassemble, incinerate or short circuit.
SECTION 9- PHYSICAL DATA
BOILING POINT (760 mm Hg)
VAPOR PRESSURE (mm Hg, 25ºC)
VAPOR DENSITY (air=1)
NA, unless individual components exposed
NA, unless individual components exposed
NA, unless individual components exposed
DENSITY (gr/cc)
VOLATILE BY VOLUME (%)
> 1 gr/cc
NA
EVAPORATION RATE (butyl acetate=1) NA, unless individual components exposed
PHYSICAL STATE Solid
SOLUBILITY IN WATER (% by weight) NA, unless individual components exposed
PH
APPEARANCE
ODOR
NA, unless individual components exposed
Geometric Solid Object
If leaking, gives off pungent corrosive odor
SECTION 10- STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
STABLE OR NOT STABLE Stable
INCOMPATIBILITY (MATERIAL TO AVOID) Strong mineral acids, water and alkali solutions.
HAZARDOUS
DECOMPOSITION
PRODUCTS
1. Reaction of lithium with water: Hydrogen (H
2 hydroxide (LiOH).
), Lithium
2. Thermal decomposition over 150ºC: Sulfur oxides, (SO
2
SO
3
), Sulfur chorides (SCl
2
, S
2
Cl
2
), Chlorine (Cl
2 oxide (Li
2
O).
,
), Lithium
3. Electrolyte with water: Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) and SO
2
DECOMPOSITION TEMPERATURE (ºF)
NA
HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION: May Occur____ Will Not Occur __X__
CONDITIONS TO AVOID Avoid mechanical abuse, and electrical abuse such as short-circuiting, overcharge, over-discharge,
(voltage reversal) and heating.
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
4/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
SECTION 11- TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUE (TLV) AND SOURCE: NA
HEALTH HAZARD ACUTE AND CHRONIC: Inhalation, skin contact, eye contact and ingestion are not likely by exposure to sealed battery.
Inhalation, skin contact and eye contact are possible when the battery is opened.
Exposure to internal contents, the corrosive fumes will be very irritating to skin, eyes and mucous membranes. Overexposure can cause symptoms of non-fibrotic lung injury and membrane irritation.
Carcinogenicity- NTP: No
Carcinogenicity- IARC: No
Carcinogenicity- OSHA: No
Explanation of Carcinogenicity- No ingredient of a concentration of 0.1% or greater is listed as a carcinogen or suspected carcinogen.
SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF OVEREXPOSURE: Exposure to leaking electrolyte from ruptured or leaking battery can cause:
Inhalation - Burns and irritation of the respiratory system, coughing, wheezing, and shortness of breath.
Eyes - Redness, tearing, burns. The electrolyte is corrosive to all ocular tissues.
Skin - The electrolyte is corrosive and causes skin irritation and burns.
Ingestion - The electrolyte solution causes tissue damage to throat and gastro/ respiratory track.
MEDICAL CONDITION AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE: Preexisting skin, asthma and respiratory diseases are generally aggravated by exposure to liquid electrolyte vapors or liquid. For further information refer to section 4.
SECTION 12- ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
1. When properly used and disposed the battery does not present environmental hazard.
2. The battery does not contain mercury, cadmium, or lead.
3. Do not let internal components enter marine environment. Avoid release to waterways, wastewater or ground water.
SECTION 13- DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. Disposal must be in accordance with the applicable regulations in every country and state.
2. Disposal of the Lithium batteries should be performed by permitted, professional disposal firms knowledgeable in Federal, State or Local requirements of hazardous waste treatment and hazardous waste transportation.
3. Incineration should never be performed by battery users, but eventually by trained professional in authorized facility with proper gas and fume treatment.
4. Recycling of battery can be done in authorized facility, through licensed waste carrier.
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
5/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
B
SECTION 14- TRANSPORTATION /SHIPPING
Q u a l i t y F i r s t
Lithium batteries UN number 3090, class 9 (miscellaneous)
Lithium batteries contained in equipment, UN number 3091, class 9 (miscellaneous).
Packing instructions for 3090- ICAO 903 for air transport
IMDG 903 for sea transport
ADR/RID 903 and 903a for road /rail transport
Packing instructions for 3091- ICAO 912/918 for air transport
IMDG 903 for sea transport
ADR/RID 903 and 903a for road /rail transport
In the USA transportation is according to Code of Federal Regulations (CFR 49
Chapter 1, paragraph 173.185)
A list of Tadiran batteries and cells that are subject to transport regulations and those that are exempted can be obtained from Tadiran Batteries Ltd.
Identification and labeling in compliance with the product drawing should include the battery title, nominal voltage, lot number and warning.
SECTION 15- REGULATORY INFORMATION
1. The transport of the lithium batteries is regulated by the United Nations, “Model
Regulations on Transport of Dangerous Goods”, 13 revised edition-2003 (special provisions 188, 230, and 310).
2. Within the US the lithium batteries and cells are subject to shipping requirements under 49 CFRCh. 1, paragraph 173.185, “lithium batteries”.
3. Shipping of lithium batteries in aircrafts are regulated by the International Civil
Aviation Organization (ICAO) and the International Air Transport Association
(IATA) 2003 requirements in Special Provisions A45, A88 and A99.
4. Shipping of lithium batteries on sea are regulated the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods (IMDG) 2002 requirements in special provisions 188, 230 and 310.
5. Shipping of lithium batteries on Road and Rail, 2002 requirements in special provisions 188, 230 and 310.
6. The internal component (thionyl chloride) is hazardous under the criteria of the
Federal OHSA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1920.1200.
SECTION 16- OTHER INFORMATION/DISCLAIMER
The information and the recommendations set forth are made in good faith and believed to be accurate at the date of preparation. The present file refers to normal use of the product in question. Tadiran Batteries makes no warranty expressed or implied.
MSDS SOCl2 G rev GB.doc
6/6 Revised- 22/9/2004
DOW CORNING CORPORATION
Material Safety Data Sheet
DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.
Page: 1 of 7
1. IDENTIFICATION OF THE SUBSTANCE AND OF THE COMPANY
Dow Corning Corporation
South Saginaw Road
Midland, Michigan 48686
24 Hour Emergency Telephone: (989) 496-5900
Customer Service: (989) 496-6000
Product Disposal Information:
CHEMTREC:
(989) 496-6315
(800) 424-9300
MSDS No.: 01013190
Generic Description: Silicone
Physical Form: Liquid
Color: Colorless
Odor: Characteristic odor
NFPA Profile:
Note: NFPA = National Fire Protection Association
2. OSHA HAZARDOUS COMPONENTS
Revision Date: 2002/12/09
None present. This is not a hazardous material as defined in the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard.
3. EFFECTS OF OVEREXPOSURE
Acute Effects
Eye:
Skin:
Inhalation:
Oral:
Direct contact may cause temporary redness and discomfort.
No significant irritation expected from a single short-term exposure.
No significant effects expected from a single short-term exposure.
Low ingestion hazard in normal use.
Prolonged/Repeated Exposure Effects
Skin: No known applicable information.
Inhalation: No known applicable information.
Oral: No known applicable information.
Signs and Symptoms of Overexposure
No known applicable information.
Medical Conditions Aggravated by Exposure
No known applicable information.
The above listed potential effects of overexposure are based on actual data, results of studies performed upon similar compositions, component data and/or expert review of the product. Please refer to Section 11 for the detailed toxicology information.
DOW CORNING CORPORATION
Material Safety Data Sheet
DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.
Page: 2 of 7
4. FIRST AID MEASURES
Eye:
Skin:
Inhalation:
Oral:
Comments:
Immediately flush with water.
No first aid should be needed.
No first aid should be needed.
No first aid should be needed.
Treat symptomatically.
5. FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
Flash Point:
Autoignition
Temperature:
Flammability Limits in Air:
Extinguishing Media:
> 214 °F / > 101.1 °C (Closed Cup)
Not determined.
Not determined.
Fire Fighting Measures:
On large fires use dry chemical, foam or water spray. On small fires use carbon dioxide
(CO2), dry chemical or water spray. Water can be used to cool fire exposed containers.
Self-contained breathing apparatus and protective clothing should be worn in fighting large fires involving chemicals. Use water spray to keep fire exposed containers cool.
Determine the need to evacuate or isolate the area according to your local emergency plan.
Unusual Fire Hazards: None.
Hazardous Decomposition Products
Thermal breakdown of this product during fire or very high heat conditions may evolve the following hazardous decomposition products: Carbon oxides and traces of incompletely burned carbon compounds. Silicon dioxide.
Formaldehyde.
6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
DOW CORNING CORPORATION
Material Safety Data Sheet
DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.
Page: 3 of 7
Containment/Clean up: Determine whether to evacuate or isolate the area according to your local emergency plan. Observe all personal protection equipment recommendations described in Sections
5 and 8. For large spills, provide diking or other appropriate containment to keep material from spreading. If diked material can be pumped, store recovered material in appropriate container. Clean up remaining materials from spill with suitable absorbant. Clean area as appropriate since some silicone materials, even in small quantities, may present a slip hazard. Final cleaning may require use of steam, solvents or detergents. Dispose of saturated absorbant or cleaning materials appropriately, since spontaneous heating may occur. Local, state and federal laws and regulations may apply to releases and disposal of this material, as well as those materials and items employed in the cleanup of releases.
You will need to determine which federal, state and local laws and regulations are applicable. Sections 13 and 15 of this MSDS provide information regarding certain federal and state requirements.
Note: See section 8 for Personal Protective Equipment for Spills. Call Dow Corning Corporation, (989) 496-5900, if additional information is required.
7. HANDLING AND STORAGE
Use with adequate ventilation. Avoid eye contact.
Use reasonable care and store away from oxidizing materials.
8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS / PERSONAL PROTECTION
Component Exposure Limits
There are no components with workplace exposure limits.
Engineering Controls
Local Ventilation:
General Ventilation:
None should be needed.
Recommended.
Personal Protective Equipment for Routine Handling
Eyes:
Skin:
Use proper protection - safety glasses as a minimum.
Washing at mealtime and end of shift is adequate.
Suitable Gloves:
Inhalation:
No special protection needed.
No respiratory protection should be needed.
Suitable Respirator: None should be needed.
Personal Protective Equipment for Spills
Eyes:
Skin:
Use proper protection - safety glasses as a minimum.
Washing at mealtime and end of shift is adequate.
DOW CORNING CORPORATION
Material Safety Data Sheet
DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.
Page: 4 of 7
Inhalation/Suitable
Respirator:
Precautionary Measures: Avoid eye contact. Use reasonable care.
Comments:
No respiratory protection should be needed.
When heated to temperatures above 150 degrees C in the presence of air, product can form formaldehyde vapors. Formaldehyde is a potential cancer hazard, a known skin and respiratory sensitizer, and an irritant to the eyes, nose, throat, skin, and digestive system.
Safe handling conditions may be maintained by keeping vapor concentrations within the
OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit for formaldehyde.
Note: These precautions are for room temperature handling. Use at elevated temperature or aerosol/spray applications may require added precautions. For further information regarding aerosol inhalation toxicity, please refer to the guidance document regarding the use of silicone-based materials in aerosol applications that has been developed by the silicone industry
(www.SEHSC.com) or contact the Dow Corning customer service group.
9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Physical Form: Liquid
Color: Colorless
Odor: Characteristic odor
Specific Gravity @ 25°C: 0.965
Viscosity: 100 cSt
Freezing/Melting Point: Not determined.
Boiling Point: > 65 °C
Vapor Pressure @ 25°C: Not determined.
Vapor Density: Not determined.
Solubility in Water: Not determined. pH: Not determined.
Volatile Content: Not determined.
Note: The above information is not intended for use in preparing product specifications. Contact Dow Corning before writing specifications.
10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
Chemical Stability:
Hazardous
Polymerization:
Conditions to Avoid:
Materials to Avoid:
Stable.
Hazardous polymerization will not occur.
None.
Oxidizing material can cause a reaction.
11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Special Hazard Information on Components
No known applicable information.
DOW CORNING CORPORATION
Material Safety Data Sheet
DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.
Page: 5 of 7
12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Environmental Fate and Distribution
Air: This product is a high molecular weight liquid polymer which has a very low vapour pressure (<1 mm Hg). As a result it is unlikely to become an atmospheric contaminant unless generated as an aerosol.
Water:
Soil:
This product has a very low water solubility (< 100 ppb). As it has a specific gravity of < 1, if discharged to water, it will initially form a surface film. As the product is non volatile and has a high binding affinity for particulate matter, it will adsorb to particulates and sediment out.
If discharged to surface water, this product will bind to sediment. If discharged in effluent to a waste water treatment plant, the product is removed from the aqueous phase by
Degradation: binding to sewage sludge. If the sewage sludge is subsequently spread on soil, the silicone product is expected to degrade.
This product, polydimethylsiloxane, degrades in soil abiotically to form smaller molecules.
These in turn are either biodegraded in soil or volatilized into the air where they are broken down in the presence of sunlight. Under appropriate conditions, the ultimate degradation products are inorganic silica, carbon dioxide and water vapour. Due to the very low water solubility of this product, standard OECD protocols for ready and inherent biodegradability are not suitable for measuring the biodegradability of this product. The product is removed >80% during the sewage treatment process.
Environmental Effects
Toxicity to Water
Organisms:
Toxicity to Soil Organisms:
Based on analogy to similar materials this product is expected to exhibit low toxicity to aquatic organisms.
Experiments show that when sewage sludge containing polydimethylsiloxane is added to soil, it has no effect on soil micro-organisms, earthworms or subsequent crops grown in the soil.
Bioaccumulation: This product is a liquid and is a high molecular weight polymer. Due to its physical size it is unable to pass through, or be absorbed by biological membranes. This has been confirmed by testing or analogy with similar products.
Fate and Effects in Waste Water Treatment Plants
This product or similar products has been shown to be non-toxic to sewage sludge bacteria.
Ecotoxicity Classification Criteria
Hazard Parameters (LC50 or EC50)
Acute Aquatic Toxicity (mg/L)
High
<=1
Medium
>1 and <=100
Low
>100
Acute Terrestrial Toxicity <=100 >100 and <= 2000
This table is adapted from "Environmental Toxicology and Risk Assessment", ASTM STP 1179, p.34, 1993.
>2000
This table can be used to classify the ecotoxicity of this product when ecotoxicity data is listed above. Please read the other information presented in the section concerning the overall ecological safety of this material.
13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
DOW CORNING CORPORATION
Material Safety Data Sheet
DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.
Page: 6 of 7
RCRA Hazard Class (40 CFR 261)
When a decision is made to discard this material, as received, is it classified as a hazardous waste? No
State or local laws may impose additional regulatory requirements regarding disposal.
Call Dow Corning Corporate Environmental Management, (989) 496-6315, if additional information is required.
14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION
DOT Road Shipment Information (49 CFR 172.101)
Not subject to DOT.
Ocean Shipment (IMDG)
Not subject to IMDG code.
Air Shipment (IATA)
Not subject to IATA regulations.
Call Dow Corning Transportation, (989) 496-8577, if additional information is required.
15. REGULATORY INFORMATION
Contents of this MSDS comply with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200.
TSCA Status: All chemical substances in this material are included on or exempted from listing on the TSCA
Inventory of Chemical Substances.
EPA SARA Title III Chemical Listings
Section 302 Extremely Hazardous Substances:
None.
Section 304 CERCLA Hazardous Substances:
None.
Section 312 Hazard Class:
Acute: No
Chronic: No
Fire: No
Pressure: No
Reactive: No
Section 313 Toxic Chemicals:
None present or none present in regulated quantities.
DOW CORNING CORPORATION
Material Safety Data Sheet
DOW CORNING 200(R) FLUID, 100 CST.
Page: 7 of 7
Supplemental State Compliance Information
California
Warning: This product contains the following chemical(s) listed by the State of California under the Safe Drinking
Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition 65) as being known to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Massachusetts
None known.
No ingredient regulated by MA Right-to-Know Law present.
New Jersey
CAS Number Wt % Component Name
Pennsylvania
CAS Number Wt % Component Name
16. OTHER INFORMATION
Prepared by: Dow Corning Corporation
These data are offered in good faith as typical values and not as product specifications. No warranty, either expressed or implied, is hereby made. The recommended industrial hygiene and safe handling procedures are believed to be generally applicable. However, each user should review these recommendations in the specific context of the intended use and determine whether they are appropriate.
(R) indicates Registered Trademark
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
TeleFlow Corrector Model 3530-50B
Customer Instruction Manual
CI-3530-50B
May, 2006
Emerson Process Management
Bristol, Inc.
1100 Buckingham Street
Watertown, CT 06795
Phone: +1 (860) 945-2262
Fax: +1 (860) 945-2525 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Electric Canada, Ltd.
Bristol Canada
6338 Viscount Rd.
Mississauga, Ont. L4V 1H3
Canada
Phone: 905-362-0880
Fax: 905-362-0882 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
BBI, S.A. de C.V.
Homero No. 1343, 3er Piso
Col. Morales Polanco
11540 Mexico, D.F.
Mexico
Phone: (52-55)-52-81-81-12
Fax: (52-55)-52-81-81-09 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
Bristol Babcock, Ltd.
Blackpole Road
Worcester, WR3 8YB
United Kingdom
Phone: +44 1905 856950
Fax: +44 1905 856969 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
Emerson Process Management
Bristol, Inc.
22 Portofino Crescent,
Grand Canals Bunbury, Western Australia 6230
Mail to: PO Box 1987 (zip 6231)
Phone: +61 (8) 9725-2355
Fax: +61 (8) 8 9725-2955 www.EmersonProcess.com/Bristol
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information. However, Bristol, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
If you have comments or questions regarding this manual, please direct them to your local Bristol sales representative, or direct them to one of the addresses listed at left.
Bristol, Inc. does not guarantee the accuracy, sufficiency or suitability of the software delivered herewith. The Customer shall inspect and test such software and other materials to his/her satisfaction before using them with important data.
There are no warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, concerning the software and other materials delivered herewith.
TeleFlow
™
is a trademark of Bristol, Inc. The Emerson logo is a trade mark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. Other trademarks or copyrighted products mentioned in this document are for information only, and belong to their respective companies, or trademark holders.
Copyright (c) 2006, Bristol, Inc., 1100 Buckingham St., Watertown, CT 06795. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of
Bristol Inc.
Scarica
Link pubblico aggiornato
Il link pubblico alla tua chat è stato aggiornato. Puoi visualizzare e gestire i tuoi link di chat dopo la registrazione qui.
Link pubblico del documento
Pubblicità
